JP7301643B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a game machine in which a ball shooting handle is provided with vibrating means, and a vibration notice means is provided to notify a player that the ball shooting handle will vibrate.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019 (Fig. 5)

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to notify the player that the hitting ball shooting handle will vibrate, but there is room for improving the interest of the effect of vibrating the operation unit.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to improve the entertainment of the effect of vibrating the operation unit.

The game machine of means D is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
variable display means for performing variable display;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
A corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect that vibrates the operation unit,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
As the display mode of the correspondence display, there are an advance notice mode suggesting that the control is performed to the advantageous state, and a special mode that suggests that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed,
The production control means is
As the predetermined vibration effect, a first predetermined vibration effect can be executed at a first timing, and a second predetermined vibration effect can be executed at a second timing after the first timing,
After executing the first predetermined vibration effect and before executing the second predetermined vibration effect, the corresponding display is set to the special mode, and when the second predetermined vibration effect is executed, the corresponding display is changed to the notice mode. It can be a non-special embodiment including
The predetermined vibration effect can be executed by a plurality of vibration modes,
A game machine characterized in that a ratio of control to the advantageous state differs according to the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect.
The gaming machine of means B1 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Variable display means (CPU 103, effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A corresponding display (active display, pending display) corresponding to the variable display (variable display) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) that vibrates the operation unit (stick controller 31A),
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and FIG. As shown in 13-17, when the single vibration performance is executed, the expectation of the big hit is higher than when the single vibration performance is not executed),
As the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, pending display), the advance notice mode (blue mode, red mode) suggesting that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled, and the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect ) is to be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed by the display mode of the correspondence display, so it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of vibrating the operation unit.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production in a plurality of modes (first vibration production in the first mode, first vibration production in the third mode),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-13, first mode (expectation: low) < second mode (expectation: high) < Expectations for big hits are higher in the order of 3 modes (expectation: fixed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the aspect of the predetermined vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A predetermined vibration effect of a first mode (first vibration effect of the first mode) in which the vibration period for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is the first period (1500 ms), and the vibration period is the first period. is a different second period (3000 ms) and can execute a predetermined vibration effect of the second mode (first vibration effect of the second mode),
The corresponding display can be displayed in the special mode regardless of whether the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode (vibration notice with the first vibration effect as the notice target). When the effect is executed, regardless of whether the effect mode of the first vibration effect is the first mode (execution period: 1500 ms) or the second mode (execution period: 3000 ms), the vibration notice effect of the common mode is running)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the predetermined vibration presentation by the mode of the correspondence display.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (victory effect) for notifying that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled by the display means (image display device 5);
A special vibration effect (blessing effect) for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) after the notification effect can be executed,
A light emission effect that causes the light emitting device (operation unit LED) to emit light can be executed in a plurality of light emission modes (light emission color: white, light emission color: red, light emission color: rainbow color),
There are cases where a light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) is executed and a light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect (blessing effect) is executed,
It is possible to execute a light emission effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emission mode common to the light emission effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, and 13-6 , In the single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect of the third mode), the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. 13-9 , Even in the blessing effect that accompanies the vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors),
It is possible to execute a light emission effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-5, a single vibration effect (first In the first vibration effect of the first mode, the first vibration effect of the second mode, and the third vibration effect), the operation unit LED may emit white or red light, and as shown in FIG. 13-9, Even in the blessing effect that accompanies the vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (victory effect) for notifying that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled by the display means (image display device 5);
A special vibration effect (blessing effect) for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) after the notification effect can be executed,
It is possible to change the vibration period of the operation unit when executing the predetermined vibration effect and when executing the special vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the single unit In the vibration effect, the stick controller 31A is vibrated for 1500 ms to 3000 ms, while in the blessing effect, the stick controller 31A is vibrated for 6000 ms, as shown in FIG. 13-9).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the vibration period of the operating unit differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, so that the player can clearly distinguish and recognize the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The production effect of each production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production at a plurality of timings (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the execution timing of the first vibration production varies The timing for starting the display, the timing for executing the second vibration effect is the timing for establishment of the ready-to-win state, the timing for executing the third vibration effect is the timing for developing super ready-to-win, and the timing for executing the fourth vibration effect. is the timing just before the notification of the production result in the super reach production is performed),
Depending on the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs (as shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, the While the first vibration effect of the first mode, the first vibration effect of the second mode, and the third vibration effect are effects suggesting that the display result of the variable display is highly expected to be a big hit, The first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third mode are big hit confirmation effects for notifying that the display result of the variable display is winning the big win.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
Determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether to control to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state);
Determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
The predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (first vibration effect)) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)),
Based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)), the corresponding display can be displayed in the special mode (as shown in FIG. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing performance.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by the predetermined vibration effect and the mode of the corresponding display.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
The special mode includes a mode in which the corresponding display operates (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the active display or the hold display vibrates vertically and horizontally. mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the mode of correspondence display.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to means B8,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) terminates the operation of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the predetermined vibration production (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, single vibration When the production ends, the active display or suspended display is returned from the operating mode to the static mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined vibration effect, which is the target of the vibration advance notice effect, has been executed.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B9,
It can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production in a manner suggesting the set value of the game machine (when the first vibration production of the third mode is executed, the final display When the result is "no", it is determined that the set value is at least either "5" or "6" (high set value).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the predetermined vibration effect is displayed.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B10,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
Multiple types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) can be executed,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of advance notice effect including the predetermined vibration effect among the plurality of types of advance notice effects (as shown in FIG. 13-20, a third vibration effect, a strong development effect, or It is possible to display a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect),
When executing the predetermined type of notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and 13-26 (8), the timer image It is possible to execute a timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by 10TM800),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, a first effect pattern (as shown in FIGS. At the timing immediately after the image 10TM800 is updated to "00:00" which is the final mode, a pattern in which the third vibration effect is executed), and when the notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the specified As shown in the second effect pattern (FIGS. 13-26(8) and 13-27(9) in which the display changes to the specific mode, the timer image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode "00:00". A game machine characterized by having a pattern in which a cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effects of both the predetermined vibration effect and the notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect by the specific display. Interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B10,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
Multiple types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) can be executed,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of advance notice effect including the predetermined vibration effect among the plurality of types of advance notice effects (as shown in FIG. 13-20, a third vibration effect, a strong development effect, or It is possible to display a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect),
When executing the predetermined type of notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and 13-26 (8), the timer image It is possible to execute a timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by 10TM800),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, the first effect pattern (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8)) suggesting that the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the timer image 10TM800 is the final mode A pattern in which a third vibration effect is executed immediately after 00:00”, and a second effect pattern (Fig. 13-26) suggesting that a notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed. As shown in (8) and FIG. 13-27 (9), there is a pattern in which the cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after the timer image 10TM800 reaches the final state of "00:00". A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effects of both the predetermined vibration performance and the advance notice performance different from the predetermined vibration performance by the specific display, thereby improving the interest when the specific display is displayed. be able to.

The gaming machine of means A1 is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
A notification effect (victory effect) for notifying that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled by the display means (image display device 5);
A special vibration effect (blessing effect) for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) after the notification effect;
A predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect) which is an effect to vibrate the operation unit (stick controller 31A) and is different from the special vibration effect ) and is executable to
When the special vibration effect (blessing effect) and the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) are executed, the predetermined vibration effect is executed before the special vibration effect (timing T8 shown in FIG. 13-22). Blessing production is executed at , and single vibration production is executed before the timing of T8),
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and FIG. As shown in 13-17, when the single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect) is executed, it is better than when the single vibration effect is not executed. There are times when the expectation of a big hit is high (including a finalized production of a big hit), and even when the predetermined vibration production is executed, the advantageous state is not controlled (as shown in FIGS. 13-13 and 13-16, the first The first vibration effect of the mode, the first vibration effect of the second mode, and the third vibration effect can be executed when the display result is "no"),
The effect control means is capable of executing a vibration forewarning effect for notifying that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed (as shown in FIGS. A vibration notice effect is being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined vibration performance by executing the vibration previous notice performance, while the special vibration performance is executed. By not giving advance notice until then, it is possible to appropriately create interest in each of the effects when there are a plurality of types of effects for vibrating the operation unit.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production in a plurality of modes (first vibration production in the first mode, first vibration production in the third mode),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-13, first mode (expectation: low) < second mode (expectation: high) < Expectations for big hits are higher in the order of 3 modes (expectation: fixed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the aspect of the predetermined vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A predetermined vibration effect of a first mode (first vibration effect of the first mode) in which the vibration period for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is the first period (1500 ms), and the vibration period is the first period. is a different second period (3000 ms) and can execute a second aspect of the predetermined vibration effect (first vibration effect of the second mode),
Regardless of whether the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, a common vibration notice effect can be executed (vibration notice effect with the first vibration effect as a notice object When executed, regardless of whether the presentation mode of the first vibration presentation is the first mode (execution period: 1500 ms) or the second mode (execution period: 3000 ms), the common mode vibration notice presentation is performed. is done)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the predetermined vibration effect by the vibration advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A light emission effect that causes the light emitting device (operation unit LED) to emit light can be executed in a plurality of light emission modes (light emission color: white, light emission color: red, light emission color: rainbow color),
There are cases where a light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) is executed and a light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect (blessing effect) is executed,
It is possible to execute a light emission effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emission mode common to the light emission effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, and 13-6 , In the single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect of the third mode), the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. 13-9 , Even in the blessing effect that accompanies the vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors),
It is possible to execute a light emission effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-5, a single vibration effect (first In the first vibration effect of the first mode, the first vibration effect of the second mode, and the third vibration effect), the operation unit LED may emit white or red light, and as shown in FIG. 13-9, Even in the blessing performance that accompanies the vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit a rainbow color.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can change the vibration period of the operation unit when executing the predetermined vibration production and when executing the special vibration production (FIG. 13- 3 to 13-6, in the single vibration effect, the stick controller 31A vibrates for 1500 ms to 3000 ms. is being executed for 6000 ms)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the vibration period of the operation unit differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, so that the player can clearly distinguish and recognize the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The production effect of each production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production at a plurality of timings (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the execution timing of the first vibration production varies The timing for starting the display, the timing for executing the second vibration effect is the timing for establishment of the ready-to-win state, the timing for executing the third vibration effect is the timing for developing super ready-to-win, and the timing for executing the fourth vibration effect. is the timing just before the notification of the production result in the super reach production is performed),
Depending on the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs (as shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, the While the first vibration effect of the first mode, the first vibration effect of the second mode, and the third vibration effect are effects suggesting that the display result of the variable display is expected to be a big hit, The first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third mode are big hit determination effects for notifying that the display result of the variable display is winning the big win.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
Determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether to control to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state);
Determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
The predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (first vibration effect)) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)),
Vibration preview effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) (as shown in FIG. 13-28, vibration preview effect with the first vibration effect as the target of the notification) A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by the predetermined vibration effect and the vibration notice effect.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
Equipped with variable display means (effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display),
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can display a corresponding display (active display, pending display) corresponding to the variable display on the display means (image display device 5),
The vibration notice effect includes the effect of operating the corresponding display (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the active display or the hold display vibrates vertically and horizontally. displayed in the form)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the vibration advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
The gaming machine according to means A8,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) terminates the operation of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the predetermined vibration production (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, single vibration When the production ends, the active display or the suspended display is returned from the operating mode to the static mode.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined vibration effect, which is the target of the vibration advance notice effect, has been executed.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9,
It can be set to one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production in a manner suggesting the set value of the game machine (when the first vibration production of the third mode is executed, the final display When the result is "no", it is determined that the set value is at least either "5" or "6" (high set value).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the predetermined vibration effect is displayed.

The gaming machine of means A11 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
Multiple types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) can be executed,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of advance notice effect including the predetermined vibration effect among the plurality of types of advance notice effects (as shown in FIG. 13-20, a third vibration effect, a strong development effect, or It is possible to display a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect),
When executing the predetermined type of notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and 13-26 (8), the timer image It is possible to execute a timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by 10TM800),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, a first effect pattern (as shown in FIGS. At the timing immediately after the image 10TM800 is updated to "00:00" which is the final mode, a pattern in which the third vibration effect is executed), and when the notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the specified As shown in the second effect pattern (FIGS. 13-26(8) and 13-27(9) in which the display changes to the specific mode, the timer image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode "00:00". A pattern in which a cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after the game machine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effects of both the predetermined vibration effect and the notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect by the specific display. Interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means A12 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
Multiple types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) can be executed,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of advance notice effect including the predetermined vibration effect among the plurality of types of advance notice effects (as shown in FIG. 13-20, a third vibration effect, a strong development effect, or It is possible to display a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect),
When executing the predetermined type of notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and 13-26 (8), the timer image It is possible to execute a timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by 10TM800),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, the first effect pattern (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8)) suggesting that the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the timer image 10TM800 is the final mode A pattern in which a third vibration effect is executed immediately after 00:00”, and a second effect pattern (Fig. 13-26) suggesting that a notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed. As shown in (8) and FIG. 13-27 (9), there is a pattern in which the cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after the timer image 10TM800 reaches the final state of "00:00". A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the performance effects of both the predetermined vibration performance and the advance notice performance different from the predetermined vibration performance by the specific display, thereby improving the interest when the specific display is displayed. be able to.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116654 (FIG. 58), when an operation of the effect operation unit is detected during the effective period of operation, an acquisition effect is provided that notifies acquisition of the right to execute one of a plurality of element effects. An executed gaming machine is disclosed. In a gaming machine that executes a plurality of effects, such as the game machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116654 (FIG. 58), there is room for improving the interest before the execution of the effects. The inventions relating to the means C1 to C10 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and their object is to improve the amusement before execution of the effects in a gaming machine in which a plurality of effects are executed.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of notice effects (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect, battle effect) suggesting that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled,
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to a predetermined type of advance notice effect including a predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (third vibration effect)) for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) (as shown in FIGS. 13-20). , the timer image 10TM800 corresponding to the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, or the cut-in notice effect can be displayed),
When executing the predetermined type of advance notice effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect that changes the specific display to a specific mode (as shown in FIGS. 13-23 and 13-26, the remaining time (remaining time) indicated by the timer image It is possible to execute a timer effect that performs a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) from n seconds to 0 seconds remaining),
When the predetermined kind of advance notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the state is controlled to be more advantageous than the case where the predetermined kind of notice effect is executed without displaying the specific display. (As shown in Figure 13-20, when the timer effect is executed and the timer image is displayed, the notice effect (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect) is executed. When the timer effect is not executed and the timer image is not displayed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the advance notice effect is executed),
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-16, the third vibration effect is executed In the case, the expectation of the big hit is higher than in the case where the third vibration effect is not executed),
As the effect pattern of the specific effect, a first effect pattern (as shown in FIGS. At the timing immediately after the image 10TM800 is updated to "00:00", which is the final mode, the pattern in which the third vibration effect is executed), and when the notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the specified As shown in the second effect pattern (FIGS. 13-26(8) and 13-27(9) in which the display changes to the specific mode, the timer image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode "00:00". A pattern in which a cut-in notice effect is executed at the timing immediately after the game machine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effects of both the predetermined vibration effect and the notice effect different from the predetermined vibration effect by the specific display. Interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production in a plurality of modes (first vibration production in the first mode, first vibration production in the third mode),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-13, first mode (expectation: low) < second mode (expectation: high) < Expectations for big hits are higher in the order of 3 modes (expectation: fixed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the aspect of the predetermined vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
capable of executing a vibration forewarning effect for notifying that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed;
A predetermined vibration effect of a first mode (first vibration effect of the first mode) in which the vibration period for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is the first period (1500 ms), and the vibration period is the first period. is a different second period (3000 ms) and can execute a second aspect of the predetermined vibration effect (first vibration effect of the second mode),
Regardless of whether the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, a common vibration notice effect can be executed (vibration notice effect with the first vibration effect as a notice object When executed, regardless of whether the presentation mode of the first vibration presentation is the first mode (execution period: 1500 ms) or the second mode (execution period: 3000 ms), the common mode vibration notice presentation is performed. is done)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the predetermined vibration effect by the vibration advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (victory effect) for notifying that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled by the display means (image display device 5);
A special vibration effect (blessing effect) for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) after the notification effect can be executed,
A light emission effect that causes the light emitting device (operation unit LED) to emit light can be executed in a plurality of light emission modes (light emission color: white, light emission color: red, light emission color: rainbow color),
There are cases where a light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect) is executed and a light emitting effect corresponding to the special vibration effect (blessing effect) is executed,
It is possible to execute a light emission effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emission mode common to the light emission effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, and 13-6 , In the single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect of the third mode), the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. 13-9 , Even in the blessing effect that accompanies the vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors),
It is possible to execute a light emission effect corresponding to the special vibration effect in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-5, a single vibration effect (first In the first vibration effect of the first mode, the first vibration effect of the second mode, and the third vibration effect), the operation unit LED may emit white or red light, and as shown in FIG. 13-9, Even in the blessing effect that accompanies the vibration of the operation unit, the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A notification effect (victory effect) for notifying that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled by the display means (image display device 5);
A special vibration effect (blessing effect) for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A) after the notification effect can be executed,
It is possible to change the vibration period of the operation unit when executing the predetermined vibration effect and when executing the special vibration effect (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the single unit In the vibration effect, the stick controller 31A is vibrated for 1500 ms to 3000 ms, while in the blessing effect, the stick controller 31A is vibrated for 6000 ms, as shown in FIG. 13-9).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the vibration period of the operating unit differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect, so that the player can clearly distinguish and recognize the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The production effect of each production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production at a plurality of timings (as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the execution timing of the first vibration production varies The timing for starting the display, the timing for executing the second vibration effect is the timing for establishment of the ready-to-win state, the timing for executing the third vibration effect is the timing for developing super ready-to-win, and the timing for executing the fourth vibration effect. is the timing just before the notification of the production result in the super reach production is performed),
Depending on the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs (as shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, the While the first vibration effect of the first mode, the first vibration effect of the second mode, and the third vibration effect are effects suggesting that the display result of the variable display is highly expected to be a big hit, The first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third mode are big hit confirmation effects for notifying that the display result of the variable display is winning the big win.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6,
Determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether to control to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state);
Determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
capable of executing a vibration forewarning effect for notifying that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed;
The predetermined vibration effect (single vibration effect (first vibration effect)) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)),
Vibration preview effect corresponding to the predetermined vibration effect based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) (as shown in FIG. 13-28, vibration preview effect with the first vibration effect as the target of the notification) A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by the predetermined vibration effect and the vibration notice effect.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7,
Equipped with variable display means (effect control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display),
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can display a corresponding display (active display, pending display) corresponding to the variable display on the display means (image display device 5),
The vibration notice effect includes the effect of operating the corresponding display (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, when the vibration notice effect is executed, the active display or the hold display vibrates vertically and horizontally. displayed in the form)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the vibration advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to means C8,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) terminates the operation of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the predetermined vibration production (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, single vibration When the production ends, the active display or the suspended display is returned from the operating mode to the static mode.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the predetermined vibration effect, which is the target of the vibration advance notice effect, has been executed.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C9,
It can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can execute the predetermined vibration production in a manner suggesting the set value of the game machine (when the first vibration production of the third mode is executed, the final display When the result is "no", it is determined that the set value is at least either "5" or "6" (high set value).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the predetermined vibration effect is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit variation pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a cut-in effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios in pattern CI-3 of the cut-in effect; 9 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect determination process; They are an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio of the advance notice effect and a determination ratio of the effect pattern, and an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of an advance notice effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a notification mode of a variable display result for each variation pattern; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-1; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of cut-in effects and the determination ratio of effect patterns in modification 208SG-2; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-3; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios of the announcement effect and effect pattern determination ratios in Modified Example 208SG-4. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-5; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-6; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a set value suggesting effect executable period and a set value suggesting effect execution determination ratio in modification 208SG-7. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the characteristic part 027SH. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the game machine related to the characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern of the gaming machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an advance notice effect; It is a production example of each advance notice production. It is a production example of each advance notice production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of the advance notice effect, and the like; It is an explanatory view explaining item image production. It is a display example of each item image. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a determination ratio of item image effects and the like; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; It is a specific example of various timings. It is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process in the pachinko game machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process in the pachinko game machine based on the characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 027SH. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining setting value suggestion in a game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining setting value suggestion in a game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each piece of display information displayed on the image display device; It is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect determination process that is executed at the time of start winning. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a final display mode of active display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of active display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of pending display; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process performed at the time of a fluctuation start. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute an effect, (I1) and (I2) are used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, and are used to determine whether or not to execute an expectation level notice effect. (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the second change effect. (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a winning combination determination table for the expectation level advance notice effect, which is used when the first set suggestion effect is executed, and (L) is used when the first set suggestion effect is not executed. (M) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various production|presentations. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of mini-reel information; s It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute an expectation level suggesting effect and the effect mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect. , (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in forewarning effect and the effect mode, and (D) is a table for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in suggestion effect and the effect mode. It is an explanatory view showing . FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to cut-in notice presentation and cut-in suggestion presentation; It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the timer effect and the cut-in suggestion effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding a timer effect and a cut-in suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding a timer effect and a cut-in suggestion effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a low probability state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a high probability state; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for losing, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for big hits. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example regarding the advance notice effect; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of starting winning a prize. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the final display mode of active display; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of a change effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of a change effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of a change effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of a change effect; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute an operation unit vibration effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of execution timings and effects modes regarding operation unit vibration effects; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the timer display pattern of the timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing regarding timer production|presentation, and the specific example of an effect|presentation mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a special background effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a background image display pattern for the special background effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of execution timing and effect mode regarding special background effects; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of an advance notice production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to an advance notice effect; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of an advance notice production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to an advance notice effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to an advance notice effect; It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of an advance notice production. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to an advance notice effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to an advance notice effect; 4 is a time chart showing execution timings of an operation unit vibration effect; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for losing, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 1st vibration production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding 2nd vibration production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a 3rd vibration production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding 4th vibration production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to the vibration preview effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding a strong development production; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to a blessing performance; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding probability variation notification production|presentation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the execution presence or absence of a 1st vibration production|presentation, and a production|presentation mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the execution presence or absence of a 2nd vibration production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a strong development effect; It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the execution presence or absence of a 3rd vibration production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the execution presence or absence of a 4th vibration production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in announcement effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a vibration notice effect and a single vibration effect to be notified. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect and the corresponding advance notice effect; It is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the presence or absence of execution of the variable probability notification effect and the effect mode. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the single vibration effect and the vibration previous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect|presentation aspect regarding a single vibration effect, a notice effect, a vibration notice effect, and timer effect|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect|presentation aspect regarding a single vibration effect, a notice effect, a vibration notice effect, and timer effect|presentation. It is a time chart showing execution timings of a single vibration effect, an advance notice effect, and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a single-piece|unit vibration production|presentation, an advance notice production, and a timer production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding a single-piece|unit vibration production|presentation, an advance notice production, and a timer production|presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode relating to a single vibration effect as a pre-reading advance notice effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 208SG)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing part 208SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-27.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 208SG003, a glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is a left game area 208SG002L by operating the ball operating handle 30. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 208SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 208SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 208SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 208SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting switching switch 208SG052 is accommodated in the substrate case 208SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting switching switch 208SG052 are housed in the substrate case 208SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the substrate case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 208SG003 is closed. The operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. The lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. In the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 208SG201. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 208SG201. In other words, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 208SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the open sensor 208SG09 are ON when the power is turned on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 as a set value change state. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

By turning OFF the lock switch 208SG051 while any number from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the number displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. be. When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 sends a set value designation command to the effect control board 12, regardless of whether a new set value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the setting value specifying command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 208SG025A, second reservation display 208SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 208SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 208SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state in which game balls are launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 208SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 208SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results can be derived and displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 208SG025A and the second suspension display 208SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 208SG025A and second pending display 208SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second LED from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 208SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 208SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 208SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 208SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321, and the second movable body 208SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. An origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 208SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probable variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic part 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach is executed, and the super reach in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a variation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, five or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β , super reach γ, and super reach δ. In addition, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment Super reach variation pattern special figure fluctuation time in which super reach effect such as super reach is executed Super reach δ, super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α in order of special figure fluctuation pattern is set long.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as the variation pattern of the super reach γ, after once notifying that the variable display result is a win as the reach performance of the super reach γ, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. There is provided a variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing a resurrection effect. For this reason, the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect is set to have a special figure variation time longer than the variation pattern of normal super reach γ and a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern of super reach δ. However, it is exceptionally the highest (100%) variation pattern for the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. Table, jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a losing variation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Figure 8-7 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-7 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 4 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-8 (E) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-9 (C) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (F) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or short time state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (C), the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or short time state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state, "big hit" special figure assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" when the normal state or the time saving state is controlled to the big hit game state (this embodiment is 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, 1/240 when the setting value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6). In the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/160, and when the setting value is 4, it is 1 /140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state according to each setting value respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the set value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-11 (A) and FIG. 8-11 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature part 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the resurrection effect are executed. No super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), super reach γ jackpot variation pattern with resurrection effect executed (PB1-5), super reach δ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 51 to 200 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). 401 to 650 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) in which no resurrection effect is performed, and 651 to 700 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns in which resurrection effect is performed. (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation pattern for the big hit is determined using one variation pattern determination table, that is, the pachinko Although a form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the setting value set in the game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , the determination ratio of each variation pattern may be made different for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β deviation (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is super reach α. is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation ( PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Variation pattern of loss of reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of loss of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of loss of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of loss of super reach δ (PS2-5) , a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of deviation of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of deviation of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ (PA2-5) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for is possible is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2) , 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). , and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 850 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 851 to 930 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Variation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to super reach γ deviation variation patterns, and 971 to 997 are assigned to super reach δ deviation variation patterns, that is, if the variable display result is deviation, super reach Since the variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for loss is a variation pattern for loss of super reach α, a variation pattern for loss of super reach β, a variation pattern for loss of super reach γ, and a variation pattern for loss of super reach δ. Although each determination ratio exemplifies a form that is completely the same between each set value, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination rate of the pattern, the variation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ, and the variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ may be different for each set value.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the form of determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect is to be executed are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The general pattern holding storage unit stores the holding information of the general pattern game which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 208SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Also, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting portion, data constituting a reception command buffer at the time of start winning is stored. In the start winning command buffer, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4" area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. In addition, in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4" area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, a start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), or a pending memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer correspond to these commands, and the first special figure reservation storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the data separately from the drawing reserved storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted upward one by one as shown in FIG.

Effect control CPU120, at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening, stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, commands are stored from the top (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage. I will go.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 208SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (208SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be possible to specify the number of the first special figure reservation memory. When the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (208SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (208SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 208SGS505, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (208SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (208SGS506).

In addition, when the second start opening switch is not ON (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reservation memory number is the upper limit (208SGS505; Y), the start prize determination process is terminated.

After executing either of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (208SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (208SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (208SGS516), the start prize determination process is performed. exit. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 208SGS 512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 208SG, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal process (step S22 in FIG. 5), the display corresponding to the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the set value Result determination table (see FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10) is selected, and the selected display result determination table is used to set the special figure display result (variable display result of special symbols) as "jackpot" and the jackpot game state It is determined whether or not to control to a small hit game state as a determination of whether to control to a special figure display result as a "small hit".

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning of 208SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop displaying the big hit pattern or the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 is first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 208SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state at machine 1 (208SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a probability variable state (high probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is on, and is in a short time state (low probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is off and the time saving flag is on. , and specify that it is in a normal state (low probability low base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 208SGS521, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) Set the display result determination table, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and the setting value is 2 And if the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2 and the game state is a variable If there is, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. ) to set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. to set.

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 4 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the setting value is 5 and When the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (D), the set value is 6 and the game state is normal state or time saving state shown in FIG. 8-8 (E) Set the first special figure display result determination table, and set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 1 and if the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), the setting value is 2 and When the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (D), and if the setting value is 3 and the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-10 (A) Set the table, if the set value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), set the set value is 5 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (D) is set, and if the set value is 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-10 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In addition, in the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table are compared with the value of the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a big hit, and if the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a small hit. However, if the value of the random number MR1 is out of the numerical range of the big hit determination value and out of the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined as lost.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined at 208SGS525 that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined not to be a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, when it is determined that it will be lost in the variable display (208SGS527;N), the first symbol designation, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for deviation shown in FIG. (208SGS528; Y), selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 8-14(D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined at 208SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (208SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), go to 208SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 208SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (208SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". Execute (208SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (208SGS532), and proceed to 208SGS536.

In addition, in this feature part 208SG, in these variation pattern determination table A to variation pattern determination table D for loss, a determination value of 1 to 700 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern in common. 701 to 997 are assigned super reach fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss. Even if the number of pending memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used. is determined.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532, and 208SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (208SGS536). In this characteristic part 208SG, as shown in FIG. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Incidentally, the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. 8-17 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer at the time of start winning, for one buffer number (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, for example, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered as the stop pattern is displayed. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, if the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, for example, a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are arranged in an odd number other than "7" or "3" as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Then, if the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are "7" or "3" as a stop pattern (jackpot design). Also, if the received display result designation command is the result designation command of the fifth variable table that indicates a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" or "246", or three consecutive even numbers (or (odd number), etc., to determine a combination of decoration patterns (small hit pattern). When the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating a loss, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) different from the above-described big win patterns and small win patterns is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After executing 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of Super Reach can be specified from the variation pattern designation command read in 208SG275. If the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; Y), cut for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in effect to be described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. In effect determination processing (208SGS278) is executed and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, at 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the notice effect (208SGS279). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-29, the notice effect is a effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. It is an effect that can be executed in the period from the time to the timing of reach.

After executing 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (208SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from among a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, a variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time (variable display time) specified by the variable pattern designation command (208SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208SGS285).

8-18 to 8-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). If the variation pattern is a super reach α or super reach β variation pattern (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern is a super reach γ or super reach δ variation pattern (208SGS301; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (208SGS302).

When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether the variation pattern is PB1-5, that is, whether it is the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect (208SGS303). . When the variation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the jackpot type (208SGS304) and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). .

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. proceed to In addition, in 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Note that the cut-in effect in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIGS. and prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to patterns.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w with a blue effect, and the effect pattern is If it is pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x with a red effect. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005z with a rainbow effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS307), Go to 208SGS308. In addition, in the 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is the jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10%. determined by the ratio of In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 1%.

After executing 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), and terminates the cut-in effect determination process.

Also, in 208SGS303, if the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the pachinko game machine 1. (208SGS311), and determines whether or not the specified setting value is one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified based on the setting value designation command received from the CPU 103 .

In addition, when execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of cut-in effect times out, a process table for cut-in effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table each time the variable display effect process is executed. 9, etc.) to execute the cut-in effect.

If the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), a cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. 208SGS3316 determines the presence/absence of and effect pattern (208SGS3316), and executes the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in the 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the cut-in Non-execution of production is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C. The presence or absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in the 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. Runs are determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is wrong in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is wrong. The presence or absence of performance execution and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), in 208SGS318, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is reduced to 55% based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result being a failure. Decide on a percentage. Also, as a cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS312 is any one of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4. (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big win type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether the big win type is a big win A or a big win B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS325), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 8-21(C), based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS324; N), based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-21(C), the 208SGS326 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high probability high base state (208SGS327). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS327; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 8-21(C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is a high probability high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS329), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the setting value is 4, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5. (208SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS334), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 8-21(D), the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS333; N), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-21(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS336). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS336; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high probability high base state Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 35%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5 and the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS338), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the setting value is 5, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the variable It is determined whether or not the displayed result is a big hit (208SGS339). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS342), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 8-21(E), the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS341; N), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-21(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a loss in 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is a high probability high base state (208SGS344). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS344; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-accuracy-high-base state, cut Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS346), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the setting value is 6, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variation pattern of super reach δ is (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). . Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. 208SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-22, 208SGS354 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS353; N), based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS355), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is performed. to run. Incidentally, in 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 8-22, based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a failure (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. process. Incidentally, in 208SGS356, as shown in FIG. 8-22, based on the result of the variable display being a failure, it is decided at a rate of 35% not to execute the cut-in effect. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the performance is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, it is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Big hit expectation in cut-in effect: non-execution<pattern CI-1<pattern CI-2<pattern CI-3<pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-4, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined that the variable display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win C.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-21, 8-22 and 8-24, the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 when performing variable display with the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ. The execution ratio is set to be the lowest (0%) when the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern is super reach γ deviation/super reach δ deviation. Then, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ jackpot for executing the resurrection performance, the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern does not execute the resurrection performance - the super reach γ jackpot/super reach δ jackpot, the set value. is 4 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 5 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 6 and the variation pattern. is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to increase.

Also, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3, When the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-3, while it is determined that the variable display result will be a big win (any of the big wins A to C), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. is 4 to 6, even if the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result may be wrong. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3. The expectation of a big hit is set low when the effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win effect of super reach γ is executed, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost, the pachinko game machine 1 is determined to be any one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, if we focus on the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 more than the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) that executes the resurrection effect. and pattern CI-4 are set low. Therefore, in the case where the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the cut-in effect is executed in CI-3 and the failure is notified, so that the pachinko game machine In spite of the player recognizing that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the resurrection performance is executed later and the big win is notified, thereby pachinko. This prevents the player from being discouraged when the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, which becomes indefinite.

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect. If you pay attention to it, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same for any setting value, but when the variable display result is a loss. , the higher the setting value, the higher the ratio of execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 (the ratio of execution of pattern CI-3 at the time of failure when setting values 4 to 6: setting value 4 < setting value 5<setting value 6).

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is different. Since the frequency becomes higher, the player can expect that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. there is

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. , if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display results are different, if the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the game state is the low-probability-high-base state or the low-probability state. The pattern CI-3 is set to perform the cut-in effect at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high-probability-high base state, and the variable display result is lost, so that the game state is low-probability. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to one of the set values 4 to 6, so that the player can be urged to continue the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. ing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21(B) to 8-21(E), focusing on the case where the variable display result is lost, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the cut-in. The performance execution ratio is set high. In other words, in the present characteristic portion 208SG, it is suggested that any one of the set values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is lost. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed in a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed. It is possible to improve a game interest.

8-21 and 8-22 are merely examples, and the determination ratio of the cut-in effect pattern is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. You may make it differ from the characteristic part 208SG suitably. However, if the determination ratio of the effect pattern of these cut-in effects is appropriately changed, the tendency of the degree of expectation of the jackpot of each effect pattern (the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the cut-in effect: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself is maintained so that a player does not misunderstand the degree of expectation for a big win according to the production pattern of the cut-in production when the cut-in production is executed. is desirable.

Further, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In this example, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the setting value set in the variable display and the variable display result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super In the case of performing variable display with the variation pattern of reach γ or super reach δ, cut-in effect may be performed without fail during the variable display. In this way, when the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, The percentage assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect when the variable display result is a loss (see FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to differ from the characteristic portion 208SG. By doing so, it is possible to improve interest by executing cut-in effects during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, while preventing excessive cut-in effects from being executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6.

FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-17. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big win or a loss (208SGS362; N), execution of cut-in effect is further determined. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not any cut-in effect pattern is stored (208SGS363).

When execution of cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored effect pattern of cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364 ). If the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. Then, based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big win (208SGS366; Y), the big win type is specified (208SGS367), and whether or not to execute the notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big win type (208SGS368).

Also, if the variable display result is a failure (208SGS366; N), the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Incidentally, as described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost is set to the pachinko game machine 1. This is the case where the set value is any one of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4) fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 8-26(C) and 8-30, pattern YE-1 is a production pattern for displaying an image 208SG005s of character A on the image display device 5 with a blue effect. , and pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern in which the image 208SG005t of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 with a red effect, and pattern YE-3 is a effect pattern in which the image 208SG005u of character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying a collective image 208SG005v of characters A to C on the image display device 5 with a rainbow color effect.

Further, in the process of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), the non-execution of the notice effect is reduced by 50%. Decide on a percentage. In addition, as execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is patterned. When executed in YE-1, when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-2, when the notice effect is executed in YE-3, when the notice effect is executed in YE-4. It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit is high (Expectation of the big hit of the advance notice effect: non-execution of notice effect <execution in pattern YE-1<execution in pattern YE-2<execution in pattern YE-3<pattern YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when it is determined that the cut-in effect is not to be executed, or the cut-in effect is a pattern CI- in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of the pattern CI-3 and the pattern CI-4. 1 or pattern CI-2 is determined, only when the big win type is the big win C, there is provided a case where the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-4. For this reason, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, it is also determined whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to attract people's attention.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, or a variable display result is a big hit as a cut-in production pattern. In the case where the pattern CI-4 that determines that the jackpot type is the jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 will be used as the effect pattern of the notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the variation pattern. It is set to never run. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only with pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2, so that the cut-in effect is started when the variable display result is a big hit. This prevents the player from recognizing it at a timing (starting timing of the advance notice effect) before the timing. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss, both the advance notice effect and the cut-in effect are not executed in the effect pattern with a high expectation of the big win, so the player is excessively concerned about the variable display result becoming a big win. It is prevented to expect

After executing any of the processes 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern decided by the processing of any one of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to give the notice. The effect determination process is terminated (208SGS372). When it is decided not to execute the notice effect (208SGS370; N), the notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

It should be noted that, when the execution of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for advance notice performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9) in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the process table for notice effect each time the effect process during variable display is executed. etc.) can be used to execute the forewarning effect.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. In the fluctuation pattern of loss, the notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 during variable display, and in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display. 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display from pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. 3 is executable. It should be noted that, in the fluctuation pattern of the loss of the normal reach, the loss of the super reach α, and the loss of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-28, in the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, it is possible to execute the notice effects in patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. , cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-3 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), in the variation patterns of the super reach γ jackpot in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the notice effect is performed in patterns YE-1 to YE-1 in the period before the reach. Pattern YE-4 can be executed, and cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-4 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when executing the variable display in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-30 to 8-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-30(A) to 8-30(E), when execution of the announcement effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the image display device 5 performs the announcement effect in the pattern YE-. 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 with a blue effect, and when the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2 , the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and when the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 displays a collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C together with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit according to which of the character images 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, and 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is and the color of the effect displayed together with the character image. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the notice effect is executed only in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is possible.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach γ, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) to FIG. A ready-to-reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character fight in this characteristic portion 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-31(D), when it comes time to start executing the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player , prompting to operate the push button 31B is performed. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. When the acceptance period has passed, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 along with a cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-1, the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. , the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed with a gold effect on the image display device 5 when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. When the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed on the image display device 5 with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player can determine which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z the cut-in images displayed on the image display device 5 are, and the colors of the effects displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern), super reach γ As a result of the ready-to-win effect (battle effect), the ally character loses to the enemy character, and it is notified that the result of the variable display is lost, and the variable display ends. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect) , as a result of ready-to-reach effect (battle effect result) of super reach-gamma, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character wins over the enemy character, and the variable display ends.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A), 8-32 (D) to 8-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot for executing resurrection effect variation pattern), it is once notified that the variable display result is lost when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of super reach γ. Then, by executing the resurrection effect, it is once again reported that the variable display result is a big hit by the ally character winning against the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, Variable display ends.

Although not shown in the figure, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach δ, after the decoration pattern is displayed in combination with the reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same way as the reach performance of super reach γ. battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. It should be noted that the battle production as the ready-to-reach production of super reach δ may be produced in the same manner as the battle production as the ready-to-reach production of super reach γ. may

As described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. While it is determined that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing at -3, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a cut-in effect is performed. There is a case where the variable display result is out of line when executed in pattern CI-3. In other words, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is lost, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. , when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not, and the amusement of the game can be improved. there is

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern (super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern to execute revival presentation, PB1-5) and super ready-to-win not to perform revival presentation to inform that the variable display result is a big win by executing revival presentation γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) are provided, and when variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the revival performance, the super reach γ jackpot variation that does not execute the revival performance. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. For this reason, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is not displayed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by the player. is any one of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to 4 to 6 by executing the resurrection performance and announcing that the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest in the game due to an error in recognizing that it is either of the above.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, disadvantageous set values are set to 1 to 3, and advantageous set values are set to 4 to 6, which are set in the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on whether the set value is a disadvantageous set value or an advantageous set value, the decision ratio of the cut-in effect or the notice effect pattern is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the unfavorable setting value is 1 and the advantageous setting value is 6, the values may be set in any range that does not overlap each other. Specifically, only 1 to 5 disadvantageous setting values and 6 advantageous setting values may be used, or only 1 disadvantageous setting value and 2 to 6 advantageous setting values may be used.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the suggestive effect in the present invention is described as a ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effect other than the ready-to-win effect, such as a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop and the re-variable display of the decorative symbols are repeatedly executed, may be used as long as the effect can be executed immediately.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the deviation of the super reach γ When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game is performed. When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is wrong, and the higher the setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since the player can expect the setting, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern. shows a form in which the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, the pachinko game Regardless of the setting value set in machine 1, the rate at which the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 may be the same rate. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of super reach γ loss, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify a person.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and FIG. 8-13 As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big win, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using one big win variation pattern determination table regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the ratio of executing the resurrection performance during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the execution ratio of the resurrection performance during the variable display follows the set value for determining the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit, the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection performance is executed during the variable display. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute any reach effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are exemplified in a form that is previously determined in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect can be changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be determined as appropriate from the display result or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-22, as the variation pattern in the feature part 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result always becomes a big hit, so the variations of the super reach effect increase and the super Since the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win performance of the reach δ, and the variable display result can make the player pay attention to whether or not the result will be a big hit, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, an example is provided in which variation patterns (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect of super reach δ may not be provided.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state (or until the end timing of the variable display) and a ready-to-reach state. A cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect is provided. Furthermore, the advance notice effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect patterns (pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-4) with different degrees of expectation for big hits. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which are effect patterns with a high expectation of a big win. When executing the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot. By executing YE-3 or YE-4, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit by executing the notice effect pattern YE-1 or YE-2. It is possible to keep the player's attention until the end of the variable display, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, during the variable display of 1, the notice effect is set at a timing before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). When the variable display result becomes a big win, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big win from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest by preventing this.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, during the variable display of 1, the form in which the announcement effect can be executed at the timing before the cut-in effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect during the variable display executed before the variable display for executing the cut-in effect. Furthermore, the notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect, so that the variable display result is obtained during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing that is a big hit and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display result is a big win, the big win type is always the big win C when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is set to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. In the case of losing, the player can be made to think that even if the player wins a big win, it might have been a big win A or B. can reduce the decrease in

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is When there is a possibility of losing), when the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, when the advance notice performance is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Since the production pattern is determined from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, by executing the advance notice production in pattern YE-3 and YE-4 It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not result in a big hit, the pattern CI-3 and the pattern YE-3 or YE-4 are executed during the same variable display, so that the variable display result becomes a big win. It is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations of

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, one of 4 to 6 is set as the setting value for the pachinko game machine 1, and the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3, which is a effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. As a mode for restricting the execution of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 of the notice effect when the execution of is made unexecutable in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4), but the present invention is not limited to this. is set, and when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with high expectations for a big hit, the advance notice effect is performed at a rate lower than that of pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2. Pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 may be executable. In other words, "when the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is performed in a mode including the specific effect. If executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted." A mode in which patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed at a lower rate than in YE-2 is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is a variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. In the case, if the set value is the same value, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state is the cut-in effect in the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state. It is set higher than the rate of execution in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is a high-probability-high base state, cut-in production is performed in the variable display of super reach γ out more than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state. Since the pattern CI-3 is executed more frequently, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 in the high-probability-high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state. can improve the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 because the player can easily continue the game even after the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is performed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. When it is executed, if the game state is a high-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut-in at a higher rate than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state Although a form in which the effect can be executed in pattern CI-3 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , and when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. If the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern for not executing the resurrection effect (PA2-4 and PB1-4), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 8-33(A) to 8-33(E) as a modified example 208SG-1, a case where variable display is executed with a variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing a resurrection effect , the cut-in effect may be disabled in pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, any one of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement in a game due to the execution of a resurrection performance and the notification that a variable display result is a big win despite the player recognizing that it has been set.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed with the super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the super ready-to-win γ big win variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the form in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and modification 208SG-2 is shown in FIG. As shown in -34 (A) to FIG. 8-34 (D), when executing the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. The ratio of performing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of performing the variable display in the variation pattern. By doing so, for example, the player puts more importance on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not than whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. In the case where it is, after the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is notified of the loss, the resurrection effect is further executed and the result of the variable display is the big hit. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is notified, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the above-described embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5 ), the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3. As shown in 8-35 (A) to FIG. 8-35 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a super reach γ jackpot for executing a resurrection effect. When the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3 In either case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variable display result is the jackpot, and is set in the pachinko game machine 1. After it is determined that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and it is once notified that the variable display result is lost during the reach performance of super reach γ during the variable display, the resurrection performance is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be announced as a big hit, thereby improving the interest in the game.

That is, in the characteristic part 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the variable display result is lost. By confirming that the value is one of 4 to 6, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and further, the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to promote the continuation of the game against.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ deviation variation pattern When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be a pattern CI-1 or CI-2, which is a pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is performed. exemplifies a form in which the advance notice effect can be executed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the execution in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is determined. It is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. and when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PA2-4) in which super reach γ is lost, it is decided to execute the pattern CI-3, which is a production pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, as a cut-in production. In the case where the cut-in effect is a pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the forewarning effect is performed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 is determined to be executed. It may be executable. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 By executing the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than , it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be wrong. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the player will win a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. And when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the game state is the high probability high base state, if the set value is the same value, the game state is low Although the form in which the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than the probability low base state or the low probability high base state has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a modification As shown in FIG. 8-37 as 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is variably displayed with a variation pattern (PA2-4). is executed, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state The in-effect may be executed in pattern CI-3.

By doing so, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state During the reach production of super reach γ Since the cut-in effect is likely to be executed in the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit for a long period of time (for example, variable display of 1000 times) in the low-probability-low base state. When the willingness to continue playing the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. is notified to the player, the player's desire to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability-high base state can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). When the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same value, a cut-in effect will be performed at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Although the pattern CI-3 exemplifies a form that can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 208SG-6, as shown in FIG. When the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state , the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high probability high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, so the high probability Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state in which the variable display result is less likely to result in a big hit than the high base state, the game interest in these low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state can be enhanced. can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of super reach γ and super reach δ was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) and 8-40 (B) as a modification 208SG-7, during the reach production of super reach γ and super reach δ, instead of cut-in production, pachinko game A set value suggesting effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be made executable. In addition, in the case where the setting value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the period (for example, , the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the ready state), the above-mentioned notice effect can be executed, and the execution ratio of the setting value suggesting effect may differ according to the effect pattern of the notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, the set value is set at a higher rate than when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It suffices if the suggestive effect can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which production pattern the announcement effect is executed, and when the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting value suggesting performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance, the player can be prevented from overlooking the set value suggesting performance.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 027SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 027SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 027SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH includes game control means and effect execution means. Game control means is realized by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example. The effect execution means can execute various effects (for example, various advance notice effects, item image effects, etc., which will be described later).

FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH of this embodiment. The pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH includes, for example, a movable body 027SH32, which is an accessory, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9-1. Movable body 027SH32, according to the control of the effect control board 12, as shown in FIGS. works in between. For example, the movable body 027SH32 operates in the order of 1st state→2nd state→1st state, or operates in the order of 1st state→2nd state→1st state→2nd state→1st state. → state between first state and second state (pause) → second state → first state, or first state → state between first state and second state (pause) → You may operate with the first state. It should be noted that the other configuration of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 027SH is the same as the configuration of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 208SG shown in FIG. is omitted.

FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH. Specifically, FIG. 9-2(A) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set value "1" to "6") when the gaming state is a low probability state. FIG. 9-2(B) shows the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value (set value "1" to "6") when the game state is a high probability state. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH is different from the game state (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), and according to the setting value (setting value "1" to "6") 2, a plurality of types of special figure display result determination tables corresponding to each (respectively, a big hit determination value and a small hit probability as shown in FIGS. 12 types of special figure display result determination tables to which hit determination values are assigned) are stored, for example, the CPU 103, in the random number determination process at the time of winning, determines the plurality of types of special figure display result determination Using one of the corresponding special figure display result determination tables out of the tables, it is possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or a small hit (whether it will be lost).

FIG. 9-2(C) shows the types of jackpots. FIG. 9-2(D) shows the distribution of the jackpot for the first special symbol. FIG. 9-2(E) shows the distribution of the big hits for the second special symbol. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH has a plurality of types of jackpot type determination tables (each has , The judgment value corresponding to the first big hit, the judgment value corresponding to the second big hit, and the judgment value corresponding to the third big hit are assigned so as to be distributed as shown in Fig. 9-2 (D) and (E). For example, the CPU 103 stores two types of jackpot type determination tables), and for example, in the winning random number value determination process, when the CPU 103 determines that it will be a jackpot based on the special figure display result determination table, the above-mentioned multiple The type of jackpot (jackpot type) may be determined using a corresponding jackpot type determination table among the types of jackpot type determination tables.

FIG. 9-3 is a diagram exemplifying the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH. FIG. 9-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing types of variation patterns (variation times). Variation pattern #10 is a non-reach variation pattern. Variation pattern #11 is a non-reach deviation (for shortening) variation pattern. Variation pattern #12 is a variation pattern of deviation from normal reach. Variation pattern #13 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and eventually loses. Variation pattern #14 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and eventually loses. Variation pattern #15 is a small hit variation pattern. Variation pattern #16 is a variation pattern for a normal reach jackpot. Variation pattern #17 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a big hit. Variation pattern #18 is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 9-3(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. The degree of expectation (reliability) of a big hit is super reach B>super reach A>normal reach. The degree of expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a will be executed when a big win occurs)×(probability of a big win)/{(probability of effect a being executed when a big win occurs)×( Probability of hitting the jackpot) + (probability of executing the production a when not hitting the jackpot) x (probability of not hitting the jackpot)} Become).

For example, the reliability of super reach A is (0.3 × 1/320) / {(0.3 × 1/320) + (0.009 × 319/320)} = about 9.5%. In addition, the reliability of super reach A is (0.3 × 1/295) / {(0.3 × 1/295) + (0.009 × 294/295)} = about 10.2%.

In addition, the reliability of super reach B is (0.6 × 1/320) / {(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.001 × 319/320)} = about 65.3%. In addition, the reliability of super reach B is (0.6 × 1/295) / {(0.6 × 1/295) + (0.001 × 294/295)} = about 67.1%.

According to the example of FIG. 9-3(B), the variation pattern #11 is not determined during the low base, but it seems that the variation pattern #11 is also determined during the low base according to the number of reserved memories, for example. can be Further, according to the example of FIG. 9-3(B), the variation pattern #10 is not determined during the high base, but it seems that the variation pattern #10 is also determined during the high base according to the number of retained memories, for example. can be

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. FIGS. 9-5 and 9-6 are examples of respective advance notice effects. The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 027SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 9-4. Note that, in this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect pattern.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH, for example, as shown in FIG. , a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH displays, for example, as shown in FIG. , to display a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a group notice effect (display of group images). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH displays a group image 027SHYKE-GN as shown in FIG. do.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (button image display→pressing→weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH is shown in FIGS. A button image 027SHYKE-BU and a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (button image display→pressing→strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH is shown in FIGS. A button image 027SHYKE-BU and a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI are displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button announcement effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in announcement effect.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-D” shown in FIG. 9-4 is the role advance notice effect (movement of the character). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH has, for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (E), (F) and (G), Move the movable body 027SH32.

FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 9-7(A) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the super reach is lost (when it becomes either of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14), execution is determined at a rate of 40%, and the super reach jackpot In the case of (in the case of either variation pattern #17 or #18), execution is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH has a cut-in notice effect execution presence/absence determination table for super reach loss, in which 40% of the total is assigned as a judgment value corresponding to execution, and 50% of the total is executed. A table for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in announcement effect for super ready-to-win big hits, which is assigned as a judgment value corresponding to yes, is stored. Use the cut-in notice effect execution presence/absence determination table to determine whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, and in the case of a super reach jackpot, cut-in notice using the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution decision table for the super reach jackpot. It may be determined whether or not to execute the production. The same applies to the determination of whether or not to execute other notice effects (group notice effect, button notice effect, character object notice effect). In addition, if it does not become a super reach (if it becomes one of the fluctuation patterns #10, #11, #12, #15, #16), the execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute ).

The pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 027SH determines the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) relating to the cut-in notice effect when it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect. FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of the decision ratio of the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7(B), when super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 20%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of a super ready-to-win jackpot, the notice performance pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice performance pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the feature part 027SH allocates 80% of the total as the determination value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and assigns 20% of the whole as the decision value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". A cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for super reach loss assigned as a judgment value, and 20% of the total is assigned as a decision value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 80% of the whole is the notice effect pattern " A super reach jackpot cut-in notice effect pattern determination table assigned as a determination value corresponding to YEP-A2" is stored, and for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines super reach when super reach is lost. Decide the notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect using the cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for losing, and cut in using the cut-in notice effect pattern decision table for the super reach big hit when it becomes a super reach jackpot. A notice effect pattern of the notice effect may be determined. The same applies to the determination of the notice effect patterns of other notice effects (button notice effects).

FIG. 9-7(C) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the group announcement effect (display of the group image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), if the super reach is lost, the execution is determined at a rate of 20%, and if the super reach is a big hit, the execution is determined at a rate of 50%. do. In addition, since there is only one type of notice effect pattern related to the group notice effect (the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH, when it is determined to execute the group notice effect, The notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the notice effect pattern related to the effect. In addition, when super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

Fig. 9-7 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button announcement effect (button image display → press → weak cut-in image display, or button image display → press → strong cut-in image display). An example. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), if the super reach is lost, the execution is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the super reach is a big hit, the execution is determined at a rate of 50%. do. If super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

The pachinko game machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH determines the announcement effect pattern (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button announcement effect when it is determined to execute the button announcement effect. FIG. 9-7(E) is an example of the determination ratio of the announcement effect patterns (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button announcement effect when it is decided to execute the button announcement effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7(E), when super reach is lost, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of a super ready-to-win jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at a rate of 90%.

FIG. 9-7(F) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character object announcement effect (action of the character object). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), if the super reach is lost, the execution is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the super reach is a big hit, the execution is determined at a rate of 75%. do. In addition, since there is only one type of notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-D") related to the character object notice effect, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH decides to execute the character object notice effect, The notice effect pattern "YEP-D" is determined as the notice effect pattern related to the character object notice effect. In addition, when super reach does not occur, execution is determined at a rate of 0% (it is determined not to be executed).

According to FIG. 9-7, in the case of super ready-to-win, up to four kinds of advance notice effects are executed.

In addition, the probability of executing the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image) when becoming a super reach is {(probability of losing × super reach when losing Probability of becoming × Probability of executing cut-in notice effect when super reach is lost) + (Probability of being a big hit × Probability of being super reach when big hit × Cut-in notice effect is executed when super reach is a big hit) Probability)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when winning)}, in the case of a set value of 1, { (319/320 x 1% x 40%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)}/{(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 x 90%)} = about 42% .

In addition, the probability that the group notice effect (display of the group image) is executed when super reach is {(probability of losing × probability of super reach when losing × group notice effect when super reach is lost) Probability of being executed) + (Probability of being a big hit x Probability of being a super reach when a big hit x Probability of performing a group notice effect when a super reach big hit)} / {(Probability of being lost x when it is lost probability of becoming super reach) + (probability of being a big hit x probability of being a super reach when a big hit)}, in the case of a setting value of 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 20%) + (1 /320*90%*50%)}/{(319/320*1%)+(1/320*90%)}=about 26%.

In addition, the probability that the button notice effect (button image display → press → weak cut-in image display, or button image display → press → strong cut-in image display) will be executed when super reach occurs is { (Probability of losing x Probability of super reach when missing x Probability of button notification effect being executed when missing) + (Probability of being a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting big x Super reach) Probability that the button notice effect will be executed at the time of a big hit)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of getting super reach when losing) + (Probability of getting a big hit x Probability of getting super reach at the time of a big hit)} , for a set value of 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 10%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)}/{(319/320 x 1%) + (1/320 ×90%)}=about 19%.

In addition, the probability that the role announcement effect (action of the role) is executed when super reach is {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when failing x role when super reach is lost) Probability that the notice effect will be executed) + (Probability that it will be a big hit x Probability that it will be a super reach when it is a big hit x Probability that the announcement effect will be executed when the super reach is a big hit)} / {(Probability that it will be lost x Probability of super reach when losing) + (probability of being a big hit x probability of being a super reach when a big hit)}, in the case of setting value 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 5%) +(1/320*90%*75%)}/{(319/320*1%)+(1/320*90%)}=about 20%.

FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the item image effect. 9-9 are display examples of respective item images. The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 027SH can execute a plurality of types of item image effects as shown in FIG. 9-8(A).

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-A" shown in Fig. 9-8(A) is an item image suggesting that the cut-in preview effect (YEP-A1 or YEP-A2) will be executed. This is an item image effect A that displays A. In other words, the item image A displayed in the item image effect A can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the cut-in preview effect).

In the item image effect A, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image A, the strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the cut-in notice effect is to be executed differs.

Specifically, the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image A in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV1 shown in FIG. 9-9(A) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the first display mode (level 1) of item image A (item images B to D are the same) is blue.

The item image A in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image A in the second display mode indicates with moderate reliability whether or not the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV2 shown in FIG. 9-9(B) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the second display mode (level 2) of item image A (item images B to D are the same) is green.

The item image A in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image A in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the cut-in announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV3 shown in FIG. 9-9(C) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the third display mode (level 3) of item image A (item images B to D are the same) is red.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-B" shown in FIG. This is image production B. In other words, the item image B displayed in the item image effect B can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the group preview effect).

In the item image effect B, the strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the group announcement effect is to be executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image B.

Specifically, the item image B in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image B in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether the group announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGBLV1 shown in FIG. 9D is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image B. FIG.

The item image B in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image B in the second display mode indicates with moderate reliability whether or not the group announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGBLV2 shown in FIG. 9E is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image B. FIG.

The item image B in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the group announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image B in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the group announcement effect will be executed. Item image 027SHIGBLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9(F) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of item image B. FIG.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-C" shown in FIG. is an item image effect C that displays . In other words, the item image C displayed in the item image effect C can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the button preview effect).

In the item image effect C, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image C, the strength of the suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the button announcement effect will be executed differs.

Specifically, the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image C in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9(G) is an example of the item image C in the first display mode (level 1).

The item image C in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image C in the second display mode indicates with medium reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV2 shown in FIG. 9H is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image C. FIG.

The item image C in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the button announcement effect will be executed. That is, the item image C in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether the button announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGCLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9(I) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image C. FIG.

The item image preview effect of the item image effect pattern “IGEP-D” shown in FIG. 9-8(A) displays an item image D suggesting that the role preview effect (YEP-D) will be executed. This is the item image production D. In other words, the item image D displayed in the item image effect D can identify the type of preview effect to be executed (specifically, the character object preview effect).

In the item image effect D, the degree of suggestion (reliability level) as to whether the character object announcement effect is to be executed differs depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image D.

Specifically, the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the character product announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether or not the character product announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9(J) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image D. FIG.

The item image D in the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the character product announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the second display mode suggests with a medium level of reliability whether the character object announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV2 shown in FIG. 9-9(K) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image D. FIG.

The item image D in the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the character object announcement effect will be executed. In other words, the item image D in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether or not the character object announcement effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV3 shown in FIG. 9-9(L) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image D. FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 027SH has the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect B (IGEP-B), and the item image effect C (IGEP-C) shown in FIG. 9-8(A). , item image effects D (IGEP-D) of the four types of item image effects, there are cases where none of the four types are executed, and there are cases where only one type out of the four is executed, Two out of the four types may be executed, three out of the four types may be executed, and all four types may be executed.

Moreover, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH can change the display mode of the item image displayed in the item image effect. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH can execute an item image effect that changes the display mode of the item image. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH can change the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) during execution of the item image effect A. It is possible. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH can execute the item image effect A that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). be. The same applies to the item image effect B, the item image effect C, and the item image effect D.

FIG. 9-8(B) shows the contents of the item image effect execution mode pattern. The item image effect execution mode pattern is common to each item image effect (item image effect A, item image effect B, item image effect C, item image effect D). is determined (details will be described later).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" shown in FIG. 9-8(B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern in which no item image effect is executed. Since the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" does not execute the item image effect, the item image is not displayed.

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" shown in FIG. 1) is an item image effect execution mode pattern that remains unchanged.

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" shown in FIG. 1) to the second display mode (level 2).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" shown in FIG. 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and furthermore, the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3).

The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" shown in FIG. 1) to the third display mode (level 3).

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined for the item image effect A (IGEP-A), and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined for the item image effect B (IGEP-B). IGEGP1” is determined, item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined for item image effect C (IGEP-C), and item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP5” is determined for item image effect D (IGEP-D). If so, an item image effect A (IGEP-A) that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and the display mode of the item image C is left unchanged in the first display mode (level 1), and the display mode of the item image D is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). (Item image effect B is not executed).

9-10 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the determination ratio of the item image rendering. FIGS. 9-10(A) and 9-10(B) are examples of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect A (IGEP-A). Specifically, FIG. 9-10(A) shows item image effect execution of item image effect A (IGEP-A) when cut-in notice effects (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) are executed in Super Reach. It is an example of the determination ratio of the mode pattern. Fig. 9-10(B) shows the determination ratio of item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A (IGEP-A) when cut-in notice effects (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) are not executed in Super Reach. is an example.

FIGS. 9-10(C) and 9-10(D) are examples of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect B (IGEP-B). Specifically, FIG. 9-10(C) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed in Super Reach. is an example. FIG. 9-10(D) is an example of determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is not executed in super ready-to-win.

FIGS. 9-10(E) and 9-10(F) are examples of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect C (IGEP-C). Specifically, FIG. 9-10(E) shows the item image effect execution mode of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed in Super Reach. It is an example of a pattern determination ratio. Fig. 9-10 (F) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is not executed in Super Reach. An example.

FIGS. 9-10 (G) and 9-10 (H) are an example of determination ratios of item image effect execution mode patterns of item image effect D (IGEP-D). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (G) shows determination of item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect D (IGEP-D) in case of executing character product announcement effect (YEP-D) in Super Reach. This is an example of a ratio. FIG. 9-10(H) is an example of determination rate of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is not executed in Super Reach. .

According to FIG. 9-10, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A suggesting the execution of the cut-in notice effect by displaying the item image A (that is, whether the item image effect A is executed or whether the item The display mode of the item image A when the image effect A is executed) is determined by whether or not the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B that displays the item image B and suggests the execution of the group notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect B is executed or whether the item image effect B is executed The display mode of the item image B in the case) is determined by whether or not the group announcement effect (YEP-B) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C that displays the item image C and suggests the execution of the button notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect C is executed or whether the item image effect C is executed The display mode of the item image C in the case) is determined by whether or not the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D suggesting the execution of the character product preview effect by displaying the item image D (that is, whether the item image effect D is executed or whether the item image effect D is executed The display mode of the item image D in the case where the character is displayed) is determined by whether or not the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed.

As a specific example, the reliability of the suggestion of the cut-in notice effect for each display mode of the item image A displayed in the item image effect A, and the button notice effect for each display mode of the item image C displayed in the item image effect C. Explain the reliability of suggestions.

(Reliability of Suggestion of Cut-in Notice Effect by Display Mode of Item Image A)
According to FIGS. 9-10(A) and 9-10(B), the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode (level 3) in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4". is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 50% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the rate is 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10(B)). The reliability of the cut-in notice effect when the final display form of the item image A is the third display form in super reach is, for example, (when the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach, the third display form Probability that item image A is finally displayed) × (Probability that cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) / {Item image in the third display mode when cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach Probability that A is finally displayed) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) + (When the cut-in notice effect is not executed in super reach) Item image A in the third display mode is finally displayed ) x (probability that the cut-in announcement effect will not be executed in Super Reach)}. When 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach, the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A in super reach is the third display mode The reliability is (50%×42%)/{(50%×42%)+(10%×58%)}=about 78%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the rate is 20%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10(B)). Therefore, when 42% of the setting value 1 is used as the probability of execution of the cut-in notice effect in super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the second display mode in super reach The reliability of the effect is (30%×42%)/{(30%×42%)+(20%×58%)}=about 52%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 20% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the rate is 60%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10(B)). Therefore, when 42% of the setting value 1 is used as the probability of execution of the cut-in notice effect in super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the first display mode in super reach The reliability of the effect is (20%×42%)/{(20%×42%)+(60%×58%)}=about 19%.

(Reliability of Suggestion of Button Notice Effect by Display Mode of Item Image C) According to FIGS. The mode (level 3) is when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5" is determined at a rate of 70% in total (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 5% (Fig. 9-10 (F)). The reliability of the button announcement effect when the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode in super reach is, for example, (item in the third display mode when the button notice effect is executed in super reach Probability that the image C is finally displayed)×(Probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach) / {When the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed ) × (probability that the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) + (probability that the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach) x (probability that the button announcement effect is not executed in super reach)}. When 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Wear, the reliability of the button announcement effect when the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode in Super-Reach. is (70%×19%)/{(70%×19%)+(5%×81%)}=about 77%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the rate is 10%. An item image rendering execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined (Fig. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Win, the final display mode of the item image C in Super Ready-to-Win is the second display mode. The reliability is (15%×19%)/{(15%×19%)+(10%×81%)}=about 26%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 10% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the rate is 65%. An item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined (Fig. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability of executing the button announcement effect in Super Ready-to-Win, the final display mode of the item image C in Super Ready-to-Win is the first display mode. The reliability is (10%×19%)/{(10%×19%)+(65%×81%)}=about 3.5%.

9-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIGS. 9-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining display timings of various item images, execution timings of various advance notice effects, etc. in the variable display of super reach.

In FIGS. 9-11, T0 is the start timing during variable display. T1 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T2 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9(A)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image A is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T2.

T3 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9(D)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. If the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image B is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T3.

T4 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9(G)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image C is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T4.

T5 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9(J)) in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. If the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is any one of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) at T5.

T6 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9(B)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode at T6. (level 2). If the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of item image effect A does not change at T6 (the first display mode (level 1) remain).

T7 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9(E)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of item image effect B changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode at T7. (level 2). If the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of item image effect B does not change at T7 (the first display mode (level 1) remain).

T8 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9(H)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode at T8. (level 2). If the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change at T8 (the first display mode (level 1) remain).

T9 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9(K)) in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode at T9. (level 2). In addition, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change at T8 (the first display mode (level 1) remain).

T10 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9(C)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect A is "IGEGP4", the display mode of item image effect A changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3) at T10. , and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change at T10 (it remains the first display mode (level 1)). . Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change at T10 (remains in the second display mode (level 2)). .

T11 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9(F)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of item image effect B is "IGEGP4", the display mode of item image effect B changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3) at T11. , and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change at T11 (it remains the first display mode (level 1)). . Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change at T11 (remains in the second display mode (level 2)). .

T12 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9(I)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3) at T12. , and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change at T12 (it remains the first display mode (level 1)). . Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change at T12 (it remains in the second display mode (level 2)). .

T13 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9(L)) in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3) at T13. , and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). Note that when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change at T13 (it remains the first display mode (level 1)). . Further, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change at T13 (it remains in the second display mode (level 2)). .

T14 is the timing for erasing the item image A (the timing for using it as an item). That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect A is executed. If the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and if the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image A in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T14 is also the timing of starting the execution of the fanning effect to prompt whether the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is to be executed. T15 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T14-T15 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T15 is also the timing for starting the execution of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T16 is the timing of ending the execution of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). In other words, T15-T16 is the execution period of the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2).

T17 is the timing for erasing the item image B. FIG. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the item image B in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect B is executed. When the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image B in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image B in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T17 is also the timing of starting the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the group announcement effect (YEP-B). T18 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T17-T18 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T18 is also the timing for starting the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). T19 is the timing of ending the execution of the group announcement effect (YEP-B). That is, T18-T19 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B).

T20 is the item image C deletion timing. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect C is executed. If the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image C in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and if the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image C in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T20 is also the timing of starting the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether to execute the button announcement effects (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T21 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T20 to T21 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

T21 is also the timing to start executing the button announcement effects (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T22 is the timing of ending the execution of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). That is, T21-T22 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2).

T23 is the item image D erasing timing. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is erased, and the item image effect D is executed. When the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image D in the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is erased, and when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5". If there is, the item image D in the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is erased.

Further, T23 is also the timing of starting the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character announcement effect (YEP-D). T24 is the timing of ending the execution of the above-mentioned fan effect. That is, T23-T24 is the execution period of the above-mentioned fan effect.

Further, T24 is also the timing for starting the performance of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D). T25 is the timing of ending the execution of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D). That is, T24 to T25 is the execution period of the character product announcement effect (YEP-D).

9-12 and 9-13 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 9-12 (A), only the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed as the notice effect, and only the item image effect A (IGEP-A) is executed as the item image effect execution mode pattern " IGEGP4" (that is, item image effect B (IGEP-B), item image effect C (IGEP-C) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of the item image A, the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), etc.

In FIG. 9-12(A), T2 to T6 are periods during which the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T6 to T10 is a period during which the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) is displayed. T10 to T14 is a period during which the item image A in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T14-T15 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. T15-T16 is the period during which the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1) is executed, that is, the period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5(A)) is displayed.

In FIG. 9-12 (B), nothing is executed as the notice effect, and the item image effects are item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect C (IGEP-C), and item image effect D (IGEP). -D) is executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" (item image effect B (IGEP-B) is the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1"), the item image A, It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image C and the item image D, etc. FIG.

In FIG. 9-12(B), T2 to T14 are periods during which the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T14-T15 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. Note that the cut-in forewarning effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T4 to T20 are periods during which the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. Note that the button announcement effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T5 to T23 are periods during which the item image D in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T23-T24 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect. Note that the character object announcement effect is not executed after the inciting effect.

In Figure 9-13 (A), the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), the group notice effect (YEP-B), and the button notice effect (YEP-C1) are executed as the notice effect, and the item image effect is executed. Image effect A (IGEP-A) and item image effect B (IGEP-B) are each executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3", and item image effect C (IGEP-C) is executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern. Display of item image A, item image B, item image C, and item image D when executed with "IGEGP4" and item image effect D (IGEGP-D) is executed with item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of timing, cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), group notice effect (YEP-B), and button notice effect (YEP-C1);

In FIG. 9-13(A), T14 to T15 are the execution period of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. The item image A is deleted at T14, but the display mode of the item image A immediately before being deleted is the second display mode (level 2). T15-T16 is the period during which the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A1) is executed, that is, the period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5(A)) is displayed. T17-T18 is the execution period of the fanning effect for inciting whether or not to execute the group announcement effect. The item image B is deleted at T17, but the display mode of the item image B immediately before being deleted is the second display mode (level 2). T18-T19 is the execution period of the group announcement effect (YEP-B), that is, the period during which the group image 027SHYKE-GN (see FIG. 9-5(C)) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. The item image C is deleted at T20, but the display mode of the item image C immediately before being deleted is the third display mode (level 3). T21 to T22 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C1), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6(A)) is displayed (when the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, the push button 31B is operated, the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-6(B)) is displayed instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T23-T24 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect. The item image D is deleted at T23, but the display mode of the item image D immediately before being deleted is the first display mode (level 1). Note that the character object announcement effect is not executed after the inciting effect.

In FIG. 9-13 (B), the button notice effect (YEP-C2) and the character notice effect (YEP-D) are executed as the notice effect, and only the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is executed as the item image effect. is executed with the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" (that is, item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect B (IGEP-B) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are item image effect 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of the item image C, the execution timing of the role announcement effect (YEP-D), etc. in the effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”). FIG.

In FIG. 9-13(B), T4 to T12 are periods during which the item image C in the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T12 to T20 is a period during which the item image C in the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T20-T21 is the execution period of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not to execute the button announcement effect. T21-T22 is the execution period of the button announcement effect (YEP-C2), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6(C)) is displayed (when the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, the push button 31B is operated, the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (see FIG. 9-6(D)) is displayed instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T24-T25 is the execution period of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D), that is, the period during which the movable body 027SH32 is operated (see FIGS. 9-6(E) to 9-6(G)). In addition, in the example of FIG. 9-13(B), neither the display of the item image D suggesting whether or not the character object preview effect is to be executed, nor the execution of the inciting effect for inciting whether or not the character object preview effect is to be executed, is performed. An object announcement effect (YEP-D) is being executed. Specifically, when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” is determined in the case where the character object announcement effect is executed (see FIG. 9-10 (G)), it is determined whether the character object announcement effect is executed. There is neither the display of the suggesting item image D nor the execution of the inciting effect inciting whether or not the character object announcement effect is to be executed, so that the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed.

9-14 and 9-15 show the effect determination process (effect determination process for determining the advance notice effect, item image effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example. The flowchart of FIGS. 9-15 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIGS. 9-14.

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution yes at a rate of 40% if the variation pattern is out of super reach (either variation pattern # 13 or # 14) Then, if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either variation pattern #17, #18), execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and the variation pattern is other than the above (variation pattern #10, #11, #12 , #15, or #16), execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 027SHS101). If it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 027SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS105.

Following step 027SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in notice effect (that is, notice effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7(B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and the notice effect pattern "YEP -A2" at 20%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" at 80%.

Following step 027SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" or "YEP-A2") of the cut-in notice effect determined at step 027SHS102 (step 027SHS103). ).

Subsequent to step 027SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case of executing the cut-in announcement effect (step 027SHS104). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 0%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 20%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at a rate of 50%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027 SHS101 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case where the cut-in notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS105). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(B), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" at 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 60%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 10%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) determined in step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105 (step 027SHS106).

Following step 027SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS110). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 20% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and executes if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the variation pattern is other than the above, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the group announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS111). If it is determined that the group announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS113. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect should be executed (step 027SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS115.

Following step 027SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" for the group notice effect (step 027SHS113).

Following step 027SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case of executing the group announcement effect (step 027SHS114). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(C), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 0%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 20%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 30%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at a rate of 45%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 5%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS111 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case where the group announcement effect is not executed (step 027SHS115). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(D), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" at 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 60%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 10%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) determined in step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115 (step 027SHS116).

Following step 027SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 10% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and executes if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the variation pattern is other than the above, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the button announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS121). If it is determined that the button announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS122. If it is not determined to execute the button announcement effect (step 027SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS125.

Following step 027SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button announcement effect (that is, the announcement effect pattern) based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 90% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and the notice effect pattern "YEP -C2" at 10%. Also, if the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 027SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" or "YEP-C2") of the button notice effect determined at step 027SHS122 (step 027SHS123). .

Subsequent to step 027SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when executing the button announcement effect (step 027SHS124). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(E), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" at 5%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 10%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at a rate of 60%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 10%.

Following step 027SHS121 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case where the button announcement effect is not executed (step 027SHS125). ). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(F), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 65%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 10%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 5%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) determined in step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125 (step 027SHS126).

Following step 027SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character product announcement effect based on the variation pattern (step 027SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a rate of 5% if the variation pattern is out of super reach, and executes if the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 75%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Subsequent to step 027SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the character product announcement effect should be executed (step 027SHS131). If it is determined that the performance of the character object announcement effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS133. If it is not determined that the performance of the character product announcement is to be executed (step 027SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS135.

Following step 027SHS131, the effect control CPU 120 sets the notice effect pattern "YEP-D" for the character object notice effect (step 027SHS133).

Subsequent to step 027SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character product announcement effect (step 027SHS134). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" at 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" at 5%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at a rate of 60%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 10%.

Subsequent to step 027 SHS131 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case where the character product announcement effect is not executed (step 027 SHS135). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10(H), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" to 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to 74%, and executes the item image effect. Mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 4%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" at 2%, and item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135, the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-D) determined in step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135 (step 027SHS136). Then, this flowchart ends.

FIGS. 9-16 to 9-20 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 027SH. Specifically, Figures 9-16 to 9-20 show examples of the main scenes in the example shown in Figure 9-12 (A). Figure 9-16 (A) → Figure 9-16 (B) → Figure 9-16 (C) → Figure 9-17 (A) → Figure 9-17 (B) → Figure 9-17 (C) → Figure 9-18 (A) → Figure 9- 18 (B) → Figure 9-18 (C) → Figure 9-19 (A) → Figure 9-19 (B) → Figure 9-19 (C) → Figure 9-20 (A) → Figure 9-20 ( B)→Transition in the order of FIG. 9-20(C).

FIG. 9-16(A) shows a scene of reach in the variable display. FIG. 9-16(B) shows a scene developed into super reach (scene of T1 in FIG. 9-11). FIG. 9-16(C) is the scene at the beginning of the super ready-to-win effect (the scene immediately after T1 in FIG. 9-11).

FIG. 9-17 (A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether item image A is displayed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9 -12 (A) just before T2). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed immediately before the display timing (T2) of the item image A. do. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly executes an item image display suggestion effect that suggests whether each item image is to be displayed immediately before the display timing of other item images such as the item image B or the like.

FIG. 9-17(B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A) T2 scene).

Regarding the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed and the item image A, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A is displayed. There may be a case where the item image A is displayed and a case where the item image A is not displayed. Further, the item image A may always be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed more easily when the item image display suggesting display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed than when the item image display suggesting display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, there are multiple types of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI, and the ratio of whether or not item image A is displayed depends on which type of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. It can be different. The relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGB-SHI suggesting whether the item image B is displayed and the item image B, and the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether the item image C is displayed and the item image C , and the relationship between the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI that suggests whether the item image D is to be displayed and the item image D.

FIG. 9-17(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change (FIGS. 9-11 and This is the scene just before T6 in FIG. 9-12(A)). That is, immediately before the change timing (T6) of the item image A, the effect control CPU 120 performs an item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of the item image A will change. to run. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly executes an item image change suggestion effect that suggests whether the display mode of each item image will change immediately before the change timing of other item images such as the item image B.

FIG. 9-18(A) is a scene (scene of T6 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12(A)) in which the item image effect A has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

Regarding the relationship between the item image change suggestive display 027SHIGA-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of the item image A will change and the item image A, when the item image change suggestive display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the item image A There may be a case where the display mode changes and a case where the display mode of the item image A does not change. Further, the display mode of the item image A may always change when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed more easily when the item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed than when the item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN, and whether or not the display mode of item image A changes depending on which type of item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed is determined. Different ratios may be used. Item image change suggestive display 027SHIGB-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of item image B will change and item image B, Item image change suggestive display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of item image C will change and the item image C, and the relationship between the item image change suggesting display 027 SHIGD-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of the item image D will change and the item image D are the same.

FIG. 9-18(B) shows an item image change suggesting display 027SHIGA-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change, as in the scene of FIG. 9-17(C). is being performed (the scene immediately before T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12(A)). FIG. 9-18(C) is a scene (scene of T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12(A)) in which the item image effect A has changed to the third display mode (level 3).

FIG. 9-19(A) shows that a fanning effect is executed (started) to incite whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A. This is the scene (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12(A)) displaying the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI. That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the stimulus effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the stimulus effect for inciting whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly indicates that each of the fanning effects will be executed (started) immediately before the execution start timing of the fanning effects that incite whether to execute other notice effects such as group notice effects. Display the start display of the stimulating effect.

Figures 9-19 (B) to 9-20 (B) show a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGA-AO is being performed (Fig. 9-11 and scenes from T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-12(A)). In the example of FIGS. 9-19(B) to 9-20(B), the countdown display 027SHIGA-AO counts down until the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning effect to prompt whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. Note that the effect control CPU 120 similarly executes a fanning effect to prompt whether or not to execute each of the advance notice effects immediately before the execution start timing of other notice effects such as the group notice effect.

FIG. 9-20(C) is a scene in which a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to item image A, is being performed, that is, a scene in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scenes from T15 to T16 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)).

It should be noted that there is an inciting effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that an inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, will be executed, and a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. Regarding the relationship with the fanning effect that determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, even if the fanning effect is executed and not executed when the fan effect start display 027 SHIGA-KAI is displayed. good. Also, when the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the hype effect may always be executed. In addition, there may be a case where the fanning effect is executed when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. Further, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the fanning effect when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed than when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of the swaying effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the swaying effect is made different depending on which type of the swaying effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed. good too. A stirring effect start display 027 SHIGB-KAI indicating that a stirring effect is to be executed to incite whether or not to execute a group preview effect that is a preview effect corresponding to the item image B, and a group preview effect that is a preview effect corresponding to the item image B. button, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and the start display 027SHIGC-KAI indicating that the stimulus effect prompting whether to execute the button notice effect will be executed, and the item The relationship between the inciting effect inciting whether or not to execute the button foretelling effect, which is the foretelling effect corresponding to the image C, and the inciting effect for inciting whether to execute the character object foretelling effect, which is the foretelling effect corresponding to the item image D, is executed. The same applies to the relationship between the hype effect start display 027 SHIGD-KAI indicating that the item image D is to be played and the hype effect for inciting whether or not to execute the character announcement effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

In addition, regarding the relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, the inciting effect was executed. In some cases, there may be cases where the cut-in notice effect is executed and cases where the cut-in notice effect is not executed (see FIG. 9-12(B)). Also, when the fanning effect is executed, the cut-in notice effect may be always executed. Also, the cut-in announcement effect may be executed when the fanning effect is not executed. Also, the cut-in notice effect may be executed more easily when the fan effect is executed than when the fan effect is not executed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of stimulating effects, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect may differ depending on which type of stimulating effect is executed. The relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether or not to execute the group notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the group notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the notice effect corresponding to the item image C. The relationship between the inciting effect to incite whether to execute the button notice effect and the button notice effect which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and the effect to incite whether to execute the character object notice effect which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect and the character object preview effect that is the preview effect corresponding to the item image D.

FIGS. 9-21 to 9-30 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic part 027SH. Specifically, Figures 9-21 to 9-30 show examples of major scenes in the example shown in Figure 9-13 (A), and Figure 9-21 (A) → Figure 9-21 (B) → Figure 9-21 (C) → Figure 9-22 (A) → Figure 9-22 (B) → Figure 9-22 (C) → Figure 9-23 (A) → Figure 9- 23 (B) → Figure 9-23 (C) → , …, Figure 9-29 (A) → Figure 9-29 (B) → Figure 9-29 (C) → Figure 9-30 (A) → Figure 9 −30 (B)→Fig. 9-30 (C).

Figure 9-21 (A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether item image A is displayed (T2 in Figure 9-11 The scene just before). FIG. 9-21(B) is a scene (T2 scene in FIG. 9-11) where execution of item image effect A has started (that is, display of item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) has started). is.

FIG. 9-21(C) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGB-SHI that suggests whether item image B is displayed (T3 in FIG. 9-11 The scene just before). FIG. 9-22(A) is a scene (scene of T3 in FIG. 9-11) where execution of the item image effect B is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGBLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started). is.

FIG. 9-22(B) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGC-SHI that suggests whether item image C is displayed (T4 in FIG. 9-11 The scene just before). FIG. 9-22(C) is a scene (T4 scene in FIG. 9-11) where execution of the item image effect C is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGCLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started). is.

FIG. 9-23(A) shows a scene where an item image display suggestion effect using item image display suggestion display 027 SHIGD-SHI that suggests whether item image D is displayed (T5 in FIG. 9-11 The scene just before). FIG. 9-23(B) is a scene (scene of T5 in FIG. 9-11) where execution of the item image effect D has started (that is, display of the item image 027 SHIGDLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) has started). is.

FIG. 9-23(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change (see FIG. 9-11 The scene just before T6). FIG. 9-24(A) is a scene (scene of T6 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect A has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-24(B) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGB-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image B will change (see FIG. 9-11 The scene just before T7). FIG. 9-24(C) is a scene (scene of T7 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image rendering B has changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25(A) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect is performed using an item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGC-HEN that suggests whether the display mode of item image C will change (see FIG. 9-11 The scene just before T8). FIG. 9-25(B) is a scene (scene of T8 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect C is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25(C) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGD-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image D will change (see FIG. 9-11 The scene just before T9). FIG. 9-26(A) is a scene (scene of T9 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect D does not change.

FIG. 9-26(B) shows a scene in which an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGD-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image D will change (see FIG. 9-11 The scene just before T13). FIG. 9-26(C) is a scene (scene of T13 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect D does not change. Note that the item image effect C is changed to the third display mode (level 3) in the scene (scene of T12 in FIG. 9-11) before the scene of 9-26(C).

FIG. 9-27(A) shows that a fanning effect is executed (started) to incite whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A. This is the scene (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)) displaying the hype effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI.

FIG. 9-27(B) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGA-AO is being performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A) scene from T14 to T15). FIG. 9-27(C) is a scene in which a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to item image A, is being performed, that is, a scene in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Scenes from T15 to T16 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)).

Fig. 9-28(A) shows the start effect start display 027SHIGB indicating that the effect effect to incite whether or not to execute the group effect effect (YEP-B), which is the effect effect corresponding to the item image B, is to be executed (started). - This is the scene displaying KAI (the scene just before T17 in Figures 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-28(B) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGB-AO is being performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 ( This is the scene from T17 to T18 in A). FIG. 9-28(C) shows a scene in which a group notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is being performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 027SHYKE-GN is displayed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9 -13 (A) T18-T19 scene).

FIG. 9-29(A) is a teasing effect indicating that a teasing effect is to be executed (started) to incite whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image C. This is the scene where the production start display 027SHIGC-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T20 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)).

FIG. 9-29(B) shows a scene in which the hype effect 027 SHIGC-AO is being performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 ( This is the scene from T20 to T21 in A). FIGS. 9-29(C) to 9-30(A) are scenes in which the button announcement effect (YEP-C1), which is the announcement effect corresponding to the item image C, is performed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed. 9-11 and 9-13(A) where a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed as an example after the push button 31B is operated (scenes T21 to T22 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)).

FIG. 9-30(B) is a cheering effect start display indicating that a cheering effect is to be executed (started) to incite whether or not to execute the character announcement effect (YEP-D), which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image D. This is the scene displaying 027SHIGD-KAI (the scene just before T23 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13(A)).

FIG. 9-30(C) shows a scene in which the inciting effect 027 SHIGD-AO is being performed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A) scene from T23 to T24). It should be noted that the character object announcement effect, which is the announcement effect corresponding to the item image D, is not performed after the fanning effect (see FIG. 9-13(A)).

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 9-16 to 9-30, each item image display suggestion display (027SHIGA-SHI, 027SHIGB-SHI, 027SHIGC-SHI, 027SHIGD-SHI) that suggests display of each item image is common. However, it may be different for each item image. In addition, each of the inciting effects (027SHIGA-AO, 027SHIGB-AO, 027SHIGC-AO, 027SHIGD-AO) that fuels each notice effect is common, but is different for each notice effect (that is, for each item image). good too. The fanning effect start display (027SHIGA-KAI, 027SHIGB-KAI, 027SHIGC-KAI, 027SHIGD-KAI) indicating the start of each fanning effect corresponding to each of the notice effects is common, but the fanning effect of any of the notice effects is displayed. It may be different depending on where it starts (ie for each item image).

(Suggest setting value)
Next, suggestions for set values (see FIGS. 9-2(A) and 9-2(B)) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 027SH suggests the setting value currently set by using the item image effect (for example, by using the item image). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 027SH has a fourth display mode ( A display mode of level 4) may be provided to suggest the setting value currently set in relation to displaying the item image D in the fourth display mode.

(first example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31(C), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of the movable body 027SH32), and the transition. In addition, (regardless of the result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the set value currently set is high (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Second example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (D), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) → miss, the currently set A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the current setting value.

(Third example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31(E), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (no movement of the movable body 027SH32) (Regardless of whether the result is hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set to a high value (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Fourth example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (F), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) → failure, the currently set A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the current setting value.

(Fifth example)
Also, although illustration is omitted, when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → disappears (regardless of whether or not the character announcement effect (YEP-D) is executed), the currently set A high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) may be suggested for the set value.

(Display timing of fourth display mode (level 4))
In the first example (the second to fourth examples may also be the same), the display timing of the item image D in the fourth display mode is not particularly limited (that is, it is displayed from the beginning). Alternatively, it may be displayed by changing from another display mode), but as an example, the display period may be lengthened so that the player can easily recognize it. Specifically, the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed from the beginning (T5 in FIG. 9-11), as shown as the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" in FIG. 9-32(A). may In addition, in FIG. 9-32(A), the fourth display mode is a gold color that generally makes the player recognize that the win is confirmed or high. When the possibility of becoming is not zero (for example, in the case of the second example), the fourth display mode may be a color or a pattern different from gold.

(An example of the determination ratio of the first example)
In the case of the first example, as a determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the role announcement effect (YEP-D), FIG. 9-10 ( G), instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-32 (B) is used, and the item image effect D (IGEP-D ), instead of the decision ratio shown in FIG. 9-10(H), the decision ratio shown in FIG. 9-32(C) may be used as the decision ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern. In other words, when executing the process of step 027 SHS134 in FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines the item image effect execution mode pattern at the ratio shown in FIG. In 027SHS135, the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 9-32(C).

In other words, there is no transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the non-execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (see FIG. 9-32(C)), but the item image in the fourth display mode There is a case where there is a transition from the display of D to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)), and the item image in the fourth display mode. There is a setting difference in the transition from the display of D to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)). In the example shown in FIG. 9-32(B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined at a rate of 1% when the current setting value is any of the setting values 1 to 3. If the current set value is one of set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 9-32(B), display of the item image D in the fourth display mode→execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) occurs when the setting value is 1-3. setting value 4-6 is more frequent than In other words, according to the example shown in FIG. 9-32(B), compared to the case of low setting (eg, set value of 3 or less), the fourth The frequency of transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) increases. Therefore, the transition (or the frequent transition) from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) means that the setting value currently set is high. This suggests that the setting is (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), even if it becomes super reach A (variation pattern # 13, # 17), even if it becomes super reach B (variation pattern # 14, # 18) Even if there is, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" can be determined when the character effect is executed (if it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it is determined at a rate of 1%, If the setting value is any one of 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%), but only when the character effect is executed in the case of super reach B, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be determined (the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP6” may not be determined when the character object effect is executed in the case of super reach A). In other words, in the case of Super Reach B, there is a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32). On the other hand, in the case of super reach A, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of the movable body 027SH32). may be set so that there is no setting difference.

(An example of the determination ratio of the second example)
In the case of the second example, for example, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of the movable body 027SH32) → big hit. However, there is a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) (the movable body 027SH32 is operated) to the disconnection. You may make it so that there is For example, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the role product effect is executed is set to a common setting value 1 to 6 (eg, 20%), while the super reach is lost. The decision ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the role product effect is executed may be different between the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 4 to 6 (for example, It may be set to 1% when the setting value is any one of 1 to 3, and 10% when the setting value is any one of 4 to 6).

In the case of Super Reach B, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) (movement of the movable body 027SH32) → miss. While there is a setting difference, in the case of super reach A, display of item image D in the fourth display mode → execution of character announcement effect (YEP-D) (operation of movable body 027SH32) → failure , there may be no setting difference.

(An example of the determination ratio of the third example)
In the case of the third example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D). There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the non-execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D). For example, the decision ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed is common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 10%), while the item image effect when the character effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be different between the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 4 to 6 (for example, if the setting values are any of the setting values 1 to 3, the ratio is set to 0.5). 5%, or 3% if the set value is any of 4 to 6).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fourth example)
In the case of the fourth example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character announcement effect (YEP-D) → big hit, There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the non-execution of the character object announcement effect (YEP-D) to the failure. For example, in the super reach jackpot (fluctuation patterns #17, #18), the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character object effect is not executed is set to a common setting value of 1 to 6 (for example, 5%). , When the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined when the character object effect is not executed when the super reach is lost (variation patterns #13, #14), when the setting values are 1 to 3 and when the setting values are 4 to 6 (for example, 0.5% for set values 1 to 3, and 3% for set values 4 to 6).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fifth example)
In the case of the fifth example, although the details are omitted, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the big hit, but the item image in the fourth display mode There may be a setting difference in the transition from display of D to failure.

In the above description, an example of suggesting that the currently set setting value is set to a high value (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) has been described, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the high setting. For example, negation of the lowest setting (set value 1) (set value 2 or more) may be suggested, or set values 1 to 6 may be suggested. In other words, in the above description, an example was explained in which setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 4 to 6 are divided into two and the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern is different. to 6, and the decision ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern may be changed, or the set value 1 to set value 6 are each divided into six, and the decision ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern is determined. can be different.

(Regarding Modified Example of Game Machine Related to Characteristic Part 027SH)
Next, modified examples in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-32 will be described.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the order of display start timing of each item image and the order of execution start timing of each advance notice effect corresponding to each item image are explained as an example. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display start timing of item images A to D is as follows: display start timing of item image A (T2)→display start timing of item image B (T3)→item image The display start timing of C (T4)→the display start timing of item image D (T5) is in that order, and the execution start timing of each of the advance notice effects corresponding to item images A to D is the cut-in corresponding to item image A. Execution start timing of announcement effect (T15)→Execution start timing of group announcement effect corresponding to item image B (T18)→Execution start timing of button announcement effect corresponding to item image C (T21)→Corresponding to item image D This is the order of the performance start timing (T24) of the character object announcement effect, and the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each announcement effect corresponding to each item image do not match. ing. However, the order of the display start timings of the item images and the order of the execution start timings of the advance notice effects corresponding to the item images do not have to match. For example, the items may be displayed in order of item image A→item image B, and may be executed in order of group announcement effect corresponding to item image B→cut-in announcement effect corresponding to item image A. Also, when item image A→item image B are displayed in order, there are cases where cut-in notice effect → group notice effect are executed in order, and group notice effect → cut-in notice effect in order. You may do so.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display start timing of each item image is individually different has been described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, item image A is T1, item image B is T2, item image C is T3, and item image D is T4. However, the display start timing of each item image does not have to be different. For example, two of the four item images A to D may start displaying at the same time, or three out of the four item images may start displaying at the same time. Alternatively, the display start timings of all four types of item images may be the same.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example was described in which the change timing of each item image to the second display mode (level 2) is individually different. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, item image A is T6, item image B is T7, item image C is T8, and item image D is T9. However, the timing at which each item image changes to the second display mode (level 2) does not have to be different. For example, two of the four types of item images A to D may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same timing, or three of the four types of item images may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time. may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time, or all four types of item images may be changed to the second display mode (level 2) at the same time. The same applies to the change timing to the third display mode (level 3).

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display mode when the item image A starts to be displayed is always the first display mode (level 1), but the display mode when the display is opened is the second display mode (level 1). 2) or the third display mode (level 3). Item image B, item image C, and item image D are the same. As described above, when there is a case where the item image D is in the fourth display mode (level 4), the display mode when the display is opened may be the fourth display mode (level 4).

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above example, the display mode of the item image does not change at the timing after any of the advance notice effects are executed (that is, the timing at which the display state of the item image changes is the example), which is earlier than the For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, none of the item images change at the timing after the earliest cut-in announcement effect is executed (after T15). However, the display mode of the item image may be changed at the timing after one of the announcement effects is executed.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above example, the item image is not newly displayed at the timing after one of the notice effects is executed (that is, the item image display start timing is the timing earlier than any notice effect is executed example) was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, no item images are newly displayed at the timing after the earliest cut-in announcement effect is executed (after T15). However, the item image may be newly displayed at the timing after one of the announcement effects is executed.

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example was explained in which the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect do not overlap, but the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect may overlap. In other words, the execution start timing of a certain notice effect → the execution start timing of another notice effect → the execution end timing of another notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain notice effect, or the execution start timing of a certain notice effect → other There may be a case where execution start timing of advance notice effect→execution end timing of certain advance notice effect→execution end timing of other advance notice effect.

(Modification 8 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image and the notice effect are one-to-one, such as item image A and cut-in notice effect, item image B and group notice effect, item image C and button notice effect, item image D and role notice effect. An example of correspondence has been described. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, what can be executed based on the item image A being deleted (used as an item) is the cut-in notice effect, and the item image B being deleted. A group foretelling effect can be executed based on this, a button foretelling effect can be executed based on the item image C being erased, and a button foretelling effect can be executed based on the item image D being erased. explained that it was a role preview production. However, the item image and the advance notice effect do not necessarily have a one-to-one correspondence relationship.

For example, one item image (eg, item image X) may be associated with a plurality of announcement effects (eg, cut-in announcement effect, group announcement effect). When item image X is associated with cut-in notice effect and group notice effect, only cut-in notice effect is executed based on item image X being erased, and item image X is executed. In some cases, only the group announcement effect is executed based on the erasing of . Note that the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect may be executed based on the deletion of the item image X.

Further, for example, one notice effect (for example, cut-in notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the item image X and the item image Y are associated with the cut-in notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image Y is deleted. A cut-in notice effect may be executed based on this. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is deleted, the rate at which the notice effect is executed may be varied according to the type of the item image to be deleted. In the above example, in addition to the display mode of item image X and item image Y when they are deleted, the cut-in notice effect is executed depending on whether item image X or item image Y is deleted. different percentages may be used.

Also, for example, a plurality of item images (eg, item image X, item image Y) may be associated with a plurality of notice effects (eg, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect). When item image X and item image Y are associated with cut-in notice effect and group notice effect, only cut-in notice effect is executed based on item image X being erased. , the case where only the group notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, the case where only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image Y, and the case where the item image Y is In some cases, only the group announcement effect is executed based on the erasure. Note that when the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the deletion of the item image X, or when the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are performed based on the deletion of the item image Y. may be executed. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is deleted, depending on the type of item image to be deleted, the rate at which the notice effect is executed and the rate at which the notice effect is executed may be changed. good.

(Modification 9 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image can specify the corresponding advance notice effect at the time of display start, but the item image may not be able to specify the corresponding notice effect at the time of display start. For example, the item image A corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a display mode (for example, solid color) in which the corresponding notice effect cannot be specified at the display start timing, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed at the change timing. may be changed from an unidentifiable display mode (for example, plain) to a display mode (first display mode, second display mode, etc.) in which the corresponding advance notice effect can be specified.

(Modification 10 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which multiple item images of the same type are not displayed has been described, but multiple item images of the same type may be displayed. For example, when two item images A in the first display mode (level 1) are displayed side by side, the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) and the item image A in the second display mode (level 2) may be displayed side by side. When N item images of a certain type are displayed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed a maximum of N times.

(Modification 11 of characteristic portion 027SH)
Although the display mode of the item image changes in the above, the type of the item image does not change, but the type of the item image may also change. For example, when the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) changes to the item image B in the first display mode (level 1), or when the item image A in the first display mode (level 1) changes to the second display mode (level 1). There may be a case where the display mode (level 2) of the item image B is changed. Note that when the type changes, such as when the item image A in the third display mode (level 3) changes to the item image B in the second display mode (level 2), the display mode is demoted (level 3 → level 2). There may be cases.

(Modification 12 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, there are four types of notice effects, and four types of item images corresponding to the notice effects, but the number of item images and notice effects may not be four. For example, in relation to Modification 8 described above, there may be two types of item images and five types of advance notice effects, or five types of item images and two types of notice effects. Also, one type of item image and one type of advance notice effect may be used.

(Modification 13 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example is explained in which the timing of erasing the item image is the timing of executing the inciting effect that incites the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image, but the timing of erasing the item image is not limited to this. For example, the timing of erasing the item image may be the timing of executing the announcement effect corresponding to the item image. That is, the item image may continue to be displayed during the execution period of the fanning effect, and may be erased at the start of execution of the advance notice effect (at the end of the fanning effect). Specifically, in FIGS. 9-11, item image A is erased at T15 instead of T14, item image B is erased at T18 instead of T17, item image C is erased at T21 instead of T20, The item image D may be erased at T24 instead of T23.

(Modification 14 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image A is erased at the start of the fan effect (T14 in FIG. 9-11), and during the execution period of the fan effect (T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-11) and during the period of the cut-in notice effect ( T15 to T16 in Figure 9-11) Example of not displaying (in the case of modification 13 described above, it is erased at the start of the cut-in notice effect (T15), and during the period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 in Figure 9-11 An example of not displaying in T15 to T16) has been explained. In other words, the item image A is erased by the start of the cut-in notice effect at the latest, and is not displayed during the period of the cut-in notice effect. However, the item image A may be displayed during the cut-in notice effect period without being erased. In other words, the item image A may not be deleted even if it is used. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

(Modification 15 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In relation to Modified Example 14 described above, if the used item image A is not erased, it may be possible to recognize that the used item image A has been used. For example, if the display mode of the item image A immediately before starting the fanning effect that fuels the cut-in notice effect is the second display mode (level 2) (the first display mode (level 1) or the third display mode (level 3)), at the start of the fanning effect that incites the cut-in notice effect, the second display mode (level 2) → the fanning effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording ”, etc.), and at the start of the cut-in notice effect, the swaying effect execution mode → notice effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording “notice effect in progress” etc. is displayed). , at the end of the cut-in notice effect, the notice effect execution mode → the notice effect end mode (for example, a mode in which the color is grayed-down or monochrome, and the word "done" is displayed). In other words, for the item image A, during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15), it is set to the "enthusiastic effect execution mode", and during the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T16), it is set to the "notice effect execution mode", and cut After the end of the in advance notice effect (from T16), the "end notice effect mode" may be set. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

In addition, if the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect, at the timing of starting the execution of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect non-execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording It is also possible to adopt a mode in which "effect not executed" or the like is displayed). In other words, for the item image A, during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15), it may be set to the "enthusiastic effect execution mode", and after the end of the fanning effect (T15 onwards), it may be set to the "notice effect non-execution mode". The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, and item image D).

The manner in which the fanning effect is executed may be common regardless of the type of item image. For example, it may be displayed in a plain color, with the words "inviting", or the like. The foretelling effect execution mode, the foretelling effect end mode, and the foretelling effect non-execution mode may also be common regardless of the type of item image.

Note that, instead of the above, the mode of execution of the fanning effect may correspond to the type of the item image. For example, the colors may be grayed down, or the words "inviting" may be displayed within the range where the pattern (see FIG. 9-9) corresponding to the type of item image can be recognized. The foretelling effect execution mode, the foretelling effect end mode, and the foretelling effect non-execution mode may also be common regardless of the type of item image.

(Modification 16 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, an example of executing the notice effect after the execution of the fan effect (an example of executing the fan effect before the execution of the notice effect) was explained, but it is not necessary to execute the notice effect after the execution of the fan effect (notice effect It is not necessary to perform the inciting effect before the execution of ). That is, after the item image is used, the notice effect may be executed without executing the fan effect.

(Modification 17 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image effect (item image display) and the notice effect are executed during the super ready-to-win effect, but the item image effect and the notice effect may be executed during other periods. For example, the flow may be: start variable display → start display of item image A → reach → erase item image A → execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → start display of item image A → reach → super reach. → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → Reach → Start display of item image A → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect. The flow may be: start of variable display→ready→start of display of item image A→development to super reach→erasure of item image A→execution of cut-in notice effect.

(Modification 18 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during one variation, but the item image effect and the notice effect may be executed over a plurality of changes.

For example, during one fluctuation, all the necessary item images (item images that have been determined to be displayed) are displayed, and during another fluctuation after the next fluctuation, all the item images being displayed are erased. It is also possible to execute all of the advance notice effects (the notice effects determined to be executed). For example, display of item image A, item image B, and item image C is started at the first variation → during the variation after some variation (for example, during any variation of the second to fourth variation), the item image A, The flow is to erase all the item images B and C (each item image can be changed between display start and erase) and execute the necessary advance notice effect.

Also, for example, during a certain variation, all necessary item images (item images determined to be displayed) are displayed, and over a plurality of variations, the item images being displayed are sequentially erased to produce the required advance notice ( It is also possible to sequentially execute the advance notice effects for which execution has been determined. For example, the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C are displayed in the first variation, and the item image A is deleted in the first variation (the item image A can be changed between the display start and the deletion). Execute the notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → Delete the item image B at the 2nd change (Item image B can change between display start and disappear) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → 3 changes Item image C is erased (item image C can be changed between display start and disappearance) and the necessary notice effect (button notice effect) is executed. , start displaying item image C → erase item image A in the second change (item image A can change between display start and disappear) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → in the third change Delete item image B (item image B can be changed from display start to deletion) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → Delete item image C at the 4th change (item image C starts display to It is a flow of executing the necessary notice effect (button notice effect) by changing it between erasing).

Also, for example, over a plurality of fluctuations, the necessary item images (item images determined to be displayed) are sequentially displayed, and during another fluctuation after all the necessary item images have been displayed, the item being displayed All of the images may be erased and all the necessary notice effects (the notice effects decided to be executed) may be executed. For example, the display of item image A is started in the first variation → the display of item image B is started in the second variation → the display of item image C is started in the third variation, and the item image A, the item image B, and the item are displayed in the third variation. The flow of deleting all image C (each item image can be changed between display start and deletion) and executing the necessary notice effect, or the item image A starting to be displayed at the first change → the item image at the second change Start displaying B → Start displaying item image C at the 3rd change → Delete all item images A, B, and C at the 4th change (Each item image can be changed between display start and deletion) It is a flow of executing the necessary announcement effect.

In addition, for example, the required item images (item images determined to be displayed) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the item images being displayed are sequentially erased over a plurality of fluctuations to obtain the necessary advance notice. Effects (announcement effects whose execution has been determined) may be sequentially executed. For example, display of item image A is started in the first variation → item image B is displayed in the second variation, and item image A is deleted in the second variation (item image A can be changed between display start and deletion). Execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect), and at the 3rd change, erase item image B (item image B can change between display start and erase) and perform the necessary notice effect (group notice effect). The flow of execution, for example, the item image A is displayed in the first variation → the item image B is displayed in the second variation → the item image A is deleted in the third variation (the item image A is displayed between the start and deletion changeable) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect), and at the 4th change, erase the item image B (item image B can change between display start and erase) and perform the necessary notice effect (group It is a flow of executing the advance notice effect).

(Modification 19 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 7 and 9-14). good too. In the aspect in which the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the item image is determined based on whether or not the announcement effect is executed and the variation pattern (see FIGS. 9-10). When determining the item image in the setting process (step S161), based on the contents of the received pattern designation command (see FIG. 8-16) and variation category designation command (see FIG. 8-16), the item image may decide. In addition, a plurality of item images may be collectively determined in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item image may be decided in the pre-reading notice setting process at the time of each start winning. . That is, one variation may be associated with a plurality of item images, or each variation may be associated with one item image.

(Modification 20 of characteristic portion 027SH)
In the above, after the item image is displayed, as an effect when using the item image, an example of executing a notice effect corresponding to the type of item image used was explained, but the notice effect corresponding to the type of item image used There may be cases where a different type of advance notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the item image A being erased, but the group notice effect is executed based on the item image A being erased. may be executed. In addition, as an example related to modification 8, when a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) are associated with one item image (for example, item image X) , based on the deletion of the item image X, there is a case where a notice effect (for example, a character notice effect, etc.) different from the plurality of notice effects (for example, a cut-in notice effect, a group notice effect) is executed. may As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve his or her interest. In addition, in a mode in which a different type of notice effect from the type of item image used may be executed, a different type of notice effect from the type of item image used is executed. In this case, the degree of expectation for the big win may be higher than in the case where the announcement effect corresponding to the type of item image used is executed.

(Modification 21 of characteristic portion 027SH)
Suggestion of set values has been described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, but the suggestion of set values is not limited to this.

For example, in relation to Modification 1 described above, the order of the display start timings of the item images and the order of the execution start timings of the advance notice effects corresponding to the item images are determined at the ratio of determining whether or not to match. A setting difference may be provided, and a setting value may be suggested in relation to whether the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect match. As an example, the ratio of matching the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the notice effect is set to 95% when the setting is low (e.g., 3 or less), and is set to high (e.g., 4). or more), it is set to 85%, and if the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect do not match (or that they do not match frequently), the high setting (for example, the set value 4 or more). In other words, the rule regarding the above order (in principle, the order is the same) is broken more frequently with high settings (5% with low settings, 15% with high settings), so the rule break (frequency of rule break) causes high settings. You may suggest.

In addition, in relation to the above-described modification 2, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the display start timing of a plurality of item images is simultaneous, and the display start timing of a plurality of item images is related to whether the display start timing is simultaneous. and may suggest a set value. As an example, the percentage of simultaneous display start timings for multiple item images is set to 5% for low settings (e.g., 3 or less) and 15% for high settings (e.g., 4 or more). A high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) may be suggested when the change timings of a plurality of item images match (or match frequently). In other words, the rule regarding the display start timing (in principle, not at the same time) is broken more frequently with high setting (5% with low setting, 15% with high setting), so the rule break (frequency of rule break) A setting may be suggested. Similarly, in relation to Modification 3 described above, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the change timings of a plurality of item images are simultaneous, and whether or not the change timings of a plurality of item images are simultaneous is determined. It may be related and suggest a setting value.

In addition, in relation to the above-described modification 4, setting differences are provided in the determination ratio of the display mode when the item image is displayed, and the set value is suggested in relation to the display mode when the item image is displayed. good too. As an example, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), and the ratio of the second display mode (level 2) is set to a low setting (for example, 3 or less), 3%, high setting (e.g., 4 or more), 9%, and the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the second display mode (level 2). (Alternatively, the high frequency of the second display mode (level 2)) may suggest a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or higher). In other words, the frequency with which the rule regarding the display mode when the item image is displayed (in principle, the first display mode (level 1)) is broken is higher with the high setting (3% with the low setting, 9% with the high setting), A high setting may be suggested according to rule violation (frequency of rule violation).

Also, the setting value may be suggested in the advance notice effect. For example, for strong cut-in images (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), normal strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A and B, etc.), special strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of the strong cut-in image, the setting value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) that displays a strong cut-in image, if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), "normal strong cut-in image ” is determined at a rate of 95% and “special strong cut-in image” at a rate of 5%. "strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. In other words, in the cut-in announcement effect (YEP-A2) that displays the strong cut-in image, the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed (or the frequency of displaying the "special strong cut-in image" is A high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more) may be suggested.

Further, for example, for group images (FIG. 9-5 (C), etc.), two types of group images, a normal group image (character A group) and a special group image (character B group), are prepared. A setting value may be suggested in the group images by providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of . Specifically, for example, after it is decided to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B), if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), the "normal group image" is 95%, and the "special group image" is set to 95%. ” is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the setting is high (e.g., 4 or more), 80% of the “normal group image” and 20% of the “special group image” are determined. good. In other words, in the group preview effect (YEP-B) for displaying the group images, the display of the "special group images" (or the frequent display of the "special group images") is a high setting. (For example, a set value of 4 or more) may be suggested.

Moreover, in super reach, you may make it suggest a setting value. For example, for super reach B (variation patterns #16 and #18), there are two types of super reach effects: a normal super reach effect (battle effect in background 1, etc.) and a special super reach effect (battle effect, etc. in background 2). , and by providing a set difference in the determination ratio of the type of super reach performance of super reach B, the set value may be suggested in the super reach performance of super reach B. Also, it may suggest a set value in relation to the big win. For example, two types of fanfare effects, a normal fanfare effect and a special fanfare effect, are prepared for the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big win game state of the third big win (see FIG. 9-2), and the fanfare effect in the third big win is prepared. A set value may be suggested in the fanfare effect in the third big win by providing a set difference in the determination ratio of the type of .

Also, the item image may indicate that the setting value will be suggested later. For example, the item image may suggest that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect. As an example, if it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" that suggests a setting value, and if a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect The item image A may be displayed in a manner suggesting that the setting is performed (for example, in a manner in which the text "Advance notice with setting suggestion?" etc. is displayed). In other words, for the item image A in the above mode, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the cut-in notice effect will be a special strong cut-in image " is suggested to be displayed. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, a mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, the item image A may be displayed in a mode in which the text "Advance notice with setting suggestion!" In other words, the item image A in the above mode suggests that a cut-in forewarning effect is to be performed and a "special strong cut-in image" is to be displayed in the cut-in forewarning effect.

Note that the advance notice effects shown in FIG. 9-4 are different effects, etc. (may be effects related to the reliability of the big hit, or may be effects not related to the reliability of the big hit). The item image may indicate that the suggestion is made.

In addition, it is also possible to suggest that the setting value will be suggested later by means other than the item image. In other words, the item image may not suggest that setting values will be suggested later. For example, it may be suggested that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect by the fan effect of the advance notice effect. As an example, if it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" that suggests a setting value, and if a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect may be performed (for example, a mode in which a wording such as "Advance notice with setting suggestion?" is displayed in the vicinity of the countdown number) may be executed. In other words, in the above-described mode of fanning effect, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, a "special strong cut-in image" will be displayed in the cut-in notice effect. It is suggested to display As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, a mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, it is possible to execute a stimulating effect such as a mode in which words such as "notice with setting suggestions!" are displayed near the countdown numbers. In other words, the above-described mode of fanning effect suggests that a cut-in forewarning effect is to be performed and a "special strong cut-in image" is to be displayed in the cut-in forewarning effect.

It should be noted that it is also possible not to suggest at all that the setting value will be suggested later. In other words, the setting value may be suggested without any advance suggestion (without suggesting the item image or without suggesting anything other than the item image.

It should be noted that "suggestion of set value" only makes the user recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range), and that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). may not be definitely reported, and a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range) may be definitely reported. For example, for a certain effect or a certain display, etc., by not deciding when it is a low setting (for example, set value 3 or less), the effect or display etc. can be set at high setting (for example, set value 4 or less) It will definitely notify you of something.

(Application to other equipment)
In the above, an example of application to a pachinko game machine has been described, but application to a slot machine is also possible. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not in an advantageous state), periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range), it is determined whether to transition to another state (for example, an advantageous state) than normal. In a slot machine that draws lots with a high probability, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects with different expectations of transition to another state in a high probability period that periodically visits, and from the high probability period In the previous period, it was possible to display an item image that can specify the type of notice effect to be executed, and after the item image was displayed according to the display mode of the item image, the type specified by the item image You may make it the ratio which an announcement production|presentation is performed differs.

Alternatively, in a slot machine that draws with a high probability whether a first advantageous state (e.g., CZ, bonus game, etc.) transitions to a second advantageous state (e.g., AT state, ART state, etc.), the first During the second period of the advantageous state (for example, the period from the latter half to the final stage of the period of the first advantageous state), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects with different expectations of whether the transition to the second advantageous state will occur. In addition, in the first period prior to the second period of the first advantageous state, it is possible to display an item image that can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed, and the item image is displayed according to the display mode. After the item image is displayed, the rate at which the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed may be different.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 027SH)
(Means 1 related to characteristic part 027SH)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) is provided with an effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means is , within a predetermined period (for example, T15-T16, T18-T19, T21-T22, T24-T25 shown in FIG. 9-11, the period before the period in which the lottery is performed with high probability, etc.). Effect (for example, multiple types of advance notice effects shown in FIG. 9-4) can be executed, and a specific display (for example, FIG. 9-9 (A) to A specific effect (for example, the item image effect shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), etc.) that displays a plurality of types of item images shown in (L)) before the predetermined period can be executed, and the Depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within a predetermined period, the rate at which content advantageous to the player is notified differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. different), there are times when the forewarning effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed and when it is not executed (for example, FIGS. 9-10 (A) and (C) (E) When the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image is determined when executing the notice effect of (G), the item image is specified by the item image after the item image is displayed. Item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" that display item images when the advance notice effects of FIGS. 9-10 (B) (D) (F) (H) are not executed. ' is determined, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed after the item image is displayed), and there are a plurality of display modes for the specific display (for example, FIGS. 9-9(A) to ( L)), the ratio of execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, FIG. 9-8 (B), FIG. 9 As shown in -10 (A) to (H), the rate at which the notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed after the item image is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the item image. The rate at which the effect is executed is as follows: the display mode of the item image corresponding to the previous notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)>the display mode of the item image corresponding to the previous notice effect is the second display mode (level 2)> The display mode of the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the above gaming machine, since the ratio of execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display, Increased interest in gaming.

(Means 2 related to characteristic part 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1, the specific display changes to a special mode corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). possible (for example, item image A can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the cut-in notice effect is executed (T15)), and the special mode of the specific display is independent of the type of the specific display. (for example, common regardless of the type of item image).

According to the gaming machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (that the item image is used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify that the specific display corresponds to the foretelling effect being executed and which specific display is the specific display corresponding to the foretelling effect being executed.

(Means 3 related to characteristic part 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the means 1 and 2 above, the specific display can be changed to a special mode after execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, the item image A may be changed to the "notice effect end mode" at the end of execution of the cut-in notice effect (T16)).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (that the item image has been used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify that the specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect and which specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect.

(Means 4 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3, as the specific effect, a plurality of types of specific displays can be displayed within a specific period before the predetermined period (for example, T2 to T2 shown in FIGS. 9-11) A maximum of four types of item images can be displayed at T14, etc.), and each type of specific display may be displayed in any display mode (for example, in the scene of FIG. 9-26 (C), the item image A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3), and item image D is displayed displayed by the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, interest is enhanced.

(Means 5 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the means 2 can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, T15, T18, T21, T24) Furthermore, the notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings), and the execution timing of the notice effect varies depending on the type of the notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, the cut-in notice effect execution start timing is T15, execution start timing of the group notice effect is T18, execution start timing of the button notice effect is T21, execution start timing of the character object notice effect is T24, and so on. The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode varies depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is the cut-in notice effect At the time of execution (T15), it is possible to change to the "notice effect execution mode", and at the time of execution of the group notice effect (T18), the item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode", and the item image C is a button notice. When the performance is executed (T21), the item image D can be changed to the "forecast effect execution mode" when the performance is executed (T24). The timing at which the image becomes the "preview effect execution mode" may vary depending on the type of the previous effect specified by the item image.

According to the gaming machine described above, since the execution timing of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, it is possible to reduce the complication of the effect.

(Means 6 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 5 is provided when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed before execution of the one notice effect, and when the notice effect is performed before the one notice effect is executed. (For example, in the example of FIG. 9-13(B), the item image B corresponding to the button notice effect is displayed before the button notice effect is executed. However, the item image D corresponding to the character product announcement effect is not displayed before the performance of the character product announcement effect is performed), and the specific display corresponding to the announcement effect is displayed before the one announcement effect is performed. The rate at which contents advantageous to the player are reported differs between when the announcement effect is displayed and when the specific display corresponding to the announcement effect is not displayed before the execution of one of the announcement effects. B), as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to (H), when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed, and when the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed Since the execution ratio of the notice effect is different from when the corresponding item image is not displayed, when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed, the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed. 9-7(A) to 9-7(F) may be different from when the item image corresponding to is not displayed.

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to the flow of the presentation, interest is enhanced.

(Means 7 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 6 can change the display mode of the specific display after displaying the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 9-8), and an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display (For example, an item image change suggestion effect using item image change suggestion display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change, as shown in FIG. 9-17(C), etc.). may

According to the gaming machine described above, since attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, interest is improved.

(Means 8 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 7 can execute variable display of identification information, and prefetch determination means (for example, prefetch by the effect control CPU 120) that prefetches and judges whether content advantageous to the player is notified An advance notice setting process (step S161, etc.) may be provided, the predetermined period may be a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed based on the prefetch determination. For example, one variable display may be associated with a plurality of item images, or each variable display may be associated with one item image.

According to the gaming machine described above, the degree of interest in the variation to be executed later increases, and the interest increases.

(Means 9 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 to 8 can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. It is possible to set one of the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), and the set value is suggested in at least a part of the forewarning effects of the plurality of types. You may For example, for strong cut-in images (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), normal strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A and B, etc.), special strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of strong cut-in images, the setting values may be suggested in the strong cut-in images.

According to the gaming machine, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, attention is also paid to whether the set value is suggested in the notice effect displayed after the specific display is displayed, so interest is improved. .

(Means 10 related to characteristic portion 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , may be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is to be executed, attention is also paid to the specific display regarding the indication of the set value, so interest is further enhanced. If there is no relationship between the item image effect in which the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and the setting suggestion effect in which the set value is suggested, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above game machine, the item image effect may suggest execution of the setting suggesting effect, and since there is a relationship between the item image effect and the setting suggesting effect, interest is enhanced.

(Means 11 related to characteristic part 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , may be displayed corresponding to the preceding notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggesting effect to be executed.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and suppress the decrease in interest. If the item image effect of displaying an item image corresponding to the advance notice effect before execution of the notice effect is associated with the setting suggestion effect of suggesting the setting value, the effect becomes complicated and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered instead. However, in the above game machine, the item image effect does not suggest the execution of the setting suggesting effect, and the item image effect and the setting suggesting effect are independent from each other, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 12 related to characteristic part 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggestion rendering that suggests the set value can be executed, and the specific display is The setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, an item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest setting values.

According to the gaming machine described above, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is to be executed, attention is also paid to the specific display regarding the indication of the set value, so interest is further enhanced. If there is no relationship between the item image effect in which the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and the setting suggestion effect in which the set value is suggested, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above game machine, since the item image effect is also a setting suggesting effect, interest is improved.

(Means 13 related to characteristic part 027SH)
The game machine of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a plurality of disadvantageous set values and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. Any one of set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), a setting suggesting effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the setting suggesting effect can be executed. may be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the performance mode (for example, background) of the super ready-to-win performance, or the set value may be suggested by the start performance (fanfare performance) of the jackpot game state.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated and suppress the decrease in interest. If the notice effect and item image effect are associated with the setting suggesting effect, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be reduced. Because it is independent from the , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine that acquires a plurality of items in response to pressing a button, displays side by side a plurality of items corresponding to the notice, and executes the notice corresponding to the item (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116654). reference). However, the amusement of the game was insufficient. The following configurations (1) to (13) have been made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the game. In the description of the characteristic portion 027SH described above, the following configurations (1) to (13) are specifically described.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) and capable of executing an effect. Means (for example, production control CPU 120, etc.) are provided, and the production execution means is within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T19, T21 to T22, T24 to T25 shown in FIG. 9-11, high probability During the period before the period during which the lottery is held, etc.), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, a plurality of types of notice effects shown in FIG. 9-4, etc.), and A specific effect (for example, FIG. 9-8 (A), etc.) can be executed, and the rate at which content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 9- As shown in 7 (A) to (F), the degree of expectation for a big win is different), and when the forewarning effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed, and when it is not executed. There are times and times (for example, item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" that display item images when executing the notice effects of FIGS. 9-10 (A) (C) (E) (G) is determined, the type of notice effect specified by the item image is executed after the item image is displayed, and the notice effects of FIGS. 9-10 (B), (D), (F) and (H) are not executed , the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image is determined, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed after the item image is displayed), the specific display (See, for example, FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (L)), and after the specific display is displayed according to the display mode of the specific display, the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed. different ratios (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (B) and FIGS. 9-10 (A) to (H), after the item image is displayed depending on the display mode of the item image, the item image The proportion at which the corresponding notice effect is executed is different.Specifically, the proportion at which the notice effect is executed is such that the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)>the notice effect is the second display mode (level 2)>the display mode of the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to such a configuration, since the ratio of execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display. , the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific display is a special display corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display) corresponding to the specific display. mode (for example, the item image A can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the cut-in notice effect is executed (T15)), and the special mode of the specific display is the type of the specific display. It may be common regardless of the type of item image (for example, common regardless of the type of item image).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the announcement effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (that the item image is used).

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) and (2) above, the specific display is a special mode after execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (for example, the item image A can be changed to the “notice effect end mode” at the end of execution of the cut-in notice effect (T16)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the announcement effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (that the item image has been used).

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (3) above, as the specific effect, a plurality of types of specific displays can be displayed within a specific period prior to the predetermined period (for example, in FIGS. 9-11 Up to four types of item images can be displayed at T2 to T14 shown), and each type of specific display may be displayed in any display mode (for example, the scene of FIG. 9-26 (C) Then, the item image A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), the item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), the item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3), The item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1)).

According to such a configuration, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, interest is improved.

(5) The gaming machine of (2) above is capable of executing the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, T15, T18, T21, The notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings such as T24), and the execution timing of the notice effect varies depending on the type of the notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, cut The execution start timing of the in advance notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button notice effect is T21, and the execution start timing of the character notice effect is T24. ), the timing when the specific display becomes the special mode varies depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is cut-in The item image B can change to the "notice effect execution mode" when the group notice effect is executed (T18), and the item image C can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the group notice effect is performed (T18). can be changed to the "execution mode of notice effect" when the button notice effect is executed (T21), and the item image D can be changed to the "execution state of notice effect" when the character object notice effect is executed (T24). Therefore, the timing at which the item image becomes the "preview effect execution mode" may vary depending on the type of the previous effect specified by the item image.

According to such a configuration, since the execution timing of the announcement effect corresponding to the specific display is different, it is possible to reduce the complication of the effect.

(6) The gaming machine described in (1) to (5) above displays when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed before execution of the one notice effect, and when the one notice effect is executed. (For example, in the example of FIG. 9-13(B), there is a case where the button notice effect corresponding to the button notice effect is executed before the execution of the button notice effect. The item image B is displayed, but the item image D corresponding to the character product announcement effect is not displayed before the performance of the character product announcement effect is performed), and the first announcement effect is displayed before the announcement effect is performed. The rate at which content advantageous to the player is notified differs between when the specific display is displayed and when the specific display corresponding to the previous notice effect is not displayed before the execution of one of the notice effects. For example, As shown in FIGS. 9-8 (B) and FIGS. 9-10 (A) to (H), when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed, and before the notice effect is executed Since the execution ratio of the notice effect is different from when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed, the time when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the notice effect is executed and when the notice effect is executed 9-7(A) to 9-7(F) may be different from when the item image corresponding to the previous notice effect is not displayed.

According to such a configuration, since attention is paid to what kind of flow of production will occur, interest is improved.

(7) The gaming machine described in (1) to (6) above can change the display mode of the specific display after displaying the specific display (see, for example, FIGS. 9-8), and the display mode of the specific display can be changed. Effect suggesting change (for example, item image change suggesting effect using item image change suggesting display 027 SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A will change, as shown in FIG. 9-17(C), etc.) may be executable.

According to such a configuration, interest is improved because the user pays attention to whether the specific display changes.

(8) The gaming machine described in (1) to (7) above is capable of executing variable display of identification information, and prefetching determination means (for example, effect control pre-reading notice setting processing (step S161) etc.) by the CPU 120, the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display is displayed based on the pre-reading determination. good too. For example, one variable display may be associated with a plurality of item images, or each variable display may be associated with one item image.

According to such a configuration, the degree of interest in the variation to be executed later is increased, and interest is improved.

(9) The gaming machine described in (1) to (8) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value and an advantageous set value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set value. Any set value can be set from among a plurality of set values including The set value may be suggested. For example, for strong cut-in images (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), normal strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A and B, etc.), special strong cut-in images (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of strong cut-in images, the setting values may be suggested in the strong cut-in images.

According to such a configuration, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, attention is also paid to whether the set value is suggested in the notice effect displayed after the specific display is displayed, so interest is improved. do.

(10) The gaming machine described in (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value and an advantageous set value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set value. (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), and can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value , the specific display may be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to such a configuration, interest is further improved.

(11) The gaming machine described in (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value and an advantageous set value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set value. (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), and can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value The specific display may be displayed in correspondence with the forewarning effect to be executed, but may not be displayed in correspondence with the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated and suppress the decrease in interest.

(12) The gaming machine of (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value and an advantageous set value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set value. (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), and can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value , the setting suggestion effect may be executed as the specific display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, an item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest setting values.

According to such a configuration, interest is further improved.

(13) The gaming machine described in (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value and an advantageous set value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set value. (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B)), and can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value , The setting suggestion effect may be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the performance mode (for example, background) of the super ready-to-win performance, or the set value may be suggested by the start performance (fanfare performance) of the jackpot game state.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 16TM will be described. FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of pending display and active display in this embodiment. The pending display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols that have not been executed, and the active display is display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols that are being executed. In this embodiment, a first reserved display area 16TM011 in which a first reserved memory number (first reserved display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is displayed is provided in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. 5 is provided with an active display area 16TM013 in which an active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state), a mini Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini-slot 16TM030 as if it were the base of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at the position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily understand that the mini-slot 16TM030 will execute an effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. can be done.

In this embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not variable display of special symbols is being executed (whether or not variable display of decorative symbols is being executed), and regardless of the number of pending memories. information.

When the first reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 16TM001 corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 16TM011. That is, in the first pending display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning port) is established, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and it is controlled to the jackpot game state. and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. is. When a plurality of first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011, the first reserved displays 16TM001 correspond to the first reserved displays 16TM001 in the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (in order from the right as seen from the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays an active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 indicates that after the starting condition (for example, winning the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port) is established, the starting condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game It is information corresponding to the variable display of special symbols (and the variable display of decorative symbols) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the upper central area of the image display device 5, in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable and static manner, is arranged from left to right in a pattern display area 5L, a pattern display area 5C, and a pattern display area 5C. A pattern display area 5R is assumed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the special symbol, which is a symbol smaller than the decoration symbol displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5, is variably displayed. A symbol indicating whether or not a special symbol is displayed is referred to as a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, the small pattern display area are selected from the left in the upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are variably displayed and stopped. 5r. The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state), the mini slot in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. The pattern is variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display described later, as shown in FIG. Mini-slot symbols of "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu" and "FEVER", which are symbols composed of hint characters, are variably displayed.

(First mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state), the variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols, variation of small symbols display) is executed, mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 (areas corresponding to each of the three reels in the slot machine) are divided into three of "left", "middle" and "right". ), the first mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) can be executed. In the first variable display of mini-slots, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one row (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. In the following description, the term "variable display" simply means variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to variable display of special symbols, or variable display of small symbols.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A2), in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels), "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", A plurality of mutually identifiable patterns such as "cherry", "7", and "blank (horizontal linear object (-) in this example)" are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols are stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, and a combination of symbols called a winning combination is completed, the winning combination is established. The winning hand may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination of different symbols. Successful hands in this embodiment are a combination of identical symbols and a combination of different symbols. In addition, in the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is "lost".

In this embodiment, the winning combination is established when the same symbols are combined. For example, when the same symbol combination of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] is arranged in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of "Bell" is established. Similarly, if the combination of the same pattern of [Watermelon], [Watermelon], and [Watermelon] is complete, the role of "Watermelon" is established, and if the combination of the same pattern of [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] is complete, " The combination of the same symbols of [7], [7], and [7] is established, and the combination of "7 matching" is established. However, when the combination of the same symbols of [Blank], [Blank], and [Blank] are arranged in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, it is handled in the same way as when the winning combination is "lost".

(Second mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 10-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first mini-slot variable display is executed (after any of the above-described winning hands are established), the mini-slot is not divided into a plurality of slots. In a single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (an area corresponding to one reel), it is possible to execute a second mini-slot variable display in which mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display). be. In the second mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), mutually distinguishable characters such as "no display", "CHANCE", "hot heat", and "FEVER" A plurality of types of patterns are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In this embodiment, the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbols being executed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed) by the displayed characters. is suggested to be a “big hit”.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state), and then the number of times of variable display executed is counted. A change number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the change number counter is displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . The value indicated by the variable count display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variable displays executed in the normal state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), "125" is displayed as the variable count display 16TM040, and the variable display has already been executed 124 times since the game state shifted to the normal state, It shows a state in which the 125th variable display is currently being executed.

Here, the change count display 16TM040 changes from a normal mode (for example, a white mode) to a setting suggestion mode different from the normal mode (for example, a white mode) by executing a second setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the setting value of the gaming machine. For example, it changes to a purple aspect).

Note that the display mode of the change number display 16TM040 may be changed from the normal mode (for example, white mode) to the normal mode and the above-described setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) based on the display result of the executed variable display. A notice effect (for example, referred to as a second degree of expectation notice effect) of changing to a degree notice mode (for example, a red color mode) may be executed. However, in the same variable display, both the second set suggestive effect and the second expectation degree advance notice effect are not executed, and if it is decided to execute the second set suggestive effect, the second set suggestive effect in the variable display It is assumed that the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation degree announcement effect.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing a change effect determination process executed at the time of start winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process at the time of start winning shown in FIG.

In the start winning change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first issues a set of start winning commands based on the occurrence of the start winning to the first start winning port (for example, symbol designation command, variable category command , and the first reserved storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S16TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not the big hit will be determined among the results of determination at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win will occur and the type of the big win in the case of a big win based on the random number for judging the big win and the random number for judging the kind of the big win extracted at the time of starting winning, and designates the result of the judgment. Output the specified command. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be a normal reach or whether or not it will be a super reach based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of the start winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. do. Further, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores a set of commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine whether or not If a new set of starting winning commands has not been received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process is terminated.

If one set of start winning commands is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display by referring to the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 10-3 (A)), which will be described later. (see step S16TM1010). It should be noted that the final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is the final display color of the active display determined at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, there are cases where the notice characters are superimposed on the active display in response to execution of the expectation level notice effect described later. In other words, there is a possibility that the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of starting winning may change from the final display mode of the active display based on the effect determination process at the start of the variation.

FIG. 10-3A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), in this embodiment, any of "normal mode (white mode)", "blue mode", and "red mode" is selected as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003. Decision values are assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the starting winning The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 70%, and the blue mode (blue display) at a rate of 25%. circular display), and at a rate of 5%, it becomes a red mode (red circular display).

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is the normal mode at a rate of 10%, the blue mode at a rate of 30%, and the red mode at a rate of 60%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display change pattern and whether or not the first change effect is executed and the number of times of execution based on the active display change pattern determination table (see FIG. 10-3 (B)). (Step S16TM1020).

FIG. 10-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 001 to 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified judgment result is "miss"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is the change pattern 001 with a probability of 70%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 25% and the variation pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 10% for the change pattern 001, selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 002, and selected with a probability of 60% for the change pattern 003. Judgment values are assigned so that

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated. will execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a first change effect suggesting that there is a possibility of changing. This first change effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and the failure mode is changed. When the first change effect of is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed. Also, the first change effect is a effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character affects the active display, but does not change the appearance of the active display.

The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 001 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 003 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, design designation If the judgment result specified by the command is "no"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is 30% of the change pattern 011. The pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 27%, the pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 23%, the pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 5%. A judgment value is assigned so that the variation pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the change pattern 011, selected with a probability of 10% for the change pattern 012, and selected with a probability of 15% for the change pattern 013. The judgment values are assigned so that the variation pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 20%, the variation pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the variation pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 013 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 015 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed after the first change effect of the success mode is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a red mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, design designation If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning (new first reserved memory) is that change pattern 021 is 35%. The pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 25%, the pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 20%, the pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 5% for the change pattern 021, selected with a probability of 15% for the change pattern 022, and selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 023. , and the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 25% and the variation pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is zero. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 024 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 025 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pending display change pattern based on the pending display change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 10-4 (C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and continues the process as it is. finish.

FIG. 10-4(C) is for determining the change pattern of the pending display for one pending when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "1". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 101 to 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "miss"), the change pattern 101 is 100% as the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory). Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is assigned a judgment value so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (C), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified judgment result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 102 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (C), when the active display at the time of active shift is red, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "miss"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 103 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 10-4, the active shift means that the first suspension display 16TM001 shifts from the first suspension display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, it becomes a determination target at the time of starting winning). display of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display).

In this embodiment, the display mode is not changed when the first reserved display 16TM001 shifts from the first reserved display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013. That is, the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift matches the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the first pending display 16TM001 is not changed during the active shift. You can let me.

FIG. 10-4(D) is for determining the change pattern of the pending display for two pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "2". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 201 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) When the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 202 is 40%. Selection is made with a probability, and judgment values are assigned so that the variation pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is assigned a judgment value so that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%. there is

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (D), when the active display at the time of active shift is red, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 204 is 10%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30% and the variation pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) is that the change pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by .

FIG. 10-4(E) is for determining the change pattern of the pending display for three pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "3". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 301 to 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 301 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 302 is 20%. The decision values are assigned so that the pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20% and the pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected by .

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (E), when the active display at the time of active shift is red, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified judgment result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 305 is 13%. is selected with a probability, the variation pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%, the variation pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the variation pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the variation pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%. A judgment value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation The change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) is selected with a probability of 20% for the change pattern 305, selected with a probability of 20% for the change pattern 306, and selected with a probability of 30% for the change pattern 307. , the variation pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 13%, the variation pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the variation pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 10-4(F) is for determining the change pattern of the pending display for four pending items when the first pending storage number stored in the first pending storage number saving area is "4". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table; In this embodiment, any one of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the pending display, and a judgment value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in the normal mode, (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the designated determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 401 is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory) so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue mode, and (1) when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 402 is 20%. The decision values are assigned so that the variation pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%, the variation pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the variation pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. . On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 402 is selected with a probability of 30%, the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 30%. , and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (F), when the active display at the time of active shift is red, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command If the specified determination result is "no"), the change pattern of the first pending display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first pending memory) is that the change pattern 406 is 3%. is selected with a probability, the variation pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%, the variation pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 3%, the variation pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the variation pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 10%. selected, the variation pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 10%, the variation pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the variation pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 15%. , the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 16%. On the other hand, (2) when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the starting winning (new first reservation As for the change pattern of the first reserved display corresponding to the variable display based on memory), the change pattern 406 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%. , the variation pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 15%, the variation pattern 411 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the variation pattern 412 is selected with a probability of 7%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the variation pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the variation pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory count subtraction command)
and is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 .

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content ( Reach, pseudo-run, etc.), based on the reception of a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbols is executed, and the special symbols It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the contents of the production (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of variation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 10-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-6(G)) (step S16TM2000). .

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect as the effect of suggesting the currently set setting value. In this first setting suggestion effect, a combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] as a combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. By doing so, it is a production that the role of "Bell" is established. That is, based on the stop display of the combination of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player can set the set value It recognizes that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting has been executed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 10-6(G), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97%, and decides to execute it at a rate of 3%. Further, when the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 96% and to execute it at a rate of 4%. Further, when the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 95% and to execute it at a rate of 5%. Further, when the set value is "4", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 94% and to execute it at a rate of 6%. Further, when the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 93%, and to execute it at a rate of 7%. Further, when the set value is "6", it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 92% and to execute it at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the higher the ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Become. In the present embodiment, the processing for determining the effect at the time of starting the variation is executed each time the variable display is performed, so whether or not the first setting suggestive effect is to be executed is determined for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the above-mentioned first mini-slot variable display is [Bell] or "Loss". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed. The player is also interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to guess the set value for each variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestive effect (YES in step S16TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed when executing the first set suggestive effect. (Step S16TM2020). On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120, which will be described later.

FIG. 10-6 (H1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "miss". In the execution/non-execution determination table 1 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each variation pattern for loss. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds). In addition, when the variation pattern is "no normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100%. Also, if the variation pattern is "super reach lost" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement effect at a rate of 60%, and to execute it at a rate of 40%. do.

FIG. 10-6 (H2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "big hit". In the execution/non-execution determination table 1 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each of the big win variation patterns. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "normal reach big hit" (variation time is 30 seconds). Also, when the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 20%, and to execute it at a rate of 80%. do.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 (H1) and (H2), whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect is determined based on the variation pattern (variation time). In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). second), it is determined not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100%, and if the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds), the expectation degree announcement effect is performed. It is decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute an expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 80%.

When a variation pattern with a short variation time (non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), normal reach big hit (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level notice effect There is not enough time to execute the production of Therefore, when a variable display based on a variation pattern with a short variable time is executed, although the first set suggestion effect can be executed, the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed after the first set suggestion effect is executed. there is

On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a long variation time (loss of super reach (120 seconds), big hit of super reach (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level notice effect are produced. Sufficient time is provided for execution. Therefore, it is possible to execute the expectation degree announcement effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the variable time. If the variable time is short, the variable time is long. In either case, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a common rate. On the other hand, the expectation degree announcement effect is executed at a higher rate when the variable time is long than when the variable time is short. That is, when the variation time of the variable display to be executed is short, the variation time of the variable display to be executed is longer than the [ratio of execution of the expectation degree announcement effect after the first setting suggestion effect is executed]. The [percentage of the execution of the expectation level announcement effect after the execution of the first setting suggestion effect] is higher.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation degree announcement effect (YES in step S16TM2030), the display result to stop display in the above-described second mini-slot variable display and the second change Whether or not to execute an effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 10-6(J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect is to change the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on "a character pattern as a display result stopped in the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. It is a production that makes In this embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display is a display result of "no display" in which the character pattern is not displayed. Become. On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the expectation level announcement effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

FIG. 10-6(J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-6(J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation level announcement effect, the second mini-slot variable display results in the character pattern being a mini-slot. It is possible to decide either of "no display", which is a display result not displayed in the symbol display area 5LCR1, and "CHANCE", "rapid heat", and "FEVER", which are character symbols. A judgment value is assigned to each result.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(J), when the display result of the variable display is "loss" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "loss"), the variation 70% of the time, "No Display" is selected, 25% of the time, "CHANCE" is selected, and 5% of the time, "Extreme Heat" is the display result of the second mini-slot variable display that is performed in the display. is selected.

On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the second mini-slot variable executed in the variable display As a display result of the display, "no display" was selected at a rate of 22%, "CHANCE" was selected at a rate of 35%, "great heat" was selected at a rate of 40%, and " FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of the big win is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(J), regarding the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display on one reel), “no display”<“CHANCE”<“extreme heat”<“FEVER” Expectations for a big hit are high in this order. Therefore, when any character pattern of "CHANCE", "rapid heat", and "FEVER" is stopped (when the second change effect is executed after that), none of the character patterns are stopped and displayed. The ratio of winning big is higher than when the result is "no display" (when the second change effect is not executed after that). Also, since the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the character pattern to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In this embodiment, when the character pattern (either of "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu", and "FEVER") stops as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display, the display mode of the active display is changed. A second change effect is executed. Specifically, in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (reel 1) of the mini-slot 16TM030, when any character symbol of "CHANCE", "Gekiatsu", and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed, (i) The stopped character pattern moves upward from the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 10-10 (11)), (ii) The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 10-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon showing the same characters as the character pattern that resulted in the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character pattern resulting from the display is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a successful combination of the expectation level advance notice effect, which is used when executing the first setting suggestion effect, in table 1 for establishing the expectation level notice effect (see FIG. 10-7(K)). (step S16TM2050) and proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 10-7(K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the established combination determination table 1 of the expectation level advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 10-7(K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect, more specifically, the expectation level As a winning combination (hereinafter the same) of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the notice effect, "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", Any one of "cherry (freeze)", "7 matching", and "7 matching (freeze)" can be determined, and a judgment value is assigned to each winning combination.

In the present embodiment, when "lost" is selected as the establishment combination of the expectation level notice performance, mini-slot symbols of combinations including different symbols are stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5R1, the expectation level notice effect is established. It becomes a "misalignment".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 matching" are selected as the roles for which the expectation level notice effect is to be established, mini-games with the same symbols are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. The slot pattern is stopped and displayed. For example, when a combination of mini-slot symbols [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] are stopped and displayed as combinations of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the expectation level notice effect is realized. becomes "watermelon".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" and "cherry (via replay)" are selected as the establishment role of the expectation level notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 are displayed with the same symbols. After the combination of mini-slot symbols [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] is stopped and displayed as a combination, the mini-slot symbols are changed again in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 to display the mini-slot symbols. A combination of mini-slot symbols of [Watermelon], [Watermelon], [Watermelon], or a combination of mini-slot symbols of [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] as a combination of the same symbols in areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. stop display.

In the present embodiment, when "Cherry (Freeze)" and "7 Matching (Freeze)" are selected as the establishment roles of the expectation level notice effect, the normal mode ( After executing the variable display of the mini-slot symbols in a freeze mode different from the scroll display and update display from the top to the bottom), [Cherry], [Cherry], [Cherry] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 ] or the combination of mini-slot symbols [7], [7], [7] is stopped. The variable display of the freeze mode in this embodiment means that the mini-slot pattern display that scrolls upward from the bottom or updates the display while the visibility of the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is lowered. Variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-7(K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). case), the successful combination in the expectation degree announcement effect is “lost” at a rate of 100%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " CHANCE"), the successful role in the expectation level notice effect is "lost" at a rate of 5%, "suica" at a rate of 45%, and "suica (via replay)" at a rate of 20%. , 20% of the time it will be "cherry", 2% of the time it will be "cherry (via replay)", and 8% of the time it will be "cherry (freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "hot heat" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is 15% of the time, 10% of the time, 'Watermelon (via replay)', and 40% of the time, 'Watermelon'. 10% of the time it will be "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 25% of the time it will be "Cherry (Freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-7(K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is " FEVER"), the successful combination in the expectation degree announcement effect is "7 matching" at a rate of 70% and "7 matching (Freeze)" at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 10-7(K), when the winning hand is "loss", the stop symbol is "no display" or "CHANCE", and when the winning hand is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stop symbol ( The character icon) becomes "CHANCE" or "rapid heat", and when the winning combination is "7 matching", the stop symbol (character icon) becomes "FEVER". Further, when the winning hand is "lost", the stop symbol "no display" is more likely to be selected than "CHANCE", and when the winning hand is "watermelon", the stop symbol (character icon) is "hot heat". ``CHANCE'' is more likely to be selected than ``CHANCE'', and when the winning combination is ``Cherry'', ``Super heat'' is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol (character icon) than ``CHANCE''.

That is, regarding the second mini-slot variable display stop symbol, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state increases in the order of "no display"<"CHANCE"<"extreme heat"<"FEVER". With respect to the established combination of variable mini-slot display, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is high in the order of "lost"<"watermelon"<"cherry"<"seven match". In addition, when "7 matching" is selected as the winning combination of the first variable display of the mini-slot, the stop pattern of the second variable display of the mini-slot is always "FEVER", so "7 matching" is a big hit. It is a production of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state according to the established combination composed of a plurality of kinds of mini-slot symbols, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-7(K), the successful combination accompanied by the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "7 matching (freeze)". Then, when "Cherry (Freeze)" is selected as the winning hand, the display result (character icon) becomes "CHANCE" or "Gekiatsu", and when "7 Matching (Freeze)" is selected as the winning hand. , the notice character (character icon) is "FEVER". That is, when the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed in the frozen mode, the established combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "7 matching") is determined, so the mini-slot symbols are variably displayed in the normal mode. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit game state is higher than in the case of performing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot symbols, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestive effect (NO in step S16TM2010), it selects whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed when the first set suggestive effect is not executed. (step S16TM2120).

FIG. 10-6 (I1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "no". In the execution/non-execution determination table 2 of the expectation level announcement effect, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is executed is assigned to each variation pattern for loss. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 100% when the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds). Also, when the variation pattern is "normal reach out" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute it at a rate of 20%. . Also, if the variation pattern is "super reach lost" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 40%, and to execute it at a rate of 60%. do.

FIG. 10-6 (I2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation degree announcement effect when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "big hit". In the execution/non-execution determination table 2 of the expectation level announcement performance, a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation level announcement performance is executed is assigned to each of the big win variation patterns. The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation degree announcement performance at a rate of 30% when the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), and executes it at a rate of 70%. to decide. In addition, when the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect at a rate of 10%, and to execute it at a rate of 90%. do.

Here, in the example of FIGS. 10 (H1) and (H2) where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, when the variation pattern of "normal reach" is selected, it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect. 10 (I1) and (I2) in which it was decided (“no execution” is 100%), but it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the “normal reach” variation pattern was selected. In this case, there is a possibility of deciding to execute the expectation level announcement effect ("executed" is 20% for "normal reach lost" and 70% for "normal reach big hit").

Also, in the example of FIGS. 10 (H1) and (H2) in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation level announcement effect when the "super reach" variation pattern is selected (" 10 (I1) and (I2) in which it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion production than 40% in "super reach out" and 80% in "super reach jackpot"), "super reach" When the variation pattern is selected, the ratio of execution of the expectation degree announcement effect is higher (60% for "super reach lost" and 90% for "super reach big hit"). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation degree announcement effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. .

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation level announcement effect (YES in step S16TM2130), the display result to stop display in the second mini-slot variable display described above and the second change Whether or not to execute an effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 10-6(J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, if it is decided not to execute the expectation level announcement effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the establishment combination of the expectation level advance notice effect, which is used when the first set suggestion effect is not executed. (step S16TM2150) and proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 10-7(L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the established combination determination table 2 of the expectation level advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 10-7(L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect, more specifically, the expectation level As a winning combination (hereinafter the same) of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the notice effect, "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", Any one of "cherry (freeze)", "7 matching", and "7 matching (freeze)" can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed case), the successful combination in the expectation level announcement effect is “lost” at a rate of 100%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is " CHANCE"), the successful role in the expectation level notice effect is "lost" at a rate of 5%, "suica" at a rate of 15%, and "suica (via replay)" at a rate of 50%. , 2% of the time it will be "cherry", 18% of the time it will be "cherry (via replay)", and 10% of the time it will be "cherry (freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "hot heat" (that is, when the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is 10% of the time, 15% of the time, “Watermelon (via replay)”, and 10% of the time, “Watermelon”. 38% of the time it is "Cherry (Via Replay)" and 27% of the time it is "Cherry (Freeze)".

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-7(L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, when the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is " FEVER"), the successful combination in the expectation degree announcement effect is "7 matching" at a rate of 30% and "7 matching (Freeze)" at a rate of 70%.

Note that in the present embodiment, the first mini-slot in the expectation level notice effect is determined depending on whether it is determined to execute the first set suggestion effect or when it is determined not to execute the first set suggestion effect. An example has been shown in which the winning combination of the variable display (that is, the winning combination other than "Bell") is determined based on different tables, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation degree announcement rendering (that is, the winning combination other than "Bell") is common between the case where it is determined and the case where it is determined not to execute the first set suggestion effect. may be determined based on a table of That is, whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect is determined at different ratios in steps S16TM2020 and S16TM2120 (based on the execution/non-execution determination table for different expectation level announcement effects), while steps S16TM2050 and S16TM2150 have a common winning combination. Based on the determination table, it is also possible to determine the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation degree announcement effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state (normal state), each time the variation display is executed, the first The mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and the established hand becomes "Bell" or "Loss". Then, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) is completed, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed during the variable display (expectation degree announcement effect is executed case) and (ii) a case where the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (a case where the expectation degree announcement effect is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation degree announcement effect is executed), the winning hand determined based on the winning hand determination table is established. Later, further, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is performed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a symbol that does not contain characters (“no display”) or (b) a character symbol (“CHANCE”, “hot heat”) , “FEVER”) stops. (b) When the character designs (“CHANCE”, “Gekiatsu”, “FEVER”) are stopped, a second change effect is executed in which character icons based on the character designs are added to the active display. Become.

Thus, in the above-described embodiment, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) a symbol that does not contain characters (“no display”) stops, that is, the second Even if the change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before that, and the effect configuration is adopted so that the winning combination always becomes "lost". . Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the pattern that does not contain characters ("no display") stops (when the second change effect is not executed) In addition, (i) first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that may have the possibility of establishing a winning combination other than "lost".

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) symbols that do not contain characters (“no display”) stop (when the second variation effect is not executed), (i) The first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 (in the 3-reel system), the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in the 1-reel system) A second minislot variable display (first time) may be performed.

Also, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (b) character symbols (“CHANCE”, “Gekiatsu”, and “FEVER”) may always be stopped. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) is performed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1, the second variation effect may be performed without fail. When such an effect configuration is adopted, (i) the winning combination of the first variable mini-slot display (second time) executed before the second variable mini-slot display (first time) is "lost". You can make it so that it does not.

Next, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is 25×n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 executes a second setting suggestion effect described later. Whether or not is decided based on the execution/non-execution decision table for the second setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 10-7(M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is not 25×n (where n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state, it is possible to execute the second setting suggestion effect as the effect of suggesting the currently set setting value. In this second setting suggestion effect, the variation count display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) on the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in purple at the timing when the variable display of the special symbols is started. It is a production that changes the mode. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the change count display 16TM040 displayed in purple at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the normal mode. back to

In FIG. 10-7(M), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the setting value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90% and decides to execute it at a rate of 10%. Further, when the set value is "2", it is determined not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88% and to execute it at a rate of 12%. Further, when the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and to execute it at a rate of 14%. Further, when the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84% and to execute it at a rate of 16%. Further, when the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and to execute it at a rate of 18%. Further, when the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and to execute it at a rate of 20%.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state, the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, and the expectation level notice effect are executed. Although an example is shown, it is not limited to such a form, and when the game state is either a low probability high base state, a high probability high base state, or a high probability low base state, the mini on the image display device 5 The slot 16TM030 may be displayed to execute any one of the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, or the degree of expectation announcement effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low-probability-low base state, the image display device 5 displays the change number display 16TM040 to execute the second setting suggestion effect. Regardless of the form, when the gaming state is any of the low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state, or high-probability-low base state, the image display device 5 displays the number of fluctuations 16TM040, and the second A setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, after determining whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed in step S16TM2000, it is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120 whether or not the expectation level announcement effect is to be executed, and further in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. We have decided the establishment role of the expectation notice production. When determining the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. , in this embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time).

In addition, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation degree announcement effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation level announcement effect. When the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), and normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is determined at a rate of 100% that "expectation degree notice effect is not executed". On the other hand, when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), it is determined that "execute the expectation level announcement effect" at a rate of 40%, and in the case of super reach jackpot (120 seconds) decides to "execute the expectation level announcement effect" at a rate of 80%.

Thus, regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the first setting suggestion effect can be executed, and regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 , [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] mini-slot symbols can be stopped and displayed. Further, when the variation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestive effect and the expectation level notice effect can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 can be executed. , and 5R1 stop displaying combinations of mini-slot symbols [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell]. Combinations of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.) can be stopped and displayed. According to such a configuration, in the mini-slot 16TM030, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, and also to execute the expectation level announcement effect that suggests the level of expectation that the display result will be a "big hit". As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(G), each time the first setting suggestion effect with different execution ratios depending on the set value is executed, the player himself/herself counts the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect. , the player himself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect [execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect = (the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect/the number of times of fluctuation) x 100], and the calculated first setting suggestion The player can guess the set value by determining to which set value of the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect for each well-known set value the execution ratio of the effect approximates.

Hypothetically, a configuration is adopted in which the determination of whether or not to execute the anticipation performance is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the first setting suggestion performance is to be performed, and the expectation level prediction performance is performed with priority over the first setting suggestion performance. In this case, the execution lottery for the first set suggestion effect is not performed due to the fact that the expectation level notice effect is decided to be executed and the variable time, or the lottery for the first set suggestion effect is won. However, there may be a case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed due to the expectation level advance notice effect being given priority. As a result, the degree of divergence between the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual setting value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for estimating the setting value is lowered, and there is a possibility that the player will not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in steps S16TM2000 and S16TM2020 of FIG. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed over the expectation degree announcement effect.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, FIG. 10-8 to FIG. 10 with regard to a specific example when it is decided to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first set suggestive effect, the second set suggestive effect, and the expectation level notice effect. -10 is used for explanation. FIG. 10-8 is a time chart when executing the first change effect, the second change effect, the first set suggestion effect, the second set suggestion effect, and the expectation degree announcement effect, and FIG. 10-9 and FIG. -10 shows an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when executing the first change effect, the second change effect, the first set suggestive effect, the second set suggestive effect, and the expectation level notice effect. It is an explanatory diagram.

10-8 to 10-10, when the CPU 103 performs the first start winning judgment process (S101A), the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting win becomes "big hit". This is an example when it is determined (when designated by a design designation command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to be red in step S16TM1010 in the change effect determination process at the time of start winning, and changes the active display in step S16TM1020. This is an example of a case where the pattern is determined to be the variation pattern 022 and the execution of the first variation effect of the success mode is determined.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the variation display is a "big hit" at the start of variation (designated by a display result designation command), and sets the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display to "super reach jackpot". (120 seconds)" (specified by the variation pattern command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first setting suggesting effect in step S16TM2000 in the effect determination process at the time of start of variation, and executes the expectation degree announcement effect in step S16TM2020. In step S16TM2040, it is decided to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be "super heat", and in step S16TM2050, it is decided to execute the second change effect, and in step S16TM2050, the degree of expectation notice effect is decided. This is an example of a case where it is decided to set the established hand to be "Cherry (Freeze)" and to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state, the display of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) Based on the fact that the result is "lost", the effect control CPU 120 determines when the variable display is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns ("247" in this example) is continuously displayed. Also, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing", the small symbol display area 5l of the image display device 5 and the small symbol display area 5c and the small pattern display area 5r, the combination of small patterns ("247" in this example) when the variable display is stopped is continuously displayed. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 to display four first reserved displays 16TM001 in response to the fact that the number of first reserved memories is four.

When in the low probability low base state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), in the image display device 5, the number of times the variable display is performed during the period of the low probability low base state (normal state) 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, after moving to the low probability low base state, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 124 times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), "124" etc. is displayed in a normal mode (white mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the mini- In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) is continuously displayed when the variable display is fixed and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, corresponding to the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3. Then, three first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 .

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Based on the decision to execute the second setting suggestion effect in S16TM2070, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, after moving to the low probability low base state, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (2), "125" etc. is displayed in purple. The player understands that the setting has been suggested by the fact that the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 has changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10 -8), the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000. The symbol variable display (first mini-slot variable display) is started. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10 -8), the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the change count display 16TM040 (characters such as "125") displayed in purple mode is returned to normal mode (white mode). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is continued, and in the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5, the mini-slot patterns are variable. continue to display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10 -8 timing of T4), in step S16TM1020 it is determined that the change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 022, and based on the fact that it is decided to execute the first change effect of the success mode, success The first change effect of the aspect is executed. In this example, a character 16TM050 appears and an effect is executed in which a ball is thrown toward the active display 16TM003. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 hits the active display 16TM003, the player can expect that the mode of the active display 16TM003 will change.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. , Continues variable display of mini-slot symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10 -8 timing of T5), according to the execution of the first change effect of the success mode, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, the white round display to the red round display). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Bell] [ [Bell] [Bell]) is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10 -8 timing of T6), based on the fact that it has been decided in step S16TM2050 that the establishment role of the expectation level announcement effect is to be "cherry (freeze)", the expectation level announcement effect is executed, and the image display device In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 of 5, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols in the freeze state is started. In this example, when the freeze-mode variable display is executed, a dark image 16TM100 is displayed as a covering image covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbols. In the difficult state, variable display (scroll display or update display) of mini-slot symbols from bottom to top is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In the present embodiment, by displaying the darkened image 16TM100 covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1 in order to reduce the visibility of the mini-slot symbols, the mini-slot image 16TM100 having a lower display priority than the darkened image 16TM100 is displayed. Although the slot pattern is difficult to see, it is slightly visible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%). A mini-slot symbol with a low display priority (an image whose display layer is lower and which can be seen behind the darkening image 16TM100 when viewed from the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkening image 16TM100 is 0). %).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10 -8 timing of T7), the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 is determined based on the fact that it is determined in step S16TM2050 that the combination of the expected degree of advance notice effect is to be "cherry (freeze)". , 5C1 and 5R1, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) when the winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 puts "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. is displayed in a stationary state, and characters "READY!!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display with the establishment of the ready-to-win state as a trigger. . That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the three-reel mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 to the one-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. In the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of one reel, any of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols (“no display”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, “FEVER”) can be displayed as a display result. When the result is a pattern ("CHANCE", "Geki-netsu", "FEVER") including the notice character, the icon of the notice character resulting in the display result is added to the active display based on the display result. A second change effect is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of mini-slot symbols in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (10), the effect control CPU 120 decides in step S16TM2040 to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be "rapid heat", that is, Based on the fact that the notice character of the expectation level notice performance is decided to be "hot heat", the pattern including the notice letter of "hot heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot picture display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (timing of T9 in FIG. 10-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (11), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the second change effect (stop display of the symbol including the notice character) in step S16TM2040. Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing of T10 in FIG. 10-8). In this example, when the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the "hot" symbol) stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is displayed from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. It moves to the active display area 16TM013, and an effect acting on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the symbol of "hot heat") jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the effect image is displayed. It suggests to the player that the aspect of the active display 16TM003 will change. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (12), a battle effect is executed according to the variation pattern of super reach. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 10-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes a character icon (in this example, a character icon of "rapid heat") based on the mini-slot symbol displayed stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 on the active display 16TM003. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. In other words, a character icon indicating the same character as the notice character (“rapid heat” in this example) resulting from the display is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 Then, a combination of mini-slot symbols ([Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry] in this example) in which the winning hand is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed (Fig. 10-9 (8)), followed by mini-slot symbol display. In the area 5LCR1, a mini-slot symbol ("Geki-netsu" in this example) as a notice character of the expectation level notice effect is stop-displayed (FIG. 10-10 (10)), and then stopped in the mini-slot-symbol display area 5LCR1. A second change effect is executed in which a character icon showing the same characters as the characters of the displayed mini-slot symbol (in this example, "rapid heat") is added to the active display 16TM003 (Fig. 10-10 (11) and (12). )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed according to the combination of the mini-slot symbols stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the 2-change effect can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, the first setting suggestion effect is ended before the battle effect executed according to the variation pattern of super reach is started. I'm trying That is, before the battle effect is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Bell][ Bell] [Bell]) is hidden. Thus, by executing the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value in the first half of the variable display (before the ready-to-reach state is established), that is, before the display result of the variable display is suggested, the first setting is performed. It is possible to increase interest in suggestive production. In addition, in the second half of the variable display (after the ready-to-win state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the variable display is indicated (after the battle effect that informs whether the display result will be a "big hit" is started) In this case, since the first setting suggestion effect has already ended, it is possible to draw attention to the display result of the variable display (the result of the battle effect).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (1), based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect, the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) in which the established hand is "lost", stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (6), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 are filled with A combination of mini-slot symbols with a winning combination of "Bell" (in this example, [Bell] [Bell] [Bell]) is stopped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (8), the mini-slot symbol display on the image display device 5 is based on the fact that it is decided to execute the expectation degree announcement effect and that the established hand is decided to be "Cherry". In areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1, a combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) in which the winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped. In this way, any one of a plurality of types of winning hands can be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot 16TM030. Interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (2) and (3), in the lower left area of the screen of the image display device 5 different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5), the number of fluctuations is displayed. A second setting suggestion effect is executed to change 16TM040 from a normal mode (white mode) to a purple mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is in the range of 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6). As shown in 10-7 (M), the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is in the range of 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6), so both effects are executed the same number of times. If it is assumed that the second setting suggestion effect is performed, it is easier to guess the set value than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6). Then, the set value corresponding to the effect execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the gaming machine. In addition, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6), and the former A set value corresponding to the closest effect execution ratio is guessed as a set value of the game machine. When such an estimation is made, the setting value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is higher than the setting value estimated based on the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. There is a high possibility that it is the setting value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery for the first setting suggestion effect is performed for each variable display, and the execution lottery for the second setting suggestion effect is performed for each 25 times of the variation display. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times within the same fluctuation display count (within the same time) than the second setting suggestion effect, which is useful for estimating the setting value. . In this way, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the setting value suggested by the effect is the setting value of the gaming machine at different rates, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided in the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, small pattern variable display is executed. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-9, in the special effect area 16TM035 (bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5), the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the first 2 Setting suggestion production is executed. In this way, in the upper part of the screen, the variable display of the small symbols is executed as an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, while in the lower part of the screen, the setting suggestion effect (the first setting suggestion effect, the second By executing the setting suggesting effect), one of the effects does not reduce the visibility of the other effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3(A), as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, there are a plurality of display modes such as a normal mode, a blue mode, and a red mode ( display color). Then, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (5), when the character 16TM050 appears and the action effect of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed, the display mode (display) of the active display 16TM003 color) is changed from a normal mode (white circular display) to a red mode (red circular display). In addition, the second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of variation, and based on the character symbol that is the display result, the icon of the character indicated by the character symbol is displayed. A second change effect added to the active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect that changes the display color of the active display according to the effect effect executed in a region different from the region where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the region where the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( By providing a plurality of types of change effects called a second change effect that changes the display shape of the active display according to the action effect based on the notice character displayed in the special effect area 16TM035), the interest when changing the active display is provided. can be further improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-10 (11) and (12), when the second change effect is executed, the mini-slot symbols stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 ("hot heat" in this example). , jumps out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and hits the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013. Specifically, after an effect image showing that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, “hot”) jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the mini-slot symbol display area is displayed. A character icon showing the same character as the character of the mini-slot symbol stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 are associated with each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (K) and (L), the winning combination of the expectation degree announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is "miss", "suika , "cherry", and "7 matching". Then, according to the determined winning hand, the selection ratio of which display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", "CHANCE", "great heat", or "FEVER". different. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is one of the character symbols "CHANCE", "Gekiatsu", and "FEVER", the mode of the character symbol, It matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, it is determined in which mode the character icon added to the active display 16TM003 will be in accordance with the winning combination of the expectation degree announcement effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. the proportions are different. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 are associated with each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of tally result of winning hand)
In this embodiment, during the demo display, the "volume adjustment" icon for adjusting the volume during the game, the "light amount adjustment" icon for adjusting the light amount during the game, the low probability low base state (normal state ) and the number of wins of each winning combination in the mini-slot 16TM030, a menu screen including a "mini reel information" icon, etc. is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, it is possible to select each icon of "volume control", "light amount control", and "mini reel information".

FIGS. 10-11 are displayed on the full screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of mini-reel information;

As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, characters "mini-reel information" are displayed. In addition, in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, the total number of variable display (variable display of special symbols) performed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) and the winning number of each winning combination in the mini-slot 16TM030 are displayed. , a selected tab 16TM210 displaying the characters "today", and a next selection tab 16TM220 displaying the characters "previous day" are displayed. Further, in the right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210 to prompt the user to operate the stick controller 31A. Further, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed along with the characters "return".

In the mini reel information 16TM200, at the top, the character "number of rotations" is displayed as an item indicating the number of times of variable display, and correspondingly, the cumulative total of variable displays executed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state) The number of times "XXXX times" is displayed. In the second row, the character "Bell" is displayed as an item indicating the bell of the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times "Bell" has been achieved as the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display is displayed as "AAAA". times”, and the probability of winning “Bell” “(1/aaaa.a)” [= Cumulative number of times “Bell” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the third row, characters "watermelon" are displayed as an item indicating watermelon as the winning combination, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times "watermelon" has been achieved as the winning combination in the first mini-slot variable display is displayed as "BBBB." times”, and the probability of winning “(1/bbbb.b)” of “Watermelon” [= Cumulative number of times “Watermelon” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability low base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the fourth row, the character "Cherry" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination "Cherry". times”, and the winning probability of “Cherry” “(1/cccc.c)” [= Cumulative number of times “Cherry” was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation display executed in low probability base state (normal state)] is displayed. In the fifth row, the character "777" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination of 7 matches. “DDDD times” and “7 matching” winning probability “(1/dddd.d)” [= Total number of times “7 matching” was established / Variable display executed in low probability low base state (normal state) Total count] is displayed.

In addition, the cumulative number of times (DDDD times) that "7 matching" has been won is the combination of mini-slot symbols that become "7 matching" in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of mini-slot 16TM030 (in this example, .

Also, each total number of times (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed with a maximum of four digits, and the count stops at "9999 times". Also, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed with a maximum of five digits including the first decimal place, and the count stops at "1/9999.9". For each winning combination, when the number of times of winning is one or more, the winning probability is displayed, and when the number of times of winning is 0, the probability of winning is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 stores history information (such as the above-described total number of times) related to the mini reel information, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the mini reel information as an image based on the stored history information. It can be displayed on the display device 5 . Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before last" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even when the power is turned off.

The mini-reel information is defaulted to the mini-reel information of "today", characters of "today" are displayed on the selected tab 16TM210, and characters of "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the user to operate the stick controller 31A. Each time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "the day before" to "the day before", and the selected tab 16TM210 is displayed. The text is switched from "the day before" to "the day before", and the text of the next selection tab 16TM220 is switched from "the day before" to "today". When the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A is operated while the mini-reel information of "two days ago" is selected, the mini-reel information of "today" is selected again, and the characters of the selected tab 16TM210 are displayed. is changed to "today", and the characters of the next selection tab 16TM220 are changed to "the previous day".

When the gaming machine is powered on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to, and if the date of the previous power-on is different from the date of the current power-on, the history information of "previous day" is changed to " After storing (overwriting history information) in the storage area corresponding to "two days ago", store the history information of "today" in the storage area corresponding to "the day before" (overwriting history information) and update the data . As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business on "today", based on the updated history information of "the day before" and "the day before" stored in the backup storage area, "the day before" and "the day before" Everyday” mini reel information can be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters "Return". When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 16TM280 is being displayed, the display of the mini-reel information ends and the menu screen returns.

As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, the backed up "today", " The image display device 5 displays the mini-reel information based on the history information of "the day before" and "the day before the day before". Then, in the mini-reel information 16TM200, it is the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, and is the winning probability of "Bell" "(1/aaaa.a)" [= Cumulative number of times "Bell" has been established / low probability low base Cumulative number of variable display executed in the state (normal state)] is displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the player counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the player himself/herself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect, and the calculated first setting suggestion effect is calculated. The setting value can be estimated by determining which setting value of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each known setting value the execution ratio approximates. However, when the player himself counts the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect, the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect may be erroneously counted. In this embodiment, during the demo display, the player can confirm the execution probability of the first setting suggestive effect (the winning probability of "Bell") in the mini-reel information by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Since it is possible, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestive effect is erroneously counted, the correct execution probability of the first set suggestive effect can be easily grasped.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect were effects suggesting the currently set setting value, but the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect , It can be said that it is a production that suggests that the setting has been changed. For example, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is close to the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is close to the setting value. 2, it is difficult for the player to estimate the actual setting value when the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to 2 is approximate. However, in such a situation, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the mini-reel information of “the day before” and “the day before the day before” are both the execution ratios of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the set value 1 (well-known execution ratio), the player can at least guess that there is a high possibility that the set value has been changed. That is, it can be inferred that the set value of "the day before" and "the day before last" is set to 1, and since there is a high possibility that the set value of "today" has been changed, the current set value is at least a set value of 2 or more.

Note that the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects that are executed at different rates depending on whether or not the setting value is changed on the day. For example, if the set value is changed on the day, the setting suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the set value is not changed on the day.

Also, the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects that are executed at different rates according to the set value. For example, an effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Also, the setting suggesting effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) may be effects in which the effect mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while when the set value is 3 or more. Alternatively, the display color of the setting suggestion rendering may be determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of "lost" < "watermelon" < "cherry" < "7 matching". Although an example has been shown, it is not limited to such a form, and the degree of expectation of a specific jackpot type may be varied according to the established hand. For example, the degree of expectation that the type of jackpot will be a variable probability jackpot differs depending on the established combination, and the degree of expectation may be increased in the order of "lost"<"watermelon"<"cherry"<"7 sets".

(3) In the above-described embodiment, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "lost" is executed. However, not limited to this, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "lost" is executed. (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself may not be performed.

When such an effect configuration is adopted, (ii) when the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (a) When it is decided to execute the expectation level announcement effect, the first mini-slot variable display related to the expectation level announcement effect is executed, and the establishment role other than "bell" (including "failure") is selected as the establishment role. After establishment, the second mini-slot variable display relating to the expectation level advance notice effect is executed. On the other hand, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (ii) if the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed, (b) it is decided not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect. Sometimes, neither the first mini-slot variable display nor the second mini-slot variable display will be performed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini-reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini-reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. An example has been shown in which the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5, but the mini-reel information may be displayed during a period other than the demonstration display. For example, during the period of the jackpot game state including the fanfare period and the ending period, or during the period of the variable display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect. In addition, the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified without requiring an operation. The execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed when the period ends.

(5) In the above embodiment, the example in which the mini-reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 is shown. Also good. For example, in a game machine equipped with a sub-image display device that displays various effect images different from the image display device 5, mini-reel information is displayed on the sub-image display device during demo display, during a jackpot game state, or during variable display. You can

(6) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the second change effect is the effect of changing the display mode of the active display. It may be an effect that changes the display mode. For example, according to the display result (character pattern) of the second mini-slot variable display, the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display that has not been executed (the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice) is executed. A second change effect may be executed in which a character icon based on the display result of the mini-slot variable display is added to the pending display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. In this way, the display result suggested by the second mini-slot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display that is being executed, and may be the display result of the variable display that is not being executed. Further, the target of the corresponding information to be changed by the second change effect is not limited to the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display being executed (active display), but also the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display not being executed (holding display). may be

(7) In the above embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels) is performed twice (the first winning combination is "Bell" or "Loss"). , and the second winning hand is other than "Bell"), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mini-slot variable display may be performed three times or more. For example, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display is executed twice, and the expectation level based on the decision to execute the expectation level announcement effect The first mini-slot variable display regarding the advance notice effect may be performed twice, and the second mini-slot variable display regarding the degree of expectation notice effect may be performed. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed a total of four times, after the first winning hand is set to "miss", the second winning hand is set to "Bell" (first setting suggestion effect), and the third time is performed. It is possible to set the winning hand of the fourth time to be "cherry" after the winning hand of the fourth time is set to "watermelon".

(8) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the second mini-slot variable display is executed only once based on the decision to execute the expectation degree announcement effect. 2 minislot variable display may be performed more than once. For example, after the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is "CHANCE", the display result of the second mini-slot variable display may be "rapid heat". In this way, when the second mini-slot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that a display result with a high degree of expectation is not followed by a display result with a low degree of expectation, The downfall of notice characters shall be restricted.

In addition, the second change effect may be executed multiple times in response to the fact that the second mini-slot variable display is executed multiple times. For example, based on the display result of the first variable mini-slot display being "CHANCE", the character icon of "CHANCE" is displayed superimposed on the active display, and then the display result of the second variable mini-slot display. becomes "extreme heat", the character icon "extreme heat" may be superimposed on the active display instead of the character icon "CHANCE". In this way, when the second change effect is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so as not to change from a display mode with high expectation to a display mode with low expectation, and the active display is performed. It shall limit the downfall of the display mode.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode was exemplified as a special mode of variable display of the mini-slot symbols. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the above-described freeze mode, a mode in which the speed at which mini-slot symbols are variably displayed (the speed of scrolling) is extremely faster or slower than in the normal mode may be provided. A mode may be provided in which the mini-slot symbols to be played are enlarged (for example, 200% of the normal mode). Furthermore, the ratio of winning hands may differ according to the type of special mode. For example, in the second special mode (freeze mode) than in the first special mode (the mode in which the mini-slot symbols are enlarged), the winning hand for the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is "cherry" or "7 matching". You may make it the ratio which becomes high.

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display times) of mini-slot symbols may be provided. For example, as variable display patterns of mini-slot symbols, a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, according to the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbols, the winning hand may be determined at different ratios. For example, in the case of a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of winning wins "Cherry" or "7 matching" is higher than in the case of a variable display pattern with a variable display time of 3.5 seconds. may be higher.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, at the timing when the combination of mini-slot symbols is stop-displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (when the winning hand is established), the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a manner corresponding to the winning hand. Effect images may be displayed in the display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. For example, when "Replay" is established as a successful role, a blue effect image is displayed, and when "Bell" is established as a successful role, a yellow effect image is displayed, and "Watermelon" is established as a successful role. , a green effect image is displayed, and if "cherry" is established as a winning hand, a red effect image is displayed, and if "7 matching" is established as a winning hand, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed. good.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 stop and display "7 matching" as a winning combination to notify that the big win is confirmed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , "BAR COMPLETE" may be stop-displayed as a winning combination to notify that the big win is confirmed. Stopping display of "all BARs" as an established combination means stopping display of the combination of [BAR][BAR][BAR] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1 and 5R1. Further, it may be configured such that when "7 matching" is established, the probability variable big win is decided, and when "BAR matching" is established, the normal big win is decided.

(13) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbols does not depend on whether or not the variable display of the special symbols is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed), and Although an example of information that can be displayed regardless of the number of reserved memories has been shown, the mini-slot 16TM030 may be hidden during a predetermined period without being limited to such a form. For example, the mini-slot 16TM030 may be hidden during the period in which the super reach effect is being executed.

(14) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is not established multiple times during one time of variable display of special symbols, except for "lost". It is not limited to such a form, and during one time of variable display of the special symbol, the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) other than "lost" may be established a plurality of times. In the case of adopting such a configuration, if the total number of times that a winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established is included in the total number of It becomes extremely difficult to grasp the most important information in estimating the set value, such as whether the winning hand [Bell] was established corresponding to It may decrease and the player may not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, even if the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established a plurality of times during the variable display of one special symbol, the same winning combination is displayed during this variable display. The cumulative number of times is counted, with the number of times that the condition is established as 1 time. For example, even if the winning combination of "Bell" is established three times during the variable display of one special symbol, the number of times that the winning combination of "Bell" is established during this variable display is considered to be one, and the mini reel is used. 1 is added to the total number of times "Bell" of the information 16TM200 has been won.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. (e.g., set values such as 5, 6, etc., which are particularly advantageous for the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from that for other set values. For example, if the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestion mode (eg purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. When the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, gold mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value. Regarding whether or not to use the first setting suggestion mode, a lottery is performed at a rate of 1 out of 25 times as described above. A separate lottery may be conducted once in each round. Then, when it is determined to be the second setting suggestion mode, regardless of whether or not it is determined to be the first setting suggestion mode, the change number display 16TM040 is changed to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, the gold mode ).

(16) In the above-described embodiment, in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is set in common. Not limited to this, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may differ according to the variation pattern (variation time). For example, a variation pattern with a long variation time is better than a variation pattern with a short variation time. , the first setting suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate.

(17) In the above embodiment, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is executed at the bottom center of the screen, and the display result suggests the set value. The set value may be suggested by another effect executed in response to the variable display of the pattern. For example, an effect may be executed in which one of a plurality of types of characters appears in response to the variable display of the mini-slot symbols, and the set value may be suggested by the type of the character that has appeared.

Incidentally, the variable display of the mini-slot symbols and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the mini-slot symbols may be performed in a region different from the central lower portion of the screen. For example, it may be executed in a region that is the right end or left end of the screen and does not overlap (does not overlap) the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5 is used. may be executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, the effects that affect the pending display and the effects that affect the active display are displayed in the lower center portion of the screen (see FIG. 10-10 (11)) or the lower right portion (FIG. 10-9 (5)). ), but these renditions may be performed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in a region that is the right end or left end of the screen and does not overlap (does not overlap) the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5 is used. may be executed.

(19) In the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation degree announcement effect by the variable display of the mini-slot symbols are shown as an example in which the low-probability-low base state (normal state) is executed, but not limited to this, It may be executed in a high-probability high base state or a high-probability low base state (KT control that tends to be a small hit than the normal state).

In such an effect configuration, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect (percentage of “bell” as the established hand) is number of times) to (percentage of the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect in the game state (the number of times the established hand is "Bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot pattern)]. When the variable display of the mini-slot pattern is executed, [(Number of times that the mini-slot pattern variable display executed in the high probability base state has become a "bell") ÷ (high probability base The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated, and the setting value is suggested by the calculated value.In addition, the high probability low base state (KT state ), when variable display of mini-slot symbols is performed, [(Number of times the winning hand is “Bell” in variable display of mini-slot symbols performed in the high-probability-low base state (KT state)) ÷ (The number of variable display times of decorative symbols (special symbols) executed in the high-probability-low base state (KT state))], the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated, and the calculated value suggests the setting value.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set, and the set value before and after the setting change can be set. Gaming machines that display character images have been proposed. As for a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), there is room for improving the entertainment of the presentation. The following configurations related to means A1 to means A10 and configurations related to means B1 to means B10 have been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and a game that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values The purpose is to improve the interest of the production related to the machine. The configuration of the following means A1 to A10 and the configuration of the means B1 to B10 are specifically described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM].

The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) of means A1 is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The display means provides a special display corresponding to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of control of the advantageous state (a winning hand is "Bell"). "Watermelon", "Cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 matching", "No display", "CHANCE", "Extreme heat", or "FEVER" symbols) can be displayed,
When the variable display period is a predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (if the variation pattern (variation time) is non-reach loss (10 seconds), normal reach loss (30 seconds), or normal reach big hit (30 seconds), It is possible to stop display the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell"), and when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period, the specific display can be displayed after the special display is displayed. (If the variation pattern (variation time) is Super Reach Lost (120 seconds) or Super Reach Big Hit (120 seconds), after stopping the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell", the winning hand is " A combination of mini-slot symbols of "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 matching" is stopped and displayed, and symbols of "no display", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", or "FEVER" are stopped and displayed. is possible).
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display the special display with priority over the specific display, it is possible to improve interest in setting suggestions.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the effect control means displays the special display at a different rate according to the set value. (Step S16TM2000) determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display, and as shown in FIG. The execution ratio of the suggestion production is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to guess the set value when the variable display is performed.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the effect control means displays the special display at a different rate according to the set value. After making this decision, it decides whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is decided whether or not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A3,
The display means (the effect control CPU 120, the image display device 5) displays the special display (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") when the specific effect (battle effect in Super Reach) is executed. It is characterized by being hidden.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (production control CPU 120, image display device 5) variably displays information (mini-slot design variable display), and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell") or the specific display (the winning hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that result in 7 matching”, or a character symbol of “CHANCE”, “Fever”, or “FEVER”), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols that makes the winning hand “miss”, or , “no display” pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation executed in the specific area of the display means.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in specific areas (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the aspect of the variable display executed in the specific area becomes a special aspect (freeze aspect), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special aspect (freeze aspect) does not occur. High (as shown in FIG. 10-7(K), when the mini-slot symbols perform the variable display of the freeze mode, the established hand is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 matching (freeze)", and "cherry" Since the above winning combination (“cherry” or “7 matching”) is confirmed, the degree of expectation that the mini-slot symbols will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a normal mode.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means by changing the variable display mode to a special mode.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6,
There are multiple types of specific indications ("watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are available as established roles, and "no indication", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" are available as display results). ),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of “7 matching”)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in the type of specific display.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7,
a storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (accumulated number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell" has been stopped and displayed);
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information about the display history (the history display means (image display device 5 for displaying mini-reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying the winning probability of "Bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information about the display history of the special display in order to guess the set value.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8,
The display means (production control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) that suggests a set value in a special area (bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5),
The rate at which the special display is displayed differs from the rate at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is performed by drawing lots for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times The execution lottery is performed for each fluctuation display),
The ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the game machine differs from the ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the game machine (Fig. 10-6 As shown in (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas as shown in FIG. 10-7 (M) In addition, since the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6), the actual effect execution ratio between the first set suggestion effect and the second set suggestion effect The ratio of matching the setting value estimated based on the game machine setting value is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested setting value to the setting value of the gaming machine differs depending on whether the special display is a special display or not. You can draw attention to what is suggested.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A9,
The variable display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display of the first decoration identification information (variation display of the decoration pattern) in the first regions (the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the center of the screen). , the variable display (variable display of small patterns) of the second decoration identification information whose visibility is lower than that of the first decoration identification information can be executed in the second area (small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r in the upper right part of the screen). can be,
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of displaying at least one of the special display and the specific display in the first area (mini-slot patterns are displayed in the mini-reel design display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 at the bottom center of the screen). combination is displayed), and the display of the special display and the specific display in the second area is restricted (mini-slot symbols are not displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the visibility of the variable display of the second decoration identification information in the second area.

The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) of means B1 is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
Advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5),
The display means provides a special display corresponding to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means (a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of control of the advantageous state (a winning hand is "Bell"). "Watermelon", "Cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 matching", "No display", "CHANCE", "Extreme heat", or "FEVER" symbols) can be displayed in a specific area. ,
Corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 where the specific display is displayed in the specific area (as shown in FIG. 10-9(8), a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "Cherry" is displayed. After the stop display, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (10), the character pattern of "hot heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot pattern display area 5LCR1. change effect (as shown in FIGS. 10-10 (11) and (12), a second change effect of adding a character icon indicating the same character as the mini-slot symbol character (“hot heat”) to the active display 16TM030) and effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion, a change effect can be executed in response to the specific display being displayed in the specific area. can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
There are multiple types of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) as modes of the corresponding display (active display),
The game machine, wherein the effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect (first change effect) for changing the special mode of the corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the display corresponding to the special mode will change.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute an effect acting on a corresponding display (active display) to be subjected to the change effect as the change effect (second change effect) (Fig. 10-10 As shown in (11) and (12), an effect indicating that the mini-slot symbol ("Geki-netsu") stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003. After the image is displayed, a character icon showing the same character as the character ("Geki-netsu") of the mini-slot symbol displayed stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the changing presentation.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine of means B1 to means B3,
There are a plurality of types of the specific display ("missing", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 matching" are available as the establishment combination of the first variable mini-slot display, and the display result of the second variable mini-slot display is " No display”, “CHANCE”, “hot”, “FEVER”),
Depending on the type of the specific display, the aspect of the corresponding display to be the target of the change effect is determined at a different rate (as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (K) and (L), the first The winning hand for the variable display of the mini-slots of 1 is determined to be any one of "miss", "watermelon", "cherry", and "seven matching", and depending on which winning hand is determined, the second mini-slot is selected. The display result of the variable display is different from the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, and the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is different. Since it matches the form of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, it is added to the active display 16TM003 according to which hand is determined to establish the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation level announcement effect. The ratio of which character icon mode will be different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the type of specific display and the mode of corresponding display can be associated with each other, and the entertainment of the presentation can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
When the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) performs variable display (variable display), the effect control means displays the special display at a different rate according to the set value. After making this decision, it decides whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation degree announcement effect)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after determining whether or not to display the special display, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (production control CPU 120, image display device 5) variably displays information (mini-slot design variable display), and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell") or the specific display (the winning hand is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that result in 7 matching”, or a character symbol of “CHANCE”, “Fever”, or “FEVER”), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols that makes the winning hand “miss”, or , “no display” pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation executed in the specific area of the display means.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The display means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing variable display of information different from the decoration identification information (variable display of mini-slot symbols) in specific areas (mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the aspect of the variable display executed in the specific area becomes a special aspect (freeze aspect), the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special aspect (freeze aspect) does not occur. High (as shown in FIG. 10-7(K), when the mini-slot symbols perform the variable display of the freeze mode, the established hand is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 matching (freeze)", and "cherry" Since the above winning combination (“cherry” or “7 matching”) is confirmed, the degree of expectation that the mini-slot symbols will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a normal mode.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display means by changing the variable display mode to a special mode.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7,
There are multiple types of specific indications ("watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are available as established roles, and "no indication", "CHANCE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" are available as display results). ),
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 10-7 (K), the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of “7 matching”)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in the type of specific display.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8,
a storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (accumulated number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols in which the winning hand is "bell" has been stopped and displayed);
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information about the display history (the history display means (image display device 5 for displaying mini-reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying the winning probability of "Bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information about the display history of the special display in order to guess the set value.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B9,
The display means (production control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) that suggests a set value in a special area (bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5),
The rate at which the special display is displayed differs from the rate at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is performed by drawing lots for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times Execution lottery is performed for each change display),
The ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the game machine differs from the ratio of the setting value suggested by the special display corresponding to the setting value of the game machine (Fig. 10-6 As shown in (G), the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas as shown in FIG. 10-7 (M) In addition, since the execution ratio of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (set value 1) to 20% (set value 6), the actual effect execution ratio between the first set suggestion effect and the second set suggestion effect The ratio of the setting value estimated based on the match with the setting value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested setting value to the setting value of the gaming machine differs depending on whether the special display is a special display or not. You can draw attention to what is suggested.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 04TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 04TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-6. In the gaming machine shown in [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM] described above, as shown in FIGS. A variation number display 16TM040 indicating the value of a variation number counter that counts the number of variations displayed is displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 . The value indicated by the variable count display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variable displays executed in the normal state. In addition, the change number display 16TM040 changes from a normal mode (eg, white mode) to a setting suggestion mode different from the normal mode (eg, purple mode) by executing the second setting suggestion effect based on the setting value of the gaming machine. It changes to

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shown in [Description of Characteristic Portion 04TM], the change count display 16TM040 is not displayed in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and the second display based on the change count display 16TM040 is displayed. It is assumed that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first setting suggesting effect is executed in the same manner as the gaming machine shown in [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM], and the third setting suggesting effect different from the second setting suggesting effect is executed. shall be carried out.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment as well, similarly to the gaming machine shown in [Description of Characteristic Portion 16TM], it is possible to display the change count display 16TM040 and to execute the second setting suggestion effect. That is, in addition to the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect, a third setting suggesting effect, which will be described later, may be executed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the first reserved storage number (first reserved display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. A first pending display area 16TM011 is provided, and an active display area 16TM013 is provided in the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5 to display an active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state (normal state), a mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5 and below the active display 16TM003. is displayed. In this example, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini-slot 16TM030 as if it were the base of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at the position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily understand that the mini-slot 16TM030 will execute an effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. can be done.

In this embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not variable display of special symbols is being executed (whether or not variable display of decorative symbols is being executed), and regardless of the number of pending memories. information.

When the first reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a number of first reserved displays 16TM001 corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 16TM011. That is, in the first pending display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning port) is established, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game state is controlled). and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) is. When a plurality of first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011, the first reserved displays 16TM001 correspond to the first reserved displays 16TM001 in the order close to the active display areas 16TM013 (in order from the right as seen from the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays an active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 indicates that after the starting condition (for example, winning the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port) is satisfied, the starting condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game It is information corresponding to the variable display of the special design (and the variable display of the decorative design) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the upper central area of the image display device 5, in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable and static manner, is arranged from left to right in a pattern display area 5L, a pattern display area 5C, and a pattern display area 5C. A pattern display area 5R is assumed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the special symbols, which are smaller than the decoration symbols displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5, fluctuate. A symbol indicating whether or not it is displayed and the display result of the special symbol is called a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, the small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, the small pattern display area are selected from the left in the upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small patterns corresponding to the first special pattern are variably displayed and stopped. 5r. The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), in the present embodiment, when it is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state), the mini slot in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A2), mini-slot symbols of "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "7", and "Blank" is variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variably displayed, as shown in FIG. Mini-slot symbols of "CHANCE", "Geki-netsu", and "FEVER", which are symbols made up of notice characters, are variably displayed. For details of the first mini-slot variable display and the second mini-slot variable display, refer to (first mini-slot variable display) and (second mini-slot variable display) in [Description of characteristic portion 16TM] described above. ), the description is omitted in this embodiment.

(Production decision processing at the time of fluctuation start)
FIG. 11-1 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-1 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 11-1.

Note that steps S16TM2000 to S16TM2050 and steps S16TM2120 to S16TM2150 shown in FIG. 11-1 correspond to steps S16TM2000 to S16TM2050 and steps S16TM2120 to S16TM2150 shown in the above-described effect determination process at the start of fluctuation in FIG. , so the description is omitted here, and the processing after step S04TM2060 will be described.

Effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern accompanied by super reach (“loss in super reach” or “big hit in super reach”) (step S04TM2060). If the variation pattern is not a variation pattern that accompanies super reach (NO in step S04TM2060), the process ends.

If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that accompanies super reach (YES in step S04TM2060), that is, if a super reach effect (battle effect) is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 generates an advance notice effect corresponding to the super reach effect. (step S04TM2065).

FIG. 11-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the expectation level suggesting effect and the mode of effect. In the table for determining whether or not to execute the expectation degree suggesting effect and the effect mode, determination values for determining whether to execute the expectation level suggesting effect and the effect mode are assigned according to the display result.

If the display result is "missing" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the expectation level suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 70% (stars during the development of super reach) is not displayed), and at a rate of 20%, decides to execute the first mode of expectation suggestion production in which one star is displayed at the time of super reach development, and at a rate of 8%, super reach It is decided to execute the second mode of expectation suggesting performance in which two stars are displayed at the time of development, and at a rate of 2%, the third mode of expectation suggesting performance in which three stars are displayed at the time of super reach development. decide to carry out

If the display result is a "jackpot" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), the expectation suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 50% (stars during the development of super reach) is not displayed), and at a rate of 10%, decides to execute the first mode of expectation suggestion production in which one star is displayed at the time of super reach development, and at a rate of 15%, super reach It is decided to execute the second mode of expectation suggesting performance in which two stars are displayed at the time of development, and at a rate of 25%, the third mode of expectation suggesting performance in which three stars are displayed at the time of super reach development. decide to carry out

In this way, the ratio of execution of the expectation level suggesting effect when the display result is "big hit" is 50%, whereas the expectation level suggesting effect is executed when the display result is "loss". 30%. When the expectation degree suggesting performance is executed, the ratio of winning big wins is higher than when the expectation degree suggesting performance is not executed, so the player is asked whether the expectation degree suggesting performance is executed when the super reach is developed. I would be interested in no.

In addition, the ratio of occurrence of a big hit differs depending on the mode of performance when the expectation level suggesting performance is executed. In this embodiment, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit when the expectation level suggesting effect is executed is the highest when the expectation level suggesting effect is executed in the third mode (three stars), and the expectation level suggesting effect is executed in the third mode. It is the second highest when executed in the 2nd mode (2 stars), and is the lowest when the expectation suggesting effect is executed in the 1st mode (1 star). Therefore, the player pays attention to how the expectation level suggesting effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a timer effect, which will be described later, based on a table (see FIG. 11-2(B)) for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect (step S04TM2070). The timer effect in the present embodiment is a effect that suggests (informs) that a super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) develops, and is also an effect that suggests that an expectation level suggesting effect, which will be described later, will be executed. In the timer effect, the timer is displayed in a countdown manner from 10 seconds remaining, and when the timer becomes 0 seconds remaining, a super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) develops. In addition, there is a case where the expectation suggesting effect is executed at the timing when the remaining time of the timer becomes 0 second.

FIG. 11-2(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a table for determining whether or not to execute a timer effect. In the table for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect is assigned according to the display result.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(B), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the timer is set at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to execute the effect, and to execute the timer effect at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is a "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the timer effect at a rate of 40%, It is decided to execute the timer effect at a rate of 60%.

In this way, the ratio of executing the timer effect when the display result is "big win" is 60%, whereas the ratio of executing the timer effect when the display result is "lost" is 20%. %. When the timer performance is executed, the ratio of winning big wins is higher than when the timer performance is not executed, so the players are interested in whether the timer performance is executed or not.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result is a "big hit" (step S04TM2080). If the display result is a "big hit" (YES at step S04TM2080), effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 04TM2090, and if the display result is "loss" (NO at step S04TM2080), effect control CPU 120 , the process proceeds to step 04TM2100.

If the display result is a "big hit" (YES in step S04TM2080), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in notice effect and the effect mode, which will be described later. table (see FIG. 11-2(C)) (step S04TM2090), and the process ends.

FIG. 11-2(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in announcement effect and the mode of effect. In the table for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode, determination values for determining whether to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode are assigned.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), cut at a rate of 40% Decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect, decided to execute the cut-in notice effect of blue mode (characters of "chance" on the blue background image) at a rate of 10%, and red mode at a rate of 15% It was decided to execute a cut-in notice effect (characters of "great chance" on a red background image), and a cut-in notice of a gold mode (characters of "great heat" on a gold background image) at a rate of 35% Decide to perform the performance.

If the display result is "no" (NO in step S04TM2080), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cut-in suggestion effect (an example of a third setting suggestion effect) is executed and the effect mode of the cut-in suggestion effect. A determination is made based on the table (see FIG. 11-2(D)) for determining the presence/absence of execution and the mode of presentation (step S04TM2100), and the process ends.

FIG. 11-2(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute cut-in suggesting effects and the mode of effects. In the table for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in suggesting performance and the mode of performance, determination values for determining whether to execute the cut-in suggesting performance and the mode of performance are assigned according to the set values.

If the setting value is one of "1", "2", and "3" (that is, if the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "1", "2", "3"), the effect control CPU 120 ), 60% of the time, it is decided not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect, and 30% of the time, it is decided to not perform the cut-in suggestion, and 30% of the time, it is a blue mode (“chance” text on a blue background image). It is decided to execute the effect, and it is decided to execute the cut-in suggesting effect in a red mode (characters of "great chance" on a red background image) at a rate of 10%.

If the setting value is one of "4", "5", and "6", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "4", "5", or "6". ), 55% of the time, it is decided not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect, and 30% of the time, it is decided to not perform the cut-in suggestion, and 30% of the time, the blue mode (“chance” text on the blue background image) is suggested. Decided to execute the production, decided to execute the cut-in suggestion production of red mode (characters of "great chance" on the red background image) at a rate of 10%, and gold mode at a rate of 5% ( It is decided to execute a cut-in suggestive effect of a golden background image with the letters “hot”).

When the set value is one of "1", "2" and "3" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is one of "1", "2" and "3") ), the rate at which the gold mode cut-in suggesting effect is executed (the gold mode cut-in image 04TM100C described later is displayed) is 0%. On the other hand, if the setting value is one of "4", "5", and "6" (i.e., if the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is any of "4", "5", or "6") ), the rate at which the gold mode cut-in suggestion effect is executed (the gold mode cut-in image 04TM100C is displayed) is 5%.

Therefore, the gold mode cut-in suggestion rendering in which the gold mode cut-in image 04TM100C is displayed has a set value of "4", "5", or "6" (that is, the setting designated by the set value designation command). The effect is to suggest (notify) that the value is "4", "5" or "6"). In particular, in this example, it is determined that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", or "6" (high set value) by executing the cut-in suggesting effect in the golden mode. do. Thus, the cut-in suggestion effect is a high setting suggestion effect that suggests (informs) that the set value is the high set value.

In this example, there is no setting difference between the execution ratio of the cut-in suggestion effect in the blue mode and the execution ratio of the cut-in suggestion effect in the red mode. A set difference may be provided between the execution ratio of the in-suggesting effect and the execution ratio of the cut-in suggesting effect in the red mode. For example, the cut-in suggesting effect in the blue mode is a effect that suggests that the set value is an odd number (the set value is one of "1", "3", or "5"), and the cut-in in the red mode is performed. The in-suggestion effect may be an effect that suggests that the set value is an even number (the set value is one of "2", "4", and "6"). Thus, the cut-in suggesting effect may be an even-odd suggesting effect suggesting whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(C), the cut-in notice effect is an effect that is executed only when the display result is a "big hit". The result is always a "big hit". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-2(D), the cut-in suggestion effect is a effect that is executed only when the display result is "missing", so when the cut-in suggestion effect is executed The display result is always "off".

However, in the present embodiment, regarding the cut-in notice effect in the blue mode and the cut-in suggestion effect in the blue mode, both are effects in which the characters "chance" are displayed on the blue background image, and the common effect mode and It's becoming In addition, the cut-in notice effect in the red mode and the cut-in suggestion effect in the red mode are both effects in which the characters "great chance" are displayed on the background image in red, and are a common effect mode. In addition, the gold-mode cut-in notice effect and the gold-mode cut-in suggestive effect are both effects in which the characters "hot" are displayed on a gold background image, and are a common effect mode. Since the cut-in notice effect and the cut-in suggestion effect have the same effect mode (blue mode, red mode, gold mode) that may be selected, the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in suggestion effect is executed. The player recognizes which of the cut-in notice effect and the cut-in suggestion effect is being executed during the period (period before the timing when the display result is notified by stop-displaying the decoration pattern). is difficult. In addition, during the period when the cut-in notice effect or cut-in suggestion effect is being executed (the period before the timing when the display result is notified by stopping display of the decorative pattern), the display result will be "missing" or " It is difficult to grasp whether it will be a "big hit". Therefore, even if the cut-in notice performance is a performance corresponding to "big hit" and the cut-in suggesting performance is a performance corresponding to "lose", the interest in the game is not lowered.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, when the variation pattern of the variable display of decorative symbols to be executed is super ready-to-win, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the expectation suggesting effect and the effect mode in step S04TM2065. Regardless of the determination result, it is decided in step S04TM2100 whether or not to execute the cut-in suggestion effect and the effect mode. In this way, whether or not the expectation degree suggesting effect is executed and the mode of effect suggesting the display result (whether or not a big hit will occur), and whether or not the cut-in suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect) is executed and By independently determining the performance modes, the information suggested by the performance is clarified, and the player's interest in the performance is enhanced.

Here, the judgment random number (random number for expectation degree suggestion effect) used in the judgment process of step S04TM2065 for determining whether or not the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode, and the cut Since the random numbers for judgment (random numbers for cut-in suggestion effect) for determining whether or not to execute the in-suggestion effect and the effect mode (random number for cut-in suggestion effect) are mutually independent random numbers, the result of determination of one effect is the result of determination of the other effect. does not affect

That is, the decision regarding the expectation level suggesting effect does not affect the decision of the cut-in suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect), and the decision regarding the cut-in suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect) does not affect the expectation level suggesting effect. It does not affect the decisions of The relationship between the expectation level suggesting effect and the first setting suggesting effect (step S16TM2000) is the same as the relationship between the expectation level suggesting effect and the cut-in suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect). As a result, it is possible to prevent the information suggested by the presentation from becoming unclear. In addition, when changing specifications such as changing the probability of a big win, it is possible to prevent excessively complicated debugging in terms of performance associated with the change in specifications.

(Battle production)
In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving super reach ("super reach failure", "super reach big hit"), after the reach state is established, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed as a super reach effect. A battle effect is executed to inform whether or not a big hit is won. Therefore, it is possible to execute a battle effect as an advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display being executed (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied) will result in a big win. That is, the battle effect is an example of an advance notice effect suggesting that the game is controlled to an advantageous state for the player.

Then, when the final display result is "lost", an effect (battle effect [defeat]) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. When the final display result is a "big win", an effect (battle effect [victory]) in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed.

(Suggestion of expectations)
The expectation indication production is a notice production corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with super reach ("super reach failure", "super reach big hit"), and after the reach state is established, the timing when it develops into super reach (battle production It is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by the number of stars displayed at the timing of execution). Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, after the ready-to-win state is established, at the timing when the super-reach state develops (the timing when the battle effect is executed), the expectation suggesting effect is executed. There is a case (when 1 to 3 stars are displayed) and a case when the expectation suggesting effect is not executed (no stars are displayed).

(timer effect)
The timer effect is a effect that corresponds to the battle effect (super reach), which is a type of advance notice effect that suggests the display result, and displays (notifies) the remaining time (seconds) until the battle effect is executed. is. Also, as described above, since the expectation level suggesting effect may be executed at the timing when the battle effect is executed (the timing when it develops into super reach), the timer effect is kept until the expectation level suggesting effect is executed. It is also a production that displays (suggests) the remaining time (seconds). As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is a effect corresponding to the battle effect, which is a kind of advance notice effect, and is also an effect corresponding to the expectation level suggesting effect, which is a kind of advance notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5(3) to 11-5(6), which will be described later, the timer effect is started 10 seconds before the battle effect is executed (develops into super reach). In the timer effect, a timer image 04TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At the timing when the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, the timer image 04TM300 indicates an initial value (in this example, a numerical value of "00:10" indicating 10 seconds). Then, the numerical value indicated by the timer image 04TM300 (the numerical value displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5) is decremented and updated by 1 each time one second elapses, and is updated at the timing of "00:00" ( At the timing when the remaining time is 0 seconds, the battle production is executed. In addition, there is a case where the expectation suggesting effect is executed at the timing when the numerical value indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00" (the timing when the remaining time is 0 seconds). Thus, the timer effect is a effect of performing a subtraction operation (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect) of the remaining time (10 seconds to 0 seconds remaining) indicated by the timer image.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the timer effect is started at the timing 10 seconds before the battle effect is executed (develops into super reach). , the timer effect may be executable. For example, the timer effect is executed at a timing 10 seconds before the battle effect is executed (in this case, the timer image 04TM300 has an initial value of "00:10" indicating the remaining 10 seconds). It may start at the timing 20 seconds before the effect is executed (in this case, the timer image 04TM300 has an initial value of "00:20" indicating the remaining 20 seconds). In such an effect configuration, the timer effect started 20 seconds before the battle effect is executed is a bigger hit than the timer effect started 10 seconds before the battle effect is executed. Expectations may be raised. That is, when the execution period of the timer effect is long (when the initial value indicated by the timer image 04TM300 that has appeared is large and the update period (timer operation period) is long), when the execution period of the timer effect is short (when the timer image 04TM300 that has appeared When the initial value indicated by is small and the update period (timer operation period) is short), the expectation of a big hit may be higher than when the period is short).

In the present embodiment, the timer effect is a effect corresponding to the battle effect and the expectation suggesting effect. There are a case where only the effect is executed and a case where the battle effect and the expectation suggesting effect are executed. Thus, there are a pattern in which one type of advance notice effect is executed in response to one timer effect, and a pattern in which two types of notice effect are executed, and the pattern in which two types of notice effect are executed is The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the pattern in which one type of advance notice performance is executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to how many types of advance notice effects are executed at the timing when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 reaches "00:00".

In the present embodiment, an example of executing a timer effect as a effect corresponding to a battle effect or an expectation suggesting effect was shown, but not limited to such a form, a timer effect as an effect corresponding to other notice effects may be executed. For example, a pseudo-continuous effect based on a variation pattern (for example, an effect in which the decorative pattern changes again after the combination of pseudo-continuous patterns temporarily stops) or a movable body action effect (for example, a movable accessory moves during the execution of a battle effect) A timer effect may be executed in response to the effect), and the presence or absence of execution and the effect mode (for example, the number of characters that appear) are determined in the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start (for example, a group announcement effect (for example, a large number of characters A timer effect may be executed corresponding to the effect of crossing the screen.

In this way, when a plurality of types of advance notice effects are executed, a timer effect corresponding to each type of advance notice effects may be executed. Here, timer effects corresponding to each kind of advance notice effects may be simultaneously executed in parallel, and along with this, a plurality of timer images 04TM300 may be simultaneously displayed in parallel. In such an effect configuration, when the number of displayed timer images 04TM300 is large (when timer effects are executed for many types of advance notice effects), when the number of displayed timer images 04TM300 is small (small The degree of expectation for a big hit may be higher than in the case where the timer effect is executed for the type of advance notice effect. By adopting such an effect configuration, when the timer image 04TM300 is displayed (when a timer effect corresponding to a certain kind of advance notice effect is being executed), another timer image 04TM300 is displayed. The player also becomes interested in whether or not.

Also, in the timer effect, it may be possible to display the timer image in a plurality of modes. For example, the numerical value indicated by the timer image may be displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode (for example, red). Then, when the display result is "loss", the timer image is displayed in the normal mode at a rate of 90%, and the timer image is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 10%, and the display result is "big hit". , the timer image may be displayed in the normal mode 10% of the time, and the timer image may be displayed in the special mode 90% of the time. With such an effect configuration, the player pays attention to the display mode when the timer image is displayed.

Also, the display mode of the timer image may be changed during execution of the timer effect. For example, during the period from "00:10" to "00:05", the remaining time indicated by the timer image is displayed in the normal manner, and the remaining time indicated by the timer image is displayed from "00:05" to " 00:00", the timer image may be displayed in a special manner. With such an effect configuration, the player becomes interested in whether or not the display mode of the timer image changes during execution of the timer effect (during the countdown operation).

Also, the timer effect may be an effect suggesting a set value instead of an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, when the setting value is 1, the timer image is displayed in the normal mode at a rate of 95%, the timer image is displayed in the special mode at a rate of 5%, and the setting value is 2 or more. , the timer image may be displayed in the normal mode at a rate of 90%, and the timer image may be displayed in the special mode at a rate of 10%. In such an effect configuration, the timer image in the special mode suggests that the set value is a high set value. In this way, the timer effect may be a effect corresponding to the super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) that is the advance notice effect or the expectation suggesting effect, while the timer effect itself may suggest the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the timer effect.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, and when it decides to execute the timer effect in step S04TM2070, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first setting before the start of the timer effect. It is possible to set the performance execution timing so as to start the variable display of the mini-slot symbols related to the suggestion performance, and to continue the variable display of the mini-slot symbols related to the first set suggestion performance even after the start of the timer performance. . However, in the variable display of the mini-slot symbols related to the first setting suggestion effect, the timing at which the combination of the mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Bell] [Bell] [Bell]) is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the setting suggestion is made) ) is set to at least a timing different from the timing at which the timer effect is finalized (the timing at which the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes “00:00”).

For example, the timing to stop display the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Bell] [Bell] [Bell]) (the timing at which the setting is suggested) is the first half of the timer effect (the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300). is "00:10" to "00:05"), or the timing after the end of the timer effect (for example, after the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 reaches "00:00") , after the timer image 04TM300 is erased).

(Cut-in notice effect, cut-in suggestion effect)
In this embodiment, when it is determined that a cut-in notice effect is to be executed in the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start, the cut-in notice effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the battle effect. Further, when it is determined that the cut-in suggesting effect is to be executed in the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start, the cut-in suggesting effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the battle effect.

In the present embodiment, the cut-in notice effect includes a blue-mode cut-in notice effect, a red-mode cut-in notice effect, and a gold-mode cut-in notice effect. Further, as the cut-in suggesting effect, there are a blue mode cut-in suggesting effect, a red mode cut-in suggesting effect, and a gold mode cut-in suggesting effect.

A specific example of the cut-in notice effect and the cut-in suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. 11-3(A) to (C) are explanations showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and when the cut-in suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 11-3(D) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 after the end of the cut-in notice effect, and FIG. 11-3(E) is a cut-in FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 after the suggestive effect is finished;

As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in the blue mode cut-in forewarning effect, a cut-in image 04TM100A including a blue background and the words "chance" is displayed, and in the blue mode cut-in suggestion effect, the same is true. , a cut-in image 04TM100A including a blue background and the words "chance" is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in the cut-in forewarning effect in the red mode, a cut-in image 04TM100B including a red background and the words "great chance" is displayed, and a cut-in suggestion effect in the red mode is displayed. Similarly, a cut-in image 04TM100B including a red background and the characters "great chance" is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3(C), in the gold mode cut-in forewarning effect, a cut-in image 04TM100C including a gold background and the characters "hot" is displayed, and a gold mode cut-in suggestion effect is displayed. Similarly, a cut-in image 04TM100C containing a gold background and the characters "hot" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) to (C), the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5 to display an active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. . In addition, based on the fact that the establishment combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini-slot symbols executed last time (most recently executed) was "lost", the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5, In 5C1 and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) when the variable display is fixed and stopped is continuously displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-3(A) to 11-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the friend character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 as the battle effect is executed. . The cut-in image related to the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in suggestion effect has a higher priority than the effect image of the active display and the battle effect (the display layer is higher than the effect image of the active display and the battle effect, and it is visible to the player). ), superimposed with the active display and the effect image of the battle effect.

When the display result is determined to be a "big hit" and the variation pattern is determined to be a "super ready-to-win big hit", the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. , the effect image of the battle effect [Victory] in which the ally character 04TM200 wins over the enemy character 04TM250 is displayed, and the characters "Victory" are displayed in the center of the screen. Also, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols ("777" in this example) corresponding to the display result of "big hit" is determined and stopped. At this time, the cut-in images shown in FIGS. 11-3(A) to 11-3(C) are effect images based on the cut-in announcement effect.

When the display result is determined to be "loss" and the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach failure", the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-3 (E). , the effect image of the battle effect [defeat] in which the ally character 04TM200 is defeated by the enemy character 04TM250 is displayed, and the characters "defeat" are displayed in the center of the screen. Also, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("767" in this example) corresponding to the display result of "missing" is confirmed and stopped. At this time, the cut-in images shown in FIGS. 11-3(A) to 11-3(C) are effect images based on the cut-in suggestion effect.

In this way, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or when it is decided to execute the cut-in suggestion effect, in the battle effect (super ready-to-win effect) The execution timing of the cut-in effect (cut-in foretelling effect or cut-in suggesting effect) is set so that one of the cut-in images 04TM100A to 04TM100C is displayed immediately before the result of winning or losing is announced. Therefore, the execution period of the cut-in suggestion effect (the display period of the cut-in image) and the execution period of the timer effect (the display period of the timer image) do not overlap, and at least the timer image 04TM300 is the final mode "00: 00”, the execution of the cut-in suggestion effect is avoided.

When the victory presentation is executed after the execution of the cut-in presentation, it is found that the cut-in presentation was the cut-in notice presentation, and when the defeat presentation is performed after the cut-in presentation, the cut-in is performed. It turns out that the production was a cut-in suggestion production. Therefore, the player can determine which type of cut-in effect is to be executed and which type of cut-in effect is to be executed until the final stage of the battle effect and immediately before the winning/losing result (display result) is announced. It is not possible to ascertain whether

(Production example of cut-in suggestion production)
Next, FIG. 11-4 shows an example of an effect when the timer effect and the cut-in suggestion effect are executed when the display result is determined to be "loss" and the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach loss". to FIG. 11-6.

FIG. 11-4 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the timer effect and the cut-in suggesting effect, and FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are effects related to the timer effect and the cut-in suggesting effect. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image;

In this example, in the process for determining the effect at the start of fluctuation, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in step S16TM2000, and it is decided to execute the expectation level suggestive effect of the first mode (one star) in step S04TM2065. Then, in step S04TM2070, it is decided to execute the timer effect, and in step S04TM2100, it is decided to execute the cut-in suggestive effect (third setting suggestive effect) in gold mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is started. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, corresponding to the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3. Then, three first reserved displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the mini- In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) is continuously displayed when the variable display is fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11 -4 timing of T2), the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000. The symbol variable display (first mini-slot variable display) is started. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5(3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and then, in step S04TM2070. At the timing when the remaining time (number of seconds) until the execution of the battle effect becomes 10 seconds (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-4), A timer effect is executed, and a timer image 04TM300 (in this example, a numerical image with an initial value of “00:10”) is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 . At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small patterns is continued, and in the mini-slot pattern display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5, the mini-slot patterns are variable. continue to display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (4), the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the remaining time (number of seconds) until execution of the battle effect becomes 5 seconds (T4 shown in FIG. 11-4 Timing), the timer effect is continued, and the timer image 04TM300 (in this example, a numerical image of "00:05") updated based on the elapsed time is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 . In addition, the effect control CPU 120, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols ([Bell] [Bell] [Bell]) is stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (5), the effect control CPU 120 is the timing (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-4) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern, the pattern display of the image display device 5 A ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the decoration pattern "3" in the area 5L and the pattern display area 5R, and characters "ready-to-win!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the timer effect, and displays a timer image 04TM300 (in this example, the numerical value of "00:03") updated based on the elapsed time in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. image).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (6), the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the remaining time (number of seconds) until execution of the battle effect becomes 0 seconds (T6 shown in FIG. 11-4 Timing), the timer effect is continued, and a timer image 04TM300 (in this example, a numerical image of "00:00") updated based on the elapsed time is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 . When the remaining time indicated by the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00" in the final mode, it is notified that the timing for developing the super ready-to-reach effect (battle effect) has been reached, and the expectation suggesting effect is executed. is also suggested.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the timer effect in accordance with the execution timing of the battle effect (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 11-4), and the image display device 5, the timer image 04TM300 (“00:00” in this example) in the lower right area of the screen is erased. The effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect [defeat] according to the super reach variation pattern in which the display result is "lost", and causes the image display device 5 to display a background image for battle effect (normal The background is switched to the background for the battle production), the ally character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 are displayed, and the characters "Battle" are displayed in the upper left area of the screen. Furthermore, in step S04TM2065, based on the decision to execute the expectation degree announcement effect of the first mode (1 star), the star image 04TM400 indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit is set to 1 beside the characters "Battle". display one. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5(8), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes the battle effect [defeat], and continuously displays the friend character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 on the image display device 5. (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 11-4). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), at the execution timing of the cut-in suggestive effect (at the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 11-4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the gold mode cut-in suggestive effect. Then, a cut-in image 04TM100C including a golden background and characters of ``hot heat'', which is a display mode with a higher priority than the effect image of the battle effect, is displayed in the central region of the screen of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters “hot”, and terminates the cut-in suggestion effect. In a state in which the image display device 5 displays the ally character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 (the state in which the image corresponding to the battle effect is continuously displayed), the characters "defeat" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. display (timing of T10 shown in FIG. 11-4). Then, the effect control CPU 120 stops the combination of small symbols (“323” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 that result in a “missing” display result. At this time point, the small pattern is not fixed and stopped, but is in a state of stopping the swing. At this point, the player understands that the display result is "missing" and that the type of cut-in effect that has been executed is a cut-in suggestive effect. Then, it is grasped that the setting value of the gaming machine is at least 4 or more by executing the cut-in suggesting effect of the golden mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (11), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the end of the battle effect and the notification of defeat (notification that the display result is “lost”). The eye-catching image 04TM500 is displayed on the entire screen for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds) (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 11-4). The eye-catching image 04TM500 includes, for example, the model name of the game machine (“CR XXX” in this example) and other information unrelated to the display result, and information that may cause misunderstanding that it is an advance notice effect. is not included.

In addition, during the display period of the eye-catching image 04TM500, the active display 16TM003, the first pending display 16TM001, the mini-slot 16TM030 related to the first setting suggestion effect, the friend character 04TM200 and the enemy character 04TM250 related to the battle effect, etc. are displayed in the eye-catching image. It is hidden by 04TM500 and is not displayed, and only the combination of small symbols ("323" in this example) during the rocking stop is visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (12), when the display period of the eye-catching image 04TM500 ends, the effect control CPU 120 hides the eye-catching image 04TM500 and changes the background image to correspond to Super Reach. The background image is restored to the normal background image (timing of T12 shown in FIG. 11-4). Then, the combination of decorative symbols (“323” in this example) indicating that the display result is “no” is stopped. Also, the active display 16TM003, the first pending display 16TM001, and the mini-slot 16TM030 related to the first setting suggestion effect are displayed again. The normal background does not display the friend character 04TM200, the enemy character 04TM250, or the like related to the battle effect. At this time point, the ornamental pattern is not fixed and stopped, but is in a state of stopping swinging, and the small pattern is also in a state of continuing to stop swinging.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the CPU 103 at the timing when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 11-4), the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 , 5C and 5R, the combination of decorative patterns ("323" in this example) is fixed and stopped, and the combination of small patterns ("323" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r. Let

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (6), when the timer effect is executed, when the timer image 04TM300 becomes the final mode ("00:00" in this example), the battle effect suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. and expectations suggesting effect are executed. On the other hand, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value is started at the timing before the timer effect is started, and ends at the timing before the timer effect becomes the final display mode (in this example, the timer effect ("00:10" to "00:05"), the combination of [Bell] [Bell] [Bell] is stopped and the setting is suggested). Also, the cut-in suggesting effect suggesting the set value is executed after the timer effect ends and the timer image 04TM300 is hidden.

In this way, when the timer image 04TM300 becomes the final mode (“00:00” in this example), it is possible to execute the advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the big hit, but the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value is possible. By preventing the execution, it is clarified that the information suggested corresponding to the timer effect with the countdown operation is the degree of expectation for the big win. When the timer effect is executed, the player is informed in advance that the degree of expectation for the big win will be suggested at the timing when the countdown operation ends (the timing when the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00" which is the final mode). Since it can be grasped at a high level, it is possible to increase interest in the currently executed variable display. In addition, when the cut-in suggesting effect is executed, it becomes clear that the cut-in suggesting effect has been executed after the display result is notified by the defeat effect. Until then, attention is paid to the effect (battle effect) related to the display result of the variable display being executed. In addition, since the player can estimate the set value based on how the cut-in suggesting effect was executed after being notified that the display result was "lost", can be prevented from decreasing interest after the notification of the display result of ". In this way, it is possible to appropriately generate interest in both the advance notice effect and the suggestive effect.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-5 (3) to (8) and FIG. 11-6 (9), the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, the timer image 04TM300 becomes the final mode ("00:00"), and the timer image Although an example in which the cut-in suggestion effect is executed after 04TM300 is hidden is shown, the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at a timing before the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, for example. After the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, before the timer image 04TM300 becomes the final mode (“00:00”) (for example, the first half of the timer effect (“00:10” to “00:05”) )), the cut-in suggesting effect may be executed.

At least at the timing when the cut-in suggestion effect is executed (the timing at which the cut-in image related to the cut-in suggestion effect is displayed), the timer image 04TM300 is prevented from being in the final mode ("00:00") ( At the timing when the timer image 04TM300 becomes the final mode (“00:00”), the cut-in suggesting effect is not executed, so that the scene where the setting suggesting effect is emphasized by the timer image 04TM300 is eliminated. It is possible to prevent the interest of the effect using the timer image 04TM300 (announcement effect corresponding to the timer effect) from deteriorating as the suggestive effect is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (3) to (8) and FIG. 11-6 (9), in the timer effect, a subtraction operation of the remaining time until the start of the battle effect (countdown operation until the execution of the battle effect) is performed. After the timer image 04TM300 changes to a mode (“00:00”) suggesting the execution timing of the battle effect, it is erased and then the cut-in suggesting effect is executed. In other words, the execution timing of the cut-in suggestion effect is not suggested by the subtraction operation of the timer image 04TM300. According to such a configuration, there is no scene in which the execution timing of the cut-in suggestion effect is emphasized by the subtraction operation of the timer image 04TM300. It is possible to prevent the interest of the corresponding advance notice effect from decreasing.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 9-6(G), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined according to the set value regardless of the display result. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2(D), whether or not the cut-in suggesting effect (third setting suggesting effect) is executed is determined when the display result is "missing" (at step S04TM2080). NO), determined according to the set value. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment includes a cut-in suggestion effect that is not executed when the display result is "big hit" and is executable when the display result is "loss", or "missing", there is a first setting suggestion effect that can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggesting effects, and the cut-in suggesting effect is not executed when the display result is a "jackpot", thereby reducing the chances of setting guessing. can be mitigated.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the player counts the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect each time the first setting suggestion effect with different execution ratios according to the set value is executed. , the player himself/herself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect [the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect = (the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect/the number of times of variation) x 100], and the calculated first setting The player can guess the set value by determining which set value of the execution ratio of the first set suggestive effect for each well-known set value approximates the execution ratio of the suggestive effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-2(D), the gold mode cut-in suggesting effect in which the gold mode cut-in image 04TM100C is displayed is set to "4", "5", or "6". It is an effect that suggests (informs) that it is one of them (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is one of "4", "5", and "6"). In particular, in this example, it is determined that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", or "6" (high set value) by executing the cut-in suggesting effect in the golden mode. do. Thus, the cut-in suggestion effect is a high setting suggestion effect that suggests (informs) that the set value is the high set value.

Thus, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 3% (when the set value is "1") to 8% (when the set value is "6"). Since the difference between the execution ratios is small, a large number of executions are required to accurately guess the setting value, and the setting suggestion accuracy is low. On the other hand, the execution ratio of the gold mode cut-in suggestion effect for each variable display is 0% (when the set value is one of “1”, “2”, or “3”) or 5% (when the set value is "4", "5", or "6") and is set to a low setting value (set value is either "1", "2", or "3"). case) is never executed. When the gold mode cut-in suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value), so the setting suggestion is performed. accuracy is high. In this way, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects with different setting suggestion accuracies, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestions.

Note that in the setting suggestion effect described above, the range of setting values to be suggested differs between the first setting suggestion effect and the cut-in suggestion effect ("1", "2", "3" in the first setting suggestion effect). ”, “4”, “5”, and “6”, and in the second setting suggestion effect, it is either “1” to “3” or “4” to “6”). However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the first setting suggesting effect and the cut-in suggesting effect may share the range of set values to be suggested. For example, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 3% when the set value is "1", and is executed at a rate of 5% when the set value is "2" or more. On the other hand, the gold mode cut-in suggestion effect is not executed when the set value is "1", and is executed at a rate of 20% when the set value is "2" or more. good too.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the timer effect (the countdown operation of the timer image 04TM300) is executed as a effect suggesting the display result of the variable display being executed (for example, the variable display corresponding to the active display 16TM003). However, the timer effect is not limited to such a form, and is executed as a preview effect suggesting the display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended (for example, the variable display corresponding to the first suspended display 16TM001). good too. Specifically, whether or not to execute the timer effect is determined (for example , when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is ``big hit'', it is determined to execute the timer presentation at a higher rate than when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is ``loss'').

Then, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed at a timing before the execution of the variation display (so-called target variation) that is the object of the determination, A countdown operation of the timer image 04TM300 may be performed. Furthermore, at the timing when the timer image 04TM300 becomes the final mode of "00:00" by the countdown operation, a pending change effect is executed to change the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the target fluctuation to be the target of the pre-reading notice effect. You may do so. In this case, the countdown operation of the timer image 04TM300 suggests the execution timing of the look-ahead foretelling effect (the timing at which the target change for which the look-ahead foretelling effect is to be notified).

Further, when the timer effect is the pre-reading advance notice effect, the timing at which the timer image 04TM300 becomes "00:00", which is the final mode, may be the timing at which the target change targeted for the pre-reading notice effect is started. It may be the timing at which a specific effect (for example, the aforementioned battle effect or expectation level suggesting effect) is executed in the target change.

Further, when the timer effect is the look-ahead advance notice effect, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed over a plurality of times of variable display before the target change, and a countdown operation is performed over the multiple times of variable display, so that the target change. Prior to execution, at the timing when the timer image 04TM300 reaches the final mode of "00:00", the pre-reading forewarning effect such as the pending change effect may be executed. As a result, interest can be enhanced over a plurality of fluctuation displays before the target fluctuation.

Further, when the timer effect is the look-ahead notice effect, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed over a plurality of variable displays including the variable display prior to the target variable and the target variable, and is counted down over the multiple variable displays. At the timing when the timer image 04TM300 reaches the final mode of "00:00" while the action is performed and the target variation is executed, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 changes or a specific effect (for example, the battle effect described above or expectations suggesting effect) may be executed. As a result, interest can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays including the variable display prior to the target variation and the target variation.

Further, when the timer effect is the look-ahead notice effect, after the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, the countdown operation may be started after a predetermined period (for example, a plurality of variable display periods) has passed. For example, when the execution of the timer effect is determined based on the determination result of the start winning time determination (see FIG. 8-16) based on the occurrence of winning to the start winning opening, the timer image 04TM300 is displayed. The countdown operation should not be started immediately (at this time, characters such as "timer preparation" should be displayed to inform the player that the countdown operation has not yet been executed). Then, the countdown operation is not started at the timing before the execution of the variation display (target variation) that is the object of the determination, and the countdown operation is started during the execution of the target variation, and the timer image is displayed by the countdown operation. At the timing when 04TM300 becomes "00:00", which is the final mode, the battle effect and the expectation level suggesting effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), when the battle effect and the cut-in suggestive effect are being executed in parallel, the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters "hot heat" It is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the battle effect. In this way, when the battle effect and the cut-in suggestive effect are executed in parallel, the cut-in suggestive effect is displayed in a display mode with a higher priority than the battle effect, thereby achieving a high setting. The visibility of the cut-in suggestive effect as the suggestive effect is enhanced, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the cut-in image.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, within the period of one variable display, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at timing T2, and the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at timing T9. In this way, by executing the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings during the variable display period, the player has more chances to speculate on the settings, and the interest during the variable display period can be improved. It should be noted that the same type of setting suggesting effect (for example, the third setting suggesting effect) may be executed at a plurality of timings within the period of one variable display. setting suggestion effect (for example, the third setting suggestion effect) can be executed a plurality of times.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(D), whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is to be executed depends on a set value set based on a table for determining whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode. has been determined (step S04TM2100). Also, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), whether or not to execute the timer effect (whether or not to display the timer image) is determined according to the display results based on a table for determining whether to execute the timer effect. (step S04TM2070). In this manner, whether or not to display the timer image is determined based on the display results at a common ratio regardless of whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is executed. Also, regardless of whether or not the timer effect is executed (whether or not the timer image is displayed), whether or not the cut-in suggestion effect is to be executed is determined based on the set setting values. According to such a configuration, whether or not to execute the timer effect of displaying the timer image before the execution of the battle effect and whether to execute the cut-in suggestion effect during the execution of the battle effect are independently determined. It is possible to suppress the complication of the determination process of . As a result, when specification changes such as changes in the probability of big hits occur, it is possible to facilitate debugging in terms of presentation and suppress an increase in development costs.

If the timer effect is executed in response to the cut-in suggesting effect, which is the setting suggesting effect, whether or not to execute the timer effect is determined according to the set setting value, and the timer effect is executed. , it will be executed at a different rate depending on the set value. That is, the timer effect itself has a role as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value currently set, and the player's interest in the variable display result (or the effect that suggests the variable display result) during the variable display. will decrease. In order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the decision regarding the timer effect and the decision regarding the cut-in suggestion effect are not related to each other.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example of executing a cut-in suggesting effect as the third setting suggesting effect was shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the third setting suggesting effect is set differently from the cut-in suggesting effect. A suggestive effect may be executed.

For example, as the third setting suggestion effect, an eye-catching effect of displaying the above-described eye-catching image 04TM500 may be executed. The eye-catching effect is that when the variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach ("super reach lost" or "super reach big hit"), the super reach effect (for example, battle effect) ends and the display result is announced. (After victory or defeat is reported), an eye-catching image (for example, an image in which the characters of the title of the gaming machine are displayed on a black background image) is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds).

The eye-catching image is an image for allowing the player to clearly recognize that the battle effect has ended and for suppressing the abrupt feeling when switching from the effect image of the battle effect to the normal effect image. At this time, by determining the mode of the characters of the title shown in the eye-catching image at different ratios according to the set values, the eye-catching effect can be executed as the third setting suggestion effect. For example, if the setting value is "1", the title characters are displayed in white 80% of the time, and the title characters are displayed in red 20% of the time. In some cases, 20% of the title text may be displayed in white, and 80% of the time, the title text may be displayed in red.

In this way, the eye-catching effect, in which the aspect is determined at different ratios according to the setting value, does not correspond to the timer effect, and the timer effect does not suggest the execution timing of the effect (timing of the setting suggestion). This is an example of a production. The eye-catching effect may be executable only when it is reported that the display result is "lost". (However, when it is reported that the display result is "loss", it is more likely than when it is reported that the display result is "big hit") (higher proportion of execution of eye-catching effects).

(2) In the above embodiment, the third setting suggesting effect (cut-in suggesting effect) is executed after the display of the timer image ends. A third setting suggestion effect (cut-in suggestion effect) may be executed during display. However, even when the timer image is displayed, the third setting suggesting effect (cut-in suggesting effect) is not executed at the timing when the timer image becomes "00:00".

(3) In the above-described embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, an example is shown in which a timer effect accompanied by a subtraction operation (countdown operation) of the numerical value shown in the timer image is executed. However, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, an effect of performing other actions may be executed. For example, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, a present effect involving the action of opening a decorated box for a present (present box) may be executed. In the present effect, after the image of the present box is displayed, the present box is opened and the image of the present (hereinafter referred to as "present image") is displayed. For example, as a gift image, an image of a character according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, an image of the characters "change" corresponding to the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, and a super reach effect (battle effect) " There is an image of characters such as "development".

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the announcement effect (battle effect) is always executed at the timing when the timer image reaches "00:00". The announcement effect may not be executed at the timing of "00:00". When such an effect configuration is adopted, if the advance notice effect (battle effect) is executed at the timing when the timer image becomes "00:00", when the timer image becomes "00:00" It is assumed that the percentage of winning big hits is higher than when the advance notice effect (battle effect) is not executed (when the game does not develop into super ready-to-win).

(5) In the above embodiment, the numerical value shown in the timer image is updated by subtracting 1 every second from the initial value "00:10" to the final value "00:00". Although an example in which the timer image is erased and the timer effect is terminated after the timer image is displayed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and before the numerical value indicated in the timer image becomes the final value of "00:00". , the timer image may be hidden to end the timer effect. That is, there may be a pattern in which the numerical value displayed in the timer image does not become "00:00" when the timer effect is executed.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, when the variation pattern is the "super reach jackpot", an example is shown in which a battle effect [victory] is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character. Not limited to this, when the variation pattern is "super ready-to-win big hit", a ally character that has once been defeated by an enemy character may perform a resurrection effect in which the enemy character comes from behind to win. At this time, a battle effect [defeat] in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character may be executed once, and after the aforementioned eye-catching effect is executed, the revival effect may be executed. That is, an effect pattern may be provided in which the display result is notified after execution of the setting suggestion effect.

(7) In the above embodiment, when the display result is "lost", the third setting suggestion effect can be executed, and when the display result is "big hit", the third setting suggestion effect is not executed. , the third setting suggestion effect may be executable even when the display result is a "big win" without being limited to such a form. However, when the display result is "big win", the third setting suggestion effect is executed at a lower rate than when the display result is "loss".

(8) In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which the second setting suggestion effect was not executed because the change count display 16TM040 was not displayed. By adopting , the second setting suggestion effect may be made executable.

(Configuration included in characteristic portion 04TM)
As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-116654, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a card corresponding to the advance notice effect before execution of the notice effect. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the character image corresponding to the set value before and after the setting change can be displayed. A display game machine has been proposed. In a gaming machine that displays information (cards) corresponding to the advance notice effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116654, when the setting suggestion-related effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is executed, the setting suggestion-related effect is displayed. If the effect is executed when the control is not in an advantageous state for the player, the player may guess that the control will not be in an advantageous state, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. . The following inventions relating to means A1 to means A9 have been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and are intended to suppress the decline in interest in games in gaming machines capable of executing effects related to setting suggestions.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A game machine (Pachinko game machine 1) which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different advantages for a player ,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production (notice production, setting suggestion production),
with
The production executing means is
Suggestion production related to setting suggestion (cut-in suggestion production),
a plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation level suggest effect, cut-in advance notice effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a specific effect (timer effect) for displaying a specific display (timer image 04TM300) corresponding to the advance notice effect,
When the advance notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the advance notice effect is executed without the specific display being displayed ( As shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the ratio of executing the timer effect (the ratio of displaying the timer image 04TM300) when the display result is a “jackpot” is 60%. The ratio of execution of the timer effect (the ratio of displaying the timer image 04TM300) when the result is “loss” is 20%),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect when the advantageous state is not controlled (as shown in FIG. CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in suggestion effect and the mode of effect (step S04TM2100)),
In the above specific production,
When the corresponding advance notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display changes to the special mode (as shown in FIG. 11-5(6), the effect control CPU 120 sets the numerical value of the timer image 04TM300 to : 00"),
When the suggestive effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the display mode of the specific display does not change to the special mode (FIGS. 11-5 (6) to (8) and 11-6 (9). ), when the cut-in suggestion effect is executed after the timer image 04TM300 is displayed, at least the timer image 04TM300 does not indicate the numerical value of "00:00")
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the suggestive effect is not emphasized by the specific display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest when the suggestive effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
As the suggesting effect, a first suggesting effect that is not executed when the control is in the advantageous state and is executable when the control is not in the advantageous state (not executed when the display result is a "jackpot" and the display result is A cut-in suggestive effect that can be executed when a "miss" occurs), and a second suggestive effect that can be executed when the control is in the advantageous state and can be executed even when the control is not in the advantageous state (the display result is a first setting suggestive effect that can be executed in either case of a ``big hit'' or a ``lose''.
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects, it is possible to reduce the influence of fewer chances of guessing settings when controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The production executing means is
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects with different set suggestion accuracies (the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect has a small difference of 1% between the set values, and the set suggestion accuracy is low, When the cut-in suggestion effect in the gold mode is executed, it is determined that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value), so the setting suggestion is performed. accuracy is high)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in setting suggestions.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
Determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (CPU103 for executing the special symbol normal process of step S110),
Determination means (CPU 103 for executing the starting winning determination process in step S101) for determining whether the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination means,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can display the specific display based on the determination result of the determination means (the timer effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, and the timer image 04TM300 can be used as a pre-reading notice effect). can be displayed before execution of the variable display targeted by
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the specific display.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of specific displays in the specific effect (can display a plurality of timer images simultaneously in parallel),
When a plurality of specific displays are displayed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when a single specific display is displayed (when multiple timer images are displayed in parallel at the same time, a single The expectation of a big hit is higher than when the timer image is displayed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is being displayed, it is possible to make the user interested in whether or not another specific display will be displayed, and it is possible to improve interest in the specific display.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5,
It is possible to suggest the setting by the display mode of the specific display (displaying the timer image in the red mode suggests that the set value is a high set value).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display mode of the specific display.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
When the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are executed in parallel, the information about the suggestive effect is preferentially displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), the battle effect and the cut-in suggestive effect are When being executed at the same time, display the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters "hot" with a higher priority than the battle effect image)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestive effect by enhancing the visibility of the suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
Announcement effect determination means for executing the first determination for determining whether or not to execute the announcement effect (in step S04TM2065, the presence or absence of the execution of the expectation suggesting effect and the effect mode are determined based on the dedicated table (Fig. 11-2 (A)) Effect control CPU 120) determined by
Suggestive effect determination means for executing the second determination for determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect (in step S04TM2100, whether or not the cut-in suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on a dedicated table (Fig. 11-2 (D)) A game machine characterized by comprising a determination control CPU 120).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the effect control.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
Variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at a plurality of timings during the period in which the variable display is executed (as shown in FIG. 11-4, during the period in which the variable display is , the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at the timing of T9)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestive presentation.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-116654, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a card corresponding to the advance notice effect before execution of the notice effect. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, any one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set, and the character image corresponding to the setting value before and after the setting change can be displayed. A display game machine has been proposed. In a gaming machine that displays information (cards) corresponding to the advance notice effect as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116654, when an effect related to the setting suggestion as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is executed, the effect related to the setting suggestion is displayed. In the case of an effect that is executed when the player is not controlled to an advantageous state, the player may guess that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state, which may reduce the interest in the game. . The following inventions relating to means B1 to means B9 have been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and are intended to suppress a decline in interest in games in gaming machines capable of executing effects related to setting suggestions.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A game machine (Pachinko game machine 1) which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different advantages for a player ,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production (notice production, setting suggestion production),
with
The production executing means is
Suggestion production related to setting suggestion (cut-in suggestion production),
a plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation level suggest effect, cut-in advance notice effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a specific effect (timer effect) for displaying a specific display (timer image 04TM300) corresponding to the advance notice effect,
When the advance notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the advance notice effect is executed without the specific display being displayed ( As shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the ratio of executing the timer effect (the ratio of displaying the timer image 04TM300) when the display result is a “jackpot” is 60%. The ratio of execution of the timer effect (the ratio of displaying the timer image 04TM300) when the result is “loss” is 20%),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect when the advantageous state is not controlled (as shown in FIG. CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in suggestion effect and the mode of effect (step S04TM2100)),
In the specific effect, it is possible to suggest the execution timing of the notice effect by operating the specific display (as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (3) to (6), in the timer effect, the timer image The subtraction operation of 04TM300 suggests the execution timing of the battle effect and the expectation suggesting effect),
The timing at which the suggestive effect is executed is different from the timing suggested by the operation of the specific display (the timing at which the cut-in suggestive effect is executed is updated to "00:00", which is the final mode of the timer image 04TM300. (This is later than the timing specified and after the timer image 04TM300 updated to the final mode is hidden.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the suggestive effect is not emphasized by the specific display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest when the suggestive effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect that is not executed when the control is in the advantageous state and is executable when the control is not in the advantageous state (not executed when the display result is a "big hit" and the display result is A cut-in suggestive effect that can be executed when a "lost" occurs), and a second suggestive effect that can be executed when the control is in the advantageous state and can be executed even when the control is not in the advantageous state (the display result is a first setting suggestive effect that can be executed in either case of a "jackpot" or a "lose".
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects, it is possible to reduce the influence of fewer chances of guessing settings when controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The production executing means is
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects with different set suggestion accuracies (the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect has a small difference of 1% between the set values, and the set suggestion accuracy is low, When the cut-in suggestion effect in the golden mode is executed, it is determined that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value), so the setting suggestion is performed. accuracy is high)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in setting suggestion.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
Determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (CPU103 for executing the special symbol normal process of step S110),
Determination means (CPU 103 for executing the start prize determination process in step S101) for determining whether the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination means,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can display the specific display based on the determination result of the determination means (the timer effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, and the timer image 04TM300 can be used as a pre-reading notice effect). can be displayed before execution of the variable display targeted by
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the specific display.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of specific displays in the specific effect (can display a plurality of timer images simultaneously in parallel),
When multiple specific displays are displayed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when a single specific display is displayed (when multiple timer images are displayed simultaneously in parallel, the single The expectation of a big hit is higher than when the timer image is displayed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is being displayed, it is possible to make the user interested in whether or not another specific display is displayed, and thus it is possible to improve interest in the specific display.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B5,
It is possible to suggest a setting based on the display mode of the specific display (displaying a timer image in red mode suggests that the set value is a high set value).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display mode of the specific display.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
When the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are executed in parallel, the information about the suggestive effect is preferentially displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), the battle effect and the cut-in suggestive effect are When being executed at the same time, display the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters "hot" with a higher priority than the battle effect image)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestive effect by enhancing the visibility of the suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
Announcement effect determination means for executing the first determination for determining whether or not to execute the announcement effect (in step S04TM2065, the presence or absence of the execution of the expectation suggesting effect and the effect mode are determined based on the dedicated table (Fig. 11-2 (A)) Effect control CPU 120) determined by
Suggestive effect determination means for executing the second determination for determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect (in step S04TM2100, whether or not the cut-in suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on a dedicated table (Fig. 11-2 (D)) A game machine characterized by comprising a determination control CPU 120).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the effect control.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
Variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at a plurality of timings during the period in which the variable display is executed (as shown in FIG. 11-4, during the period in which the variable display is , the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at the timing of T9)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestive presentation.

As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-116654, there has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a card corresponding to the advance notice effect before execution of the notice effect. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the character image corresponding to the set value before and after the setting change can be displayed. A display game machine has been proposed. In a game machine that displays information (cards) corresponding to a notice effect as shown in JP-A-2016-116654, when an effect related to setting suggestion as shown in JP-A-2010-200902 is executed, effect control can become complicated. The following inventions relating to means C1 to means C10 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and are intended to suppress the complication of effect control in a gaming machine capable of executing effects related to setting suggestions.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A game machine (Pachinko game machine 1) which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different advantages for a player ,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production (notice production, setting suggestion production),
with
The production executing means is
Suggestion production regarding setting suggestion (cut-in suggestion production),
a plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation level suggest effect, cut-in advance notice effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a specific effect (timer effect) for displaying a specific display (timer image 04TM300) corresponding to the advance notice effect,
When the advance notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the advance notice effect is executed without the specific display being displayed ( As shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the ratio of executing the timer effect (the ratio of displaying the timer image 04TM300) when the display result is a “jackpot” is 60%. The ratio of execution of the timer effect (the ratio of displaying the timer image 04TM300) when the result is “loss” is 20%),
Whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is determined according to a different ratio depending on the set value (as shown in FIG. is determined by ),
Regardless of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, whether or not to execute the specific effect is determined by a common ratio (as shown in FIG. presence or absence) is determined at different rates depending on the display result, regardless of whether the cut-in suggestion effect is executed or not)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the effect control.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A game machine (Pachinko game machine 1) which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) with different advantages for a player ,
A state control means (CPU 103) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
Production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing production (notice production, setting suggestion production),
with
The production executing means is
Suggestion production regarding setting suggestion (cut-in suggestion production),
a plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effect, expectation level suggest effect, cut-in advance notice effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a specific effect (timer effect) for displaying a specific display (timer image 04TM300) corresponding to the advance notice effect,
When the advance notice effect is executed after the specific display is displayed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the advance notice effect is executed without the specific display being displayed ( As shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the ratio of executing the timer effect (the ratio of displaying the timer image 04TM300) when the display result is a “jackpot” is 60%. The ratio of execution of the timer effect (the ratio of displaying the timer image 04TM300) when the result is “loss” is 20%),
Regardless of whether or not to execute the specific effect, it is determined whether to execute the suggestive effect at a different rate according to the set value (as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (B) and (D), a timer Regardless of whether the effect is executed (whether the timer image is displayed or not), it is determined whether the cut-in suggestion effect is executed or not at different rates according to the set value)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the effect control.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect that is not executed when the control is in the advantageous state and is executable when the control is not in the advantageous state (not executed when the display result is a "big hit" and the display result is A cut-in suggestive effect that can be executed when a "lost" occurs), and a second suggestive effect that can be executed when the control is in the advantageous state and can be executed even when the control is not in the advantageous state (the display result is a first setting suggestive effect that can be executed in either case of a "jackpot" or a "lose".
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects, it is possible to reduce the influence of fewer chances of guessing settings when controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The production executing means is
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects with different set suggestion accuracies (the execution ratio of the first set suggestion effect has a small difference of 1% between the set values, and the set suggestion accuracy is low, When the cut-in suggestion effect in the gold mode is executed, it is determined that the set value is at least one of "4", "5", and "6" (high set value), so the setting suggestion is performed. accuracy is high)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in setting suggestions.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
Determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (CPU103 for executing the special symbol normal process of step S110),
Determination means (CPU 103 for executing the starting winning determination process in step S101) for determining whether the advantageous state is controlled before the determination by the determination means,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can display the specific display based on the determination result of the determination means (the timer effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, and the timer image 04TM300 can be used as a pre-reading notice effect). can be displayed before execution of the variable display targeted by
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the specific display.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C5,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of specific displays in the specific effect (can display a plurality of timer images simultaneously in parallel),
When multiple specific displays are displayed, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when a single specific display is displayed (when multiple timer images are displayed simultaneously in parallel, the single The expectation of a big hit is higher than when the timer image is displayed.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is being displayed, it is possible to make the user interested in whether or not another specific display is displayed, and thus it is possible to improve interest in the specific display.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6,
It is possible to suggest a setting based on the display mode of the specific display (displaying a timer image in red mode suggests that the set value is a high set value).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display mode of the specific display.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7,
The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is
When the suggestive effect and the advance notice effect are executed in parallel, the information about the suggestive effect is preferentially displayed (as shown in FIG. 11-6 (9), the battle effect and the cut-in suggestive effect are When being executed at the same time, display the cut-in image 04TM100C including the golden background and the characters "hot" with a higher priority than the battle effect image)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestive effect by enhancing the visibility of the suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C8,
Announcement effect determination means for executing the first determination for determining whether or not to execute the announcement effect (in step S04TM2065, whether or not to execute the expectation suggesting effect and effect mode are determined based on a dedicated table (Fig. 11-2 (A)) Production control CPU 120) determined by
Suggestive effect determination means for executing the second determination to determine whether or not to execute the suggested effect (in step S04TM2100, whether or not the cut-in suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on a dedicated table (FIG. 11-2(D)) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a determination control CPU 120).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complication of the effect control.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C9,
Variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols),
The effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at a plurality of timings during the period in which the variable display is executed (as shown in FIG. 11-4, during the period in which the variable display is , the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the cut-in suggestion effect is executed at the timing of T9)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestive presentation.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 07TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 07TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-27. In the present embodiment, as described above (description of the characteristic portion 208SG), in a game machine in which setting values can be changed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a start winning occurs) When the variation pattern of the current variation display is normal reach or super reach), it announces the expectation of a big hit of the variation display whose execution is suspended (the variation display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). It is characterized in that the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted.

Each effect shown in the feature part 07TM (predictive effect during fluctuation, foretell effect during fluctuation) is an effect that can be executed in the gaming machine together with each effect shown in 04TM described above (setting suggestive effect, during change for notice effect). Both of the effects shown in 04TM (setting suggestion effect, fluctuation notice effect) and each effect (forecast notice effect, fluctuation notice effect) shown in the feature part 07TM can be executed in the game machine. However, each effect shown in the above-mentioned 04TM (setting suggestion effect, variable notice effect) is not executed, and only each effect (forecasting notice effect, fluctuation notice effect) shown in the feature part 07TM is played. machine.

(Display result judgment)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 12-1(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided. (either of the above) is referred to the corresponding display result determination table, and the big hit determination is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the percentage of big hits (ball output percentage) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning percentage) according to the set value, the winning percentage of the big hit (ball output percentage) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1, which is a random number for special figure display result determination, is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and when the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low ratio, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol In the case of variable display, the jackpot is won at a lower ratio (1/300) than when the set values are ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'' and ``6''. It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/300) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of non-probability variation, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is It is designed to win the jackpot at a higher rate (1/290) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/290) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of low ratio, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A higher ratio (1/280) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of low ratio, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A higher percentage (1/270) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/270) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of low ratio, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A higher percentage (1/260) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/260) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of the low ratio, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/250) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/250) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at the time when the variable display is started in the low probability state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 12-1 (A) to ( If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined at a ratio according to the set value. The "ratio" shown in FIGS. 12-1(A) to 12-1(F) indicates the ratio (percentage) of winning the jackpot. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the high probability state. As shown in FIGS. 12-2(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided. (either of the above) is referred to the corresponding display result determination table, and the big hit determination is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of high percentage, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol In the case of variable display, the jackpot is won at a lower ratio (1/60) than when the set values are ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'' and ``6''. It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/60) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of high percentage, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is The jackpot is won at a higher rate (1/58) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/58) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of high percentage, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A higher percentage (1/56) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/56) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of high percentage, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A higher percentage (1/54) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same ratio (1/54) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of high percentage, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A higher percentage (1/52) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/52) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of high percentage, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A higher percentage (1/50) of winning the jackpot than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won at the same rate (1/50) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the high accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined at a ratio according to the set value. Incidentally, the "percentage" shown in FIGS. 12-2(A) to (F) indicates the ratio (percentage) of winning the jackpot.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-1 and FIG. The determination of the big hit may be performed using a common table for the case of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display regardless of the variation special symbol designating buffer. .

In this embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Judgement of jackpot type)
FIG. 12-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 12-3 (B) is a jackpot type stored in the ROM 101 It is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table [for the second special symbol]. Of these, FIG. 12-3 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 12-3 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). This is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is set to "4R normal jackpot [100 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for hit type determination. This table is referred to for determining any one of "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", "4R probability variable jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the low probability/high base state is shifted to "normal jackpot" (also called non-probability variable jackpot) After the jackpot game ends In , high accuracy control and time saving control are executed and "variable probability big hit" is set to shift to high accuracy / high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "2R jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and "4R jackpot". The jackpot game state by "jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which 4 rounds (so-called 4 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. Furthermore, the big win game state by the "10R big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the "normal jackpot [100 times]" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of "variable probability big win [next time]" are continuously executed until another big win occurs after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big hit is one of the types of "4R probability variable big hit [next time]" and "10R probability variable big hit [next time]", high probability control and time saving control are performed again after the big hit game state ends. is executed, a so-called consecutive game state occurs in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

For example, the jackpot game state by "4R normal jackpot [100 times]" is a normal game in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. It is an open jackpot, shifts to a low-probability/high-base state after the jackpot game state ends, and the time-saving control executed after that is that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Alternatively, it is a jackpot type that ends when a jackpot game state is entered before the predetermined number of special game games are executed. In addition, the jackpot game state by "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]" is a normal opening in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. It is a big win, and after the big win game state is ended, the state is shifted to a high accuracy/high base state, and the high accuracy control and the time saving control executed after that are continued until the big win occurs again after the big win game state is ended. It is a jackpot type to be executed.

In this embodiment, four types of jackpot types are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], when the setting value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 ~ 104 are assigned to "4R normal jackpot [100 times]", 105 to 284 are assigned to "4R variable jackpot [next time]", 285 to 299 are assigned to "10R variable jackpot [next time] ” is assigned. Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol], when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 104 are assigned to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", and 105 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]". Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, regardless of which set value is set, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table. ing. Similarly, when a big win occurs in the special game with the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table regardless of which setting value is set.

(Variation pattern determination)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, there is a variation pattern determination table for losing, which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result will be "loss", and the variation display result is a "big hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, the [loss] variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the variation display result will be "loss", and the variation display result is pre-determined to be "big hit". It is assumed that a [big hit] variation pattern determination table used at times is prepared in advance.

[For loss] In the variation pattern determination table, for each variation pattern of "non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", and "super reach loss", random A predetermined random number within the range that the numerical value MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value.

The variation pattern of ``non-reach loss'' is a variation pattern in which a combination of ornamental patterns indicating that the result of variation display is ``loss'' after variable display is started is stopped and displayed. Since the effect that achieves reach is not executed, the variable display period when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "no reach" is the same as the effect that achieves reach when the variable display result is "loss". It is shorter than the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation pattern (“normal reach lost”, “super reach lost”).

[For jackpot] In the variation pattern determination table, for each variation pattern of the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern and the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern, a predetermined range of possible random numbers MR3 for variation pattern determination random number is assigned as the judgment value.

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving normal reach ("normal reach lost" and "normal reach big hit"), after the reach state is established, the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. It is fixed and stopped.

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving super reach ("super reach failure" and "super reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed as a super reach effect. A battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a big hit is won by the game.

As shown in FIG. 12-4(A), in the [loss] variation pattern determination table, if the setting value is "1", 1 to 898 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out", 899 to 967 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out", and 968 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out". there is Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 898 are assigned to the "non-reach out" variation pattern, 899 to 967 are assigned to the "normal reach out" variation pattern, and 968 to 997 are assigned to the " It is assigned to the variation pattern of "Super Reach Lost [Battle Draw]". In this way, when the display result is "no", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, if the setting value is "1", 1 to 69 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the "normal reach big hit" variation pattern, and 70 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach big hit" variation pattern. Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 69 are assigned to the "normal reach big hit" variation pattern, and 70 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach big hit" variation pattern. In this way, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

(Outline of pre-reading notice effect)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a look-ahead forewarning effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended (the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) will result in a big hit. ing. That is, the look-ahead foretelling effect is an example of the foretelling effect suggesting that the game is controlled to an advantageous state for the player. In this example, the look-ahead preview effects include a change effect, an operation unit vibration effect, a timer standby effect, and a special background effect, as will be described later.

(Change production)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The change effect is a special mode (in this example, , white triangle display), blue mode (in this example, blue circle display), or red mode (in this example, red circle display).

Specifically, among the change effects, the hold change effect that displays the display mode of 07TM001 in the hold display in a display mode different from the normal mode (any one of the special mode, the blue mode, and the red mode), It is a look-ahead forewarning effect that suggests the display result of a variable display that has not been executed (a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). In addition, among the change effects, an active change effect is executed in which the display mode of the active display 07TM003 is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (any one of the special mode, the blue mode, and the red mode). It is a change-in-progress notice effect that suggests the display result of the change display (change display in which the start condition is satisfied). The timing of executing the change effect and the change pattern of the pending display will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 12-9 to 12-12.

(Operating part vibration effect)
In this embodiment, the stick controller 31A incorporates a vibrator motor for vibrating the stick controller 31A. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can bias the center of gravity of the shaft of the vibrator motor, control the rotation of the vibrator motor to generate vibration, and control the stick controller 31A to perform a vibrating motion. It's becoming Hereinafter, the mode when the stick controller 31A vibrates is referred to as a special mode (vibration mode), and the mode when the stick controller 31A does not vibrate is called a non-special mode (non-vibration mode). called.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the operation section vibration presentation based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The operation part vibration effect is the timing at which it is decided to execute the operation part vibration effect at the time of the start winning, and the timing at which the variable display that is executed prior to the variable display corresponding to the start winning after the start win ( at the timing when the pending memory is consumed and the pending display is shifted), or at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start winning after the start winning (the variable display which is the target of the operation section vibration effect) is started. This is an example of an advance notice effect in which the stick controller 31A is in a special mode by vibrating for a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds).

Specifically, when the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing of the start winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, or after the starting winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, corresponding to the starting winning When the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the variable display executed prior to the variable display is started (timing when the pending memory is consumed and the pending display is shifted), the operation unit vibration effect is It is a look-ahead forewarning effect that suggests the display result of a variable display that has not been executed (a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied). Further, when the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (the variable display which is the target of the operation section vibration effect) is started after the starting prize is won, the operation section vibration effect is executed. It is a change-in-progress notice effect that suggests the display result of the change display (change display in which the start condition is satisfied). The timing at which the operation section vibration effect is executed will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12-14.

Note that the presentation mode of the operation section vibration presentation in the present embodiment is only the presentation mode in which the vibration action is performed for two seconds, but is not limited to such a mode, and a plurality of presentation modes can be used as the presentation mode of the operation section vibration presentation. may be provided. For example, there may be a mode in which the stick controller 31A vibrates for 2 seconds and a mode in which the stick controller 31A vibrates for 10 seconds. When the period of the vibrating action is long (for example, 10 seconds), the expectation of a big hit may be higher than when the period of the vibrating action is short (for example, 2 seconds).

Alternatively, an LED may be provided in the stick controller 31A, and the LED may emit light when the vibrating motion is performed. Then, when the LED emits light with the vibrating motion, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be higher than when the LED does not emit light with the vibrating motion. Furthermore, when the stick controller 31A vibrates, there may be a mode in which the LED provided on the stick controller 31A emits white light and a mode in which the LED provided on the stick controller 31A emits red light. . Then, when the LED emits red light with the vibrating motion, the expectation of a big hit may be higher than when the LED emits white light with the vibrating motion.

(timer effect)
In this embodiment, a timer effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of start winning. As described in the description of [characteristic part 04TM], the timer effect is a effect corresponding to a battle effect (super ready-to-win effect), which is a type of advance notice effect suggesting the display result. It is an effect that displays (notifies) the remaining time (seconds) of. Also, since the expectation level suggesting effect may be executed at the timing when the battle effect is executed (the timing when it develops into super reach), the timer effect is the remaining time (seconds) until the expectation level suggesting effect is executed. It is also a production that displays (suggests) the number). As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is a variable notice corresponding to the battle effect, which is a kind of changing notice effect suggesting the display result of the variable display being executed (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied). This is an example of a production, and it is also an example of a variable advance notice production corresponding to the expectation indication production, which is a kind of fluctuation notice production that suggests the display result of the variable display being executed (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied). . The timing at which the timer effect is executed and the effect mode of the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12-16.

In this embodiment, the timer effect is started at the timing n seconds before the battle effect is executed (develops into super reach). In the timer effect, a timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At the timing when the timer image 07TM300 is displayed, the timer image 07TM300 indicates the initial value n (in this example, the numerical value "00:59" indicating 59 seconds). Then, the numerical value indicated by the timer image 07TM300 (the numerical value displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5) is decremented and updated by 1 each time one second elapses. At the timing when the remaining time is 0 seconds, the battle production is executed. Further, there is a case where the expectation level suggesting effect is executed at the timing when the numerical value indicated by the timer image 07TM300 becomes "00:00" (the timing when the remaining time is 0 seconds). In this way, the timer effect is a effect in which the remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by the timer image is subtracted (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect).

(Timer standby effect)
In addition, in the present embodiment, when execution of the timer effect is determined based on the determination result of the start winning time determination based on the occurrence of winning in the start winning opening, in the area where the timer image 07TM300 is displayed, A timer standby effect for displaying a standby image 07TM300a that informs (suggests) that the timer effect will be executed in advance can be executed as a look-ahead notice effect. The standby image 07TM300a includes the words "preparing", after which the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the area to notify (suggest) that the timer effect will be executed. The standby image 07TM300a is continuously displayed at the lower right of the screen until the variable display (variable display in which the timer effect is executed) that is the target of the start winning determination is executed. Then, when the variation display (target variation) that is the target of the start winning time determination is executed, a timer effect is executed, and a timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the area where the standby image 07TM300a was displayed instead of the standby image 07TM300a. is displayed, and a countdown operation from the initial value n (for example, a numerical value of "00:59" indicating 59 seconds) is started.

In addition, not limited to such a form, if it is decided to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, until the variable display (target change) that is the target of the determination at the time of starting winning is executed, The timer image 07TM300 of the initial value n (for example, the numerical value of "00:59" indicating 59 seconds) is continuously displayed, the countdown operation is not started, and the fluctuation display (target fluctuation ) is being executed, the countdown operation of the timer image 07TM300, which has been continuously displayed until then and has the initial value n, may be started. That is, instead of the standby image 07TM300a described above, the timer image 07TM300 with the initial value n may be continuously displayed over a plurality of variations. In this case, the effect of continuously displaying the timer image 07TM300 whose initial value is n over a plurality of variations corresponds to the pre-reading preview effect.

(Special background production)
In this embodiment, a special background effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The special background effect is the timing at which it is decided to execute the special background effect at the time of the start winning, and the timing at which the variable display that is executed prior to the variable display corresponding to the start winning after the start winning (holding memory is digested and the pending display is shifted), or at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start winning after the start winning (variable display that is the target of the special background effect) is started, as the background image of the decorative pattern, This is an example of a preview effect displaying a special background image 07TM400 representing a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, and volcanic smoke. Starting the special background effect (displaying the special background image 07TM400) corresponds to changing the background image from the normal background image to the special background image 07TM400.

Specifically, when the special background image 07TM400 is displayed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, or after the start winning based on the determination result at the time of starting winning before the variable display corresponding to the starting winning When the special background image 07TM400 is displayed at the timing when the variable display to be executed is started (the timing at which the pending memory is consumed and the pending display is shifted), the special background effect is the variation that has not been executed. It is a look-ahead notice effect that suggests the display result of the display (variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied). Further, when the special background image 07TM400 is displayed at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start winning (the variable display which is the target of the special background effect) is started after the start winning, the special background effect is not executed. It is a variable notice production that suggests the display result of the variable display (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied). The timing at which the special background effects are executed will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 12-18.

In addition, when the special background effect is executed, it may be possible to display a plurality of types of special background images as the background image of the decoration pattern. For example, as the special background images when the special background effect is executed, the first special background image displayed with blue characters "Lv.1" in the upper left of the special background image 07TM400 and Either the second special background image with "Lv.2" displayed in green letters on the left side, or the third special background image with "Lv.3" displayed in red letters on the upper left of the special background image 07TM400. may be displayed. In this case, it is assumed that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of the first special background image<the second special background image<the third special background image.

With respect to such multiple modes of special background effects, the first special background image may be changed to a second special background image or a third special background image with a higher expectation of a big hit than the first special background image, It may be possible to change the second special background image to a third special background image with a higher expectation of a big hit than the second special background image. The timing for changing the special background image may be when the variable display is started (when the pending memory is consumed and the pending display is shifted) or during execution of the variable display.

In addition, a background change suggesting effect suggesting that the background image changes (for example, a effect in which a character appears and hits the current background image to perform an action to change it) may be executed. When the change suggesting effect is executed, the ratio of executing the special background effect (the background image changes from the normal background to the special background image) is higher than when the background change suggesting effect is not executed. may Here, even if the background change suggesting effect is executed, the special background effect may not be executed, and even if the background change suggesting effect is not executed, the special background effect is executed. You can make it happen.

Further, when the background change suggesting effect is executed, the special background image changes more than when the background change suggesting effect is not executed (from the first special background image to the second special background image or the third special background image or change from the second special background image to the third special background image). Here, the special background image may not change even when the background change suggesting effect is executed, and the special background image may change even when the background change suggesting effect is not executed. You may make it so that there is

Next, a specific example of the look-ahead advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 12-5. FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when a pre-reading notice effect is executed while performing a variable display in which the change pattern is "no reach". is.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-5 (1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , decorative symbols are variably displayed, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbol variability is displayed. Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays an active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the reserved display area 07TM011 displays two reserved displays 07TM001.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. When the effect image shown in FIG. 12-5(1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the mode of the stick controller 31A is in the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-5(2), in the state where the first reserved memory number is 2, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is executed. Then, it is assumed that a new start winning has occurred and the first reserved memory number has become 3.

In this example, it is determined to execute a change effect (step S07TM1020) in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start win occurring at this time, and the change pattern 310 (step S07TM1050), and the first look-ahead counter is set (step S07TM1060). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter. That is, the value of the first look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the target variable display of the change effect (suspended change effect or active change effect) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the change effect of the change pattern 310 (see FIG. 12-10 (A3)), and the number of first reserved memories increases. Based on the reception of the command indicating that the call has been made, the suspension display 07TM001A in the red mode is newly displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011.

Also, in this example, it is determined to execute the operation section vibration effect (step S07TM2010) in the start winning effect determination processing (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning occurring at this time. ), and the second look-ahead counter is set (step S07TM2050). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. That is, the value of the second look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the target variable display of the operation unit vibration effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5(2), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to a special mode (vibration mode) based on the decision to execute the operation section vibration effect.

Also, in this example, in the start winning effect determination processing (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning occurring at this time, it is determined to execute the timer effect (step S07TM3020), It is assumed that the third look-ahead counter has been set (step S07TM3060). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. That is, the value of the third look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display that is the target of the timer effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes a timer standby effect, which is a pre-reading preview effect, based on the decision to execute the timer effect, and the screen of the image display device 5 A standby image 07TM300a is displayed in the lower right area. As described above, the standby image 07TM300a includes the characters "preparing", and after that, the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the area to notify (suggest) that the timer effect will be executed. It's becoming

Also, in this example, it is determined to execute a special background effect in the process of determining the effect at the time of start winning (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) accompanying the start winning that occurred at this time (step S07TM4010). , the fourth look-ahead counter is set (step S07TM4050). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. That is, the value of the fourth look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of times of variable display until the variable display that is the target of the special background effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-5(2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a special background image 07TM400 as the background image of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5 based on the decision to execute the special background effect. I am letting

(Production decision processing at the time of start winning)
FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7 are flow charts showing effect determination processing executed at the time of starting winning. Effect control CPU120, in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

In the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first issues a set of start winning commands (for example, symbol designation command, variable category command, and the first reservation storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S07TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command indicating whether or not a big hit will occur, and whether or not a big hit will be determined, among the results of determination at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a big win will occur and the type of the big win in the case of a big win based on the random number for judging the big win and the random number for judging the kind of the big win extracted at the time of starting winning, and designates the result of the judgment. Output the specified command. Also, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether normal reach or super reach is achieved based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command designating the determination result. Further, the first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores a set of commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and second reserved storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine whether or not If a new set of starting winning commands has not been received (NO in step S07TM1000), the process ends.

If one set of starting winning command is newly received (YES in step S07TM1000), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change prohibition flag (see step S1070 and step S07TM1170), which will be described later, is set. Confirm (step S07TM1010). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S07TM1010), the process proceeds to step S07TM2000.

Here, the fact that the change prohibition flag is set means that any variable display different from the variable display corresponding to the start winning (any suspension display different from the suspension display corresponding to the start winning or active display), the change performance has already been executed or it has been decided to execute the change performance, so in such a case, further execution of the change performance is prohibited.

If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S07TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display and whether or not the change effect is executed in the final display mode determination table of the active display (FIG. 12- 8)). That is, in the present embodiment, the change effect is not executed for any of the variable display corresponding to the starting winning and the different changing display (holding display or active display different from the holding display corresponding to the starting winning). When it is not decided to execute the change performance, the change performance can be executed.

FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 12-8, in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 07TM003 is any of "normal mode (white mode)", "special mode", "blue mode" and "red mode". A judgment value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 12-8, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the starting winning (new The final display mode of the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on the first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 60%, and the special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 10%. As a result, the blue mode (blue circle display) occurs at a rate of 15%, and the red mode (red circle display) occurs at a rate of 5%.

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, if the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 30%, the special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 10%, and the special mode (white triangle display) at a rate of 20%. It becomes a blue mode (blue circular display), and at a rate of 40%, it becomes a red mode (red circular display).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the active display 07TM003 is changed to a special mode (white triangle display) different from the normal mode (white circular display), a blue mode (blue circular display), or a red mode ( A red circular display) is called a change effect (active change effect). Therefore, the final display mode of the active display can be changed from the normal mode (white circle display) to the special mode (white triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display), or red mode (red circle display). is to execute a change effect (active change effect) in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode (any one of the special mode, the blue mode, and the red mode). is equivalent to determining

On the other hand, determining the final display mode of the active display to be the normal mode (white circular display) corresponds to determining not to execute the change effects (active change effect and pending change effect).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the change effect (step S07TM1030). If it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030), the process proceeds to step S07TM2000.

If it is decided to execute a change effect (YES at step 07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a later-described effect limit flag (see FIGS. 12-19) is set (step S07TM1040). ). If the effect limit flag is not set (NO at step S07TM1040), the process proceeds from step S07TM1050, and if the effect limit flag is set (YES at step S07TM1040), the process starts at step S07TM1150. proceed.

If the production limit flag is not set (NO in step S07TM1040), the production control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display according to the change pattern determination table A (when the production limit flag is not set) (Fig. 12-9 and FIG. 12-10) (step S07TM1050). The fact that the effect limit flag is not set means that the variation pattern of the variation display that is being executed at the time of the start winning is not a variation pattern involving reach, and in this case, the suspension corresponding to the start winning It is possible to select a change pattern in which the display is displayed in a blue mode or a red mode at the time of the start winning.

(Change pattern determination table A)
FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table A for determining the change pattern of the pending display when the effect limit flag is not set. When the number of first pending memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the starting winning, (i) the timing at which the n-th pending display 07TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 ( timing at the start winning), (ii) the timing at which the pending display 07TM001 corresponding to the starting winning shifts to a higher position (active display area 07TM013 side) in the holding display area 07TM011 (when n≧2) and (iii) at the timing when the pending display 07TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is shifted to the active display area 07TM013 (the timing at which the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed), the variable display based on the starting winning. display information (suspended display or active display) corresponding to is displayed in a manner different from the normal manner. The same applies to the description of the variation pattern determination table B shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12 which will be described later.

12-9 and 12-10, for each change pattern, at each timing of (i) to (iii), the display mode of the display information corresponding to the variable display (suspended display 07TM001 or active display 07TM003) It shows how In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, “normal” indicates a normal mode of white circular display, and “special” indicates a special mode of white triangular display. , "blue" indicates a blue mode, which is a blue circular display, and "red" indicates a red mode, which is a red circular display. The same applies to the description of the variation pattern determination table B shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12 which will be described later.

If the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select decision table A.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol specification command The determination value is assigned so that the variation pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (loss or big hit). A change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, the active shift means that the pending display 07TM001 shifts from the pending display area 07TM011 to the active display area 07TM013 (as a result, it becomes a determination target at the time of starting winning). display of the active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display). The same applies to the description of the change pattern determination table B shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12 which will be described later.

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode, and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 07TM003 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103 . The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift after the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 101 is 60%. is determined at a rate of , the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%.

In addition, regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201 described later, change pattern 301 described later, change pattern 401 described later. case), after the active shift, the active display 07TM003 will finally change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change In the case of pattern 303, change pattern 402, and change pattern 403), after the active shift, the active display 07TM003 remains unchanged in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105. FIG. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which, after displaying the pending display of the notice target in the blue mode, the pending display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 101 is 30%. , the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

As for the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is 10%. , the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 07TM003 will change from the normal mode to the final blue mode. In addition, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change In the case of pattern 303, variation pattern 402 and variation pattern 403), after the active shift, the active indication 07TM003 will change from the special aspect to the final blue aspect. In addition, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205 described later, change pattern 304 and change In the case of pattern 305, change pattern 404 and change pattern 405), after the active shift, the active indication 07TM003 will remain in the blue mode and will not change.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 103, the variation pattern 104, the variation pattern 105, the variation pattern 106, and the variation pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which, after the pending display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode, the pending display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 101 is 30%. , the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 10% , and the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 5% and the variation pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As for the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is 4. %, the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 105 is determined at a rate of 15%. The determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 25% and the variation pattern 107 is determined at a rate of 25%.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401, which will be described later), , after the active shift, the active display 07TM003 will change from the normal mode to finally the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 102 and change pattern 103, change pattern 202 and change pattern 203 described later, change pattern 302 and change In the case of pattern 303, variation pattern 402 and variation pattern 403), after the active shift the active indication 07TM003 will change from the special aspect to the final red aspect. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 104 and change pattern 105, change pattern 204 and change pattern 205 described later, change pattern 304 and change In the case of pattern 304, variation pattern 404 and variation pattern 405), after the active shift the active indication 07TM003 will change from the blue aspect to the final red aspect. Also, if the red mode is determined as the final display mode, and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 106 and change pattern 107, change pattern 206 to change pattern 208 described later, change pattern 306 to change In the case of pattern 310, change pattern 406 to change pattern 410), after the active shift, the active display 07TM003 remains in the red mode and does not change.

If the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 12-9 (A2). Select decision table A.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol specification command The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (loss or big hit). In the change pattern 201, after the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the pending display of the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). , and the change pattern 203, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after the suspension display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the suspension display of the notice object is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the suspension display of the notice object is displayed at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in a special mode, and in the change pattern 203, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and does not change the pending display of the announcement target at the timing of the active shift as it is in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 201 is 60%. , the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. , the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 201, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, and the change pattern 205. FIG. In the change pattern 204, after the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 205 changes the pending display of the notice target to a blue mode, and the change pattern 205 displays the pending display of the notice target in a blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the hold display of the notice target to blue at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the mode is not changed, and the suspension display of the announcement target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201 is 10% when the determination result at the start winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"). , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 203, the variation pattern 204, the variation pattern 205, the variation pattern 206, the variation pattern 207, and the variation pattern 208, respectively. In the change pattern 206, after displaying the suspension display of the notice object in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 207 changes the pending display of the notice target to a red mode, and the change pattern 207 displays the pending display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the hold display of the notice target to red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 208 is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice object is not changed to the red state at the timing of the hold shift of (1), and the hold display of the notice object is not changed to the red state at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "missing"), the change pattern 201 is 35%. , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 10% , the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 5%, the variation pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 201 is 2%. , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 4%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 4%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 205 is determined at a rate of 15% , the determination values are assigned so that the variation pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 207 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 208 is determined at a rate of 20%.

If the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 12-10 (A3). Select decision table A.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol specification command The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (loss or big hit). In the change pattern 301, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the announcement target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, and the suspension display of the announcement target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302 and the , and the change pattern 303, respectively. In the change pattern 302, after the holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the timing of the second holding shift. is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in the special mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the second hold shift. , is a change pattern in which the pending display of the announcement target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 301 is 60%. , the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 40%. , the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301, change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303 , the change pattern 304 , and the change pattern 305 . In the change pattern 304, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, and the suspension display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in the blue mode, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first suspension shift, and the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second suspension shift. , is a change pattern in which the pending display of the announcement target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 301 is 30%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

As for the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 302, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, or the Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 303, the variation pattern 304, the variation pattern 305, the variation pattern 306, the variation pattern 307, the variation pattern 308, the variation pattern 309, and the variation pattern 310, respectively. In the change pattern 306, after the hold display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the active shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying, at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, and is active This is a change pattern for changing the pending display of the notice target to a red mode at the timing of the shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 301 is 30%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 10% , the variation pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 2% and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 305 is determined at a rate of 15% , the variation pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 308 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the variation pattern 309 is determined at a rate of 8% and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 310 is determined at a rate of 8%.

If the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 12-10 (A4). Select decision table A.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol specification command The judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (loss or big hit). In the change pattern 401, after the suspension display of the notice object is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice object is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, or the , and the change pattern 403, respectively. In the change pattern 402, after the holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the timing of the second holding shift. does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern 403, after the holding display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the holding display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. , at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode, and at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the pending display of the notice target as it is in the special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 401 is 60%. , the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 401 is 40%. , the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 402 according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, losing or winning). A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405. FIG. In the change pattern 404, after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. , do not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, do not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and change the hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern 405, after the suspension display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the suspension display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. , at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, and at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the pending display of the announcement target is kept in the blue mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 401 is 30%. , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401 is 10% when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"). , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, or the Determination values are assigned to the variation pattern 403, the variation pattern 404, the variation pattern 405, the variation pattern 406, the variation pattern 407, the variation pattern 408, the variation pattern 409, and the variation pattern 410, respectively. In the change pattern 406, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. , does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, changes the hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and changes the hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern 407, after the holding display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the holding display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode, at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target does not change in the special mode, and at the timing of the active shift, the notice target The change pattern 408 changes the pending display of the notice target to a red mode, and the change pattern 408 displays the pending display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then displays the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without changing the mode, at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode, and is active. It is a change pattern in which the pending display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the shift, and the change pattern 409 displays the hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display of the notice object is changed to a red mode, the hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the notice object is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and does not change the pending display of the notice target at the timing of the active shift to the red mode. At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode, at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the notice object is not changed in the red mode, and the timing of the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the suspension display of the announcement target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the suspension display of the announcement target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 401 is 30%. , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 10% , the variation pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern 408 is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation pattern 409 is determined at a rate of 2% and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 410 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the determination result at the time of the start winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 405 is determined at a rate of 15% , the variation pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern 408 is determined at a rate of 8%, and the variation pattern 409 is determined at a rate of 8% and the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 410 is determined at a rate of 8%.

As shown above, if the effect limit flag is not set (the variation pattern of the variation display that is executed at the time of the start winning is not a variation pattern with reach), the hold display corresponding to the start winning It is possible to select a change pattern (change patterns 105, 107, change patterns 205, 208, change patterns 305, 310, change patterns 405, 410) that is displayed in a blue mode or a red mode at the time of the start winning. .

Next, when it is decided to execute the change effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first prefetch counter (step S07TM1060) and sets the change prohibition flag (step S07TM1070).

In the first look-ahead counter, a value corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the start winning (the value specified by the first reserved memory number designation command) is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol is set. Each time it is executed (every time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the first look-ahead counter is decremented by one. That is, every time the pending display 07TM001 corresponding to the pending memory that is the object of determination at the time of starting winning is shifted, the value of the first look-ahead counter is subtracted. Then, when the value of the first look-ahead counter becomes 0, the target variable display is executed. A second prefetch counter, a third prefetch counter, and a fourth prefetch counter, which will be described later, are decremented in the same manner as the first prefetch counter.

During the period in which the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start-up win occurs, the above-mentioned step S07TM1010 determines YES, thereby corresponding to the new start-up win (new first reserved memory). No change effect is executed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the change display (so-called target change) targeted for the change effect ends.

In addition, when the production limit flag is set (YES in step S07TM1040), the production control CPU 120 sets the change pattern of the pending display to the change pattern determination table B (when the production limit flag is set) (Fig. 12- 11 and FIGS. 12-12) (step S07TM1150). The fact that the production restriction flag is set means that the variation pattern of the variation display that is being executed at the time of the start winning is a variation pattern with reach, and in this case, the suspension corresponding to the start winning The change pattern of displaying the display in the blue mode or the red mode at the time of the start winning is not selected.

(Change pattern B decision table)
FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table B for determining the change pattern of the pending display when the production limit flag is set. The explanation of each change pattern (change pattern 101 to change pattern 410) is the same as that shown in the explanation of FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, so the explanation is omitted here.

If the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select decision table B.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol specification command The determination value is assigned so that the variation pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (loss or big hit).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 101 is 60%. is determined at a rate of , the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%.

In addition, regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern is determined at a rate of 40%, the change pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 101 is 40%. , the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 20%. there is

As for the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is 20%. , the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 50%. there is

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 101 is 30%. , the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 25%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 25%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 5% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 101 is 20. %, the variation pattern 102 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 103 is determined at a rate of 5%, the variation pattern 104 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 106 is determined at a rate of 30%. Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by percentage.

If the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 12-11 (B2). Select decision table B.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol specification command The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 201 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (loss or big hit).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 201 is 60%. , the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. , the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 201 is 40%. , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 20%. there is

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201 is 20% when the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"). , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 15%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 50%. there is

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 201 is 30%. , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 25%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 25%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 5% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 201 is 25%. , the variation pattern 202 is determined at a rate of 5%, the variation pattern 203 is determined at a rate of 5%, the variation pattern 204 is determined at a rate of 35%, and the variation pattern 206 is determined at a rate of 30% Judgment values are assigned as determined by

If the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 12-12 (B3). Select decision table B.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol specification command The determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (loss or big hit).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 301 is 60%. , the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 40%. , the change pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 301 is 40%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 25%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 10%. there is

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 30%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%. there is

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 301 is 30%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 5% and the judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 301 is 10%. , the variation pattern 302 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 303 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 304 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 306 is determined at a rate of 20% and the judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 307 is determined at a rate of 20%.

If the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 12-12 (B4). Select decision table B.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode (when it is determined not to execute the change effect (NO in step S07TM1030)), the determination result at the time of starting winning (display specified by the symbol specification command The judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of the result (loss or big hit).

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 401 is 60%. , the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 401 is 40%. , the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 30%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "miss" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "miss"), the change pattern 401 is 40%. , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 25%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 10%. there is

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, if the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 401 is 30%. , the change pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%. there is

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "loss" (the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "loss"), the change pattern 401 is 30%. , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 20%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variation pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 5% and the judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, if the determination result at the time of the start winning is "big win" (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command is "big win"), the change pattern 401 is 10%. , the variation pattern 402 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 403 is determined at a rate of 10%, the variation pattern 404 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern 406 is determined at a rate of 20% and the judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 407 is determined at a rate of 20%.

As shown above, if the effect limit flag is set (the variation pattern of the variation display being executed at the time of the start winning is a variation pattern with reach), the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in blue mode or red mode (change patterns 105, 107, change patterns 205, 208, change patterns 305, 310, change patterns 405, 410) are not selected.

However, even if the production restriction flag is set (the variation pattern of the variable display that is being executed at the time of the start winning is a variation pattern with reach), the hold display corresponding to the start winning will be displayed at the start Change patterns (change patterns 103, 106, change patterns 203, 206, change patterns 303, 307, change patterns 403, 407) to be displayed in a special mode at the time of winning can be selected.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-9 to 12-12, the hold display corresponding to the variable display that was the determination target at the time of starting winning can be changed from the normal mode to the special mode or the blue mode. , and can be changed from the special mode to the red mode. In addition, the pending display corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning does not change from the blue mode to any mode, nor does it change from the red mode to any mode. Therefore, the special mode as the mode of the pending display is a mode that suggests a change to the red mode, and the case where the pending display is displayed in the special mode is higher than the case where the pending display is displayed in the normal mode. , the rate of change to the red mode is higher.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-8, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the active display in the red mode is displayed than when the active display in the normal mode is displayed. Therefore, the specific display in the red mode (holding display, active display) is a mode suggesting that the display result will be a "big hit".

That is, the pending display can be displayed in a normal mode and a special mode (red mode) in which the percentage of winning is higher than in the normal mode, and the pending display is more special than when the pending display is displayed in the normal mode. In the case of display in the mode, the rate of change from the display mode of the pending display to the special mode (red mode) is higher.

Next, when it is decided to execute the change effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first prefetch counter (step S07TM1160) and sets the change prohibition flag (step S07TM1170).

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not an operating unit vibration flag (see steps S07TM2060 and S07TM2160), which will be described later, is set (step S07TM2000). If the operation unit vibration flag is set (YES in step S07TM2000), the process proceeds to step S3000.

Here, the fact that the operation unit vibration flag is set means that the operation unit vibration effect has already been executed or the operation unit vibration effect has already been executed for any variable display different from the variable display corresponding to the start winning. Since it is determined to be executed, in such a case, further execution of the operation unit vibration effect is prohibited.

If the operation unit vibration flag is not set (NO in step S07TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation unit vibration effect is executed, based on the operation unit vibration effect execution/non-execution determination table (Fig. 12-13 (A ))) (step S07TM2010). That is, in the present embodiment, for both the variable display corresponding to the start winning and the different variable display, when the operation unit vibration effect is not executed and it is not decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect. , it becomes possible to execute the operation unit vibration effect.

FIG. 12-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the operation section vibration effect. As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), in this embodiment, the judgment values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the operation section vibration presentation differs according to the display result.

If the display result is "no" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "no"), 95% of the time, it is decided not to execute the operation unit vibration presentation; It is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect at a rate of %. On the other hand, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the operation section vibration effect at a rate of 70%. , to execute the operation unit vibration effect at a rate of 30%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect (step S07TM2020). If it is determined not to execute the operation unit vibration effect (NO in step S07TM2020), the process proceeds to step S07TM3000.

If it is determined to execute the operation unit vibration effect (YES in step 07TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a later-described effect limit flag (see FIGS. 12-19) is set ( step S07TM2030). If the effect limit flag is not set (NO at step S07TM2030), the process proceeds from step S07TM2040, and if the effect limit flag is set (YES at step S07TM2030), the process starts from step S07TM2140. proceed.

If the production limit flag is not set (NO in step S07TM2030), the production control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration production from the vibration pattern determination table of the operation part vibration production (FIG. 12-13(B)). reference), the vibration pattern A (see FIGS. 12-14) is determined (step S07TM2040). Here, the vibration pattern A is applied to the stick controller 31A both when the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is being performed and when the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is being performed. It is a production pattern that vibrates , and is a vibration pattern that corresponds to both the pre-reading notice production and the fluctuation notice production.

Next, when it is decided to execute the operation part vibration effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S07TM2050) and sets the operation part vibration flag (step S07TM2060).

During the period when the operation unit vibration flag is set, even if a new start-up prize is generated, the above-mentioned step S07TM2000 is determined to be YES, so that the new start-up prize (new first reserved memory) can be handled. The operation unit vibration effect that has been performed is not executed. The operation unit vibration flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) targeted for the operation unit vibration effect is completed.

On the other hand, if the production restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM2030), the production control CPU 120 sets the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration production to the vibration pattern determination table of the operation part vibration production (Fig. 12-13 ( B)), the vibration pattern B (see FIGS. 12-14) is determined (step S07TM2140). Here, in the vibration pattern B, the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is executed without vibrating the stick controller 31A when the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is being executed. This is an effect pattern in which the stick controller 31A is vibrated only when, and is a vibration pattern not corresponding to the pre-reading notice effect but corresponding to the fluctuation notice effect.

Next, when it is decided to execute the operation part vibration effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S07TM2150) and sets the operation part vibration flag (step S07TM2160).

(Vibration pattern of operation part vibration effect)
FIGS. 12-14 show the mode of the stick controller 31A in the lower right of the production diagrams in correspondence with the production diagrams. FIGS. 12-14 (A1) to (A4) show an example of the mode of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick controller 31A when the vibration pattern A is selected as the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration effect. FIGS. 12-14 (B1) to (B4) show the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick controller when the vibration pattern B is selected as the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the mode of 31A.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect in the start winning effect determination process associated with the start winning, the number of first reserved memories is n (n=1, 2, 3, 4) at this time. , "n" is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. When the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration effect is determined to be vibration pattern A, the timing of the start winning and the variable display where the value of the second look-ahead counter is "n-1" to "1" are started. At the timing (the timing at which the hold display is shifted), the operation section vibration effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the stick controller 31A becomes a special mode (vibration mode), and the value of the second pre-reading counter becomes "0". At the timing at which the display is started (timing at which the variable display to be notified is started), the operating part vibration performance is executed as the notice performance during fluctuation, and the stick controller 31A becomes a special mode (vibration mode).

On the other hand, when the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern B, the timing at which the fluctuation display at which the value of the second look-ahead counter becomes "0" (the fluctuation to be notified At the timing when the display is started), the operating section vibration effect is executed as the notice effect during fluctuation, and the stick controller 31A becomes a special mode (vibration mode). That is, when the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration effect is determined to be the vibration pattern B, unlike the case where the vibration pattern is determined to be the vibration pattern A, the start winning timing and the value of the second look-ahead counter are "n-". At the timing when the variable display of 1" to "1" is started, the operation section vibration effect is not executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A becomes the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

(Vibration pattern A)
In the example shown in FIGS. 12-14 (A1) to (A4), it is determined to execute a change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) (step S07TM1020) , the change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), it is determined to execute the operation part vibration effect (step S07TM2010), and the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration effect is determined to be vibration pattern A (step S07TM2040).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , decorative symbols are variably displayed, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbol variability is displayed.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the reserved display area 07TM011 displays two normal mode reserved displays 07TM001. . At this time, in the state where the number of first reserved memories is 2, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, a new start winning occurs and the second It is assumed that the number of 1 reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 changes effect (suspended change effect) as a pre-reading preview effect based on the reception of the command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased. is executed, and a special mode suspension display 07TM001B is newly displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011.

Also, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning occurring at this time, the second look-ahead counter is set and the number of first pending memories is 3. 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration effect as the vibration pattern A, so that the operation part vibration effect is generated as the pre-reading notice effect. is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to a special mode (vibration mode) at the timing of the start winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 2. 07TM001B and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect as vibration pattern A, and 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on the presence of the stick controller 31A, an operating section vibration effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to a special mode (vibration mode) at the timing when the pending display is shifted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 1. hold display 07TM001B is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect as vibration pattern A, and 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on the presence of the stick controller 31A, an operating section vibration effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to a special mode (vibration mode) at the timing when the pending display is shifted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the subject of the notice, the effect control CPU 120 changes the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and a special mode active display 07TM003B is displayed in the active display area 07TM013. is displayed, and the special mode pending display 07TM001B displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect as vibration pattern A, and 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on that, the operation unit vibration effect is executed as the notice effect during the change, and the timing at which the target change display is executed (the special mode hold display corresponding to the target change display is shifted to the active display area 07TM013 The mode of the stick controller 31A is set to the special mode (vibration mode) at the timing of the active display).

(Vibration pattern B)
In Figures 12-14 (B1) to (B4), it is determined to execute a change effect in the effect determination process (see Figures 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning (step S07TM1020 ), the change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), the execution of the operation unit vibration presentation is determined (step S07TM2010), and the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration presentation is determined to be vibration pattern B (step S07TM2140). .

First, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , decorative symbols are variably displayed, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbol variability is displayed.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the reserved display area 07TM011 displays two normal mode reserved displays 07TM001. . At this time, in the state where the number of first reserved memories is 2, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, a new start winning occurs and the second It is assumed that the number of 1 reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect (suspended change effect) as a look-ahead preview effect based on the reception of the command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased. is executed, and a special mode suspension display 07TM001B is newly displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011.

Also, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning occurring at this time, the second look-ahead counter is set and the number of first pending memories is 3. 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation part vibration effect based on the fact that the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration effect is determined as the vibration pattern B. , the mode of the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 2. 07TM001B and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be the vibration pattern B, and 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on the fact that the stick controller 31A is in the non-special mode (non-vibration mode), the operation unit vibration effect is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 1. hold display 07TM001B is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect as the vibration pattern B, and 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on this, the operation section vibration effect is not executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A remains in the special mode (vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-14 (B4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol targeted for notice, the effect control CPU 120 changes the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and a special mode active display 07TM003B is displayed in the active display area 07TM013. is displayed, and the special mode pending display 07TM001B displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter.

As shown in FIG. 12-14 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect to be vibration pattern B, and 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. Based on this, the operation unit vibration effect is executed as the notice effect during the change, and the timing at which the target change display is executed (the special mode pending display corresponding to the target change display is shifted to the active display area 07TM013 and becomes the active display The mode of the stick controller 31A is set to the special mode (vibration mode) at the time when the vibration occurs.

Thus, when the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration effect is the vibration pattern A, the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing of the starting prize based on the determination result at the time of the starting prize, and after the starting prize, the starting prize is reached. The stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the variable display executed prior to the variable display corresponding to the winning is started (timing when the pending memory is consumed and the pending display is shifted), and after the start winning The stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start winning (the variable display which is the target of the operation section vibration effect) is started. In other words, the operation unit vibration effect is executed as a pre-reading foretelling effect, and is also executed as a during-fluctuation foretelling effect.

On the other hand, when the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration effect is the vibration pattern B, the timing of the starting winning, and the variable display executed prior to the variable display corresponding to the starting winning after the starting winning is started. At this timing, the stick controller 31A does not vibrate, and the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the start winning (variable display that is the target of the operation section vibration effect) is started based on the determination result at the time of the start winning. The stick controller 31A vibrates only at . In other words, the operation section vibration effect is executed only as the in-fluctuation notice effect without being executed as the pre-reading notice effect.

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a timer flag (see steps S07TM3070 and S07TM3170), which will be described later, is set (step S07TM3000). If the timer flag is set (YES in step S07TM3000), the process proceeds to step S07TM4000.

Here, the fact that the timer flag is set means that either the timer standby effect or the timer effect has already been executed or the timer effect has already been executed for any variable display different from the variable display corresponding to the start winning. Therefore, in such a case, execution of further timer effects (and timer standby effects) is prohibited.

When the timer flag is not set (NO in step S07TM3000), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern determined at the time of starting winning, that is, the variation pattern specified by the variation category command is a variation accompanied by super reach. It is determined whether or not there is a pattern ("super reach lost" or "super reach jackpot") (step S07TM3010). If the variation pattern is not accompanied by super reach (if the variation pattern is not "super reach miss" or "super reach jackpot") (NO in step S07TM3010), the process proceeds to step S07TM4000.

If the variation pattern is accompanied by super reach (if the variation pattern is "loss of super reach" or "big hit of super reach") (YES in step S07TM3010), it is determined whether or not timer effect is to be executed. Determined based on the table (see FIG. 12-15(A)) (step S07TM3020). That is, in the present embodiment, when neither the variable display corresponding to the start winning nor the different variable display is executed, neither the timer standby effect nor the timer effect is executed, and the timer effect is not determined to be executed. In addition, the timer effect can be executed.

FIG. 12-15(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution/non-execution determination table for the timer effect. As shown in FIG. 12-15(A), in this embodiment, the judgment values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the timer effect differs according to the display result.

When the display result is "no" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "no"), it is decided not to execute the timer effect at a rate of 90%, and at a rate of 10%. It decides to execute the timer effect at a rate. On the other hand, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), it is determined not to execute the timer effect at a rate of 80%. It is decided to execute the timer effect at the rate of %.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the timer effect (step S07TM3030). If it is decided not to execute the timer effect (NO in step S07TM3030), the process proceeds to step S07TM4000.

If it is decided to execute the timer effect (YES in step 07TM3030), effect control CPU 120 determines whether a later-described effect limit flag (see FIGS. 12-19) is set (step S07TM3040). ). If the effect limit flag is not set (NO at step S07TM3040), the process proceeds from step S07TM3050, and if the effect limit flag is set (YES at step S07TM3040), the process starts at step S07TM3150. proceed.

If the production limit flag is not set (NO in step S07TM3040), the production control CPU 120 sets the timer display pattern for the timer production to the timer display pattern determination table for the timer production (see FIG. 12-15(B)). (step S07TM3050). Here, in the timer display pattern A, the timer standby effect is executed when the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is being executed, and the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is executed. This is an effect pattern for executing a timer effect when the player is in the state, and is an effect pattern corresponding to both the pre-reading foretelling effect and the during-fluctuation foretelling effect.

Next, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the timer effect, it sets the third look-ahead counter (step S07TM3060) and sets the timer flag (step S07TM3070).

During the period in which the timer flag is set, even if a new start-up prize occurs, the timer corresponding to the new start-up prize (new first reserved memory) is set by determining YES in step S07TM3000. No performance is performed. The timer flag is cleared when the variation display (so-called target variation) targeted for the timer effect is completed.

On the other hand, when the production restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM3040), the production control CPU 120 sets the timer display pattern for the timer production to the timer display pattern determination table for the timer production (FIG. 12-15(B)). reference), the vibration pattern B (see FIGS. 12-16) is determined (step S07TM3150). Here, in the timer display pattern B, the variable display corresponding to the start winning is executed without executing the timer standby effect when the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the start winning is being executed. This is a performance pattern in which a timer performance is executed when the game is on, and is a performance pattern that does not correspond to the pre-reading notice performance but corresponds to the fluctuation notice performance.

Next, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the timer effect, it sets the third look-ahead counter (step S07TM3160) and sets the timer flag (step S07TM3170).

(Timer display pattern for timer effect)
12-16 (A1) to (A4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the timer display pattern A is selected as the timer display pattern for the timer effect. 12-16 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the timer display pattern B is selected as the timer display pattern for the timer effect.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the timer effect in the start winning effect determination process associated with the start winning, the number of first reserved memories is n (n=1, 2, 3, 4) at this time. Based on this, "n" is set as the value of the third lookahead counter. When the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern A, from the timing of the start winning, the timing of the end of the variable display where the value of the third look-ahead counter is "1" (symbol after variable display (including the fixed stop period), the timer standby effect is continuously executed, the standby image 07TM300a is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and the variable display in which the value of the third look-ahead counter becomes "0" is started. At this timing (the timing at which the variable display to be notified is started), the timer effect is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen.

On the other hand, if the timer display pattern for the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern B, the timing at which the variable display at which the value of the third look-ahead counter becomes "0" (the At the timing when the display is started), the timer effect is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. That is, when the timer display pattern B is determined as the timer effect pattern, unlike the case where the timer display pattern A is determined, the timer standby effect is not executed.

(Timer display pattern A)
In the example shown in FIGS. 12-16 (A1) to (A4), it is decided to execute a change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning. (Step S07TM1020), the change pattern 303 is determined (Step S07TM1050), it is determined to execute the timer effect (Step S07TM3020), and the timer display pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern A (Step S07TM3050). ).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , decorative symbols are variably displayed, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbol variability is displayed.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the reserved display area 07TM011 displays two normal mode reserved displays 07TM001. . At this time, in the state where the number of first reserved memories is 2, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, a new start winning occurs and the second It is assumed that the number of 1 reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 changes effect (suspended change effect) as a pre-reading preview effect based on the reception of the command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased. is executed, and a special mode suspension display 07TM001B is newly displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011.

In addition, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning that occurred at this time, the third prefetch counter is set and the number of first reserved memories is 3. 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 determines timer display pattern A as the timer display pattern for the timer effect. to display the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 2. 07TM001B and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern for the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on the fact that the player is waiting, the timer standby effect, which is the pre-reading notice effect, is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 1. hold display 07TM001B is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern for the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on the fact that the player is waiting, the timer standby effect, which is the pre-reading notice effect, is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters "preparing") is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol targeted for notice, the effect control CPU 120 changes the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and a special mode active display 07TM003B is displayed in the active display area 07TM013. is displayed, and the special mode pending display 07TM001B displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern for the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on the fact that the time is changed, a timer effect, which is a notice effect during fluctuation, is executed, and a timer image 07TM300 (displaying characters "00:59") is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 instead of the standby image 07TM300a. Let

(Timer display pattern B)
In the example shown in FIGS. 12-16 (B1) to (B4), it is decided to execute a change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning. (Step S07TM1020), the change pattern 303 is determined (Step S07TM1050), it is determined to execute the timer effect (Step S07TM3020), and the timer display pattern for the timer effect is determined to be the timer display pattern B (Step S07TM3150). ).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , decorative symbols are variably displayed, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbol variability is displayed.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the reserved display area 07TM011 displays two normal mode reserved displays 07TM001. . At this time, in the state where the number of first reserved memories is 2, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, a new start winning occurs and the second It is assumed that the number of 1 reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect (suspended change effect) as a pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased. is executed, and a special mode suspension display 07TM001B is newly displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011.

In addition, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning that occurred at this time, the third prefetch counter is set and the number of first reserved memories is 3. 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 determines timer display pattern B as the timer display pattern for the timer effect. is not executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 2. 07TM001B and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the timer display pattern for the timer effect is the timer display pattern B, and that 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on this, the timer standby effect, which is the preview effect, is not executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 1. hold display 07TM001B is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern B, and 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on this, the timer standby effect, which is the preview effect, is not executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (B4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol targeted for notice, the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and a special mode active display 07TM003B is displayed in the active display area 07TM013. is displayed, and the special mode pending display 07TM001B displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern B as the timer display pattern for the timer effect, and 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. Based on this, the timer effect, which is the notice effect during fluctuation, is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 (the characters “00:59” are displayed) is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Thus, when the timer display pattern of the timer effect is the timer display pattern A, from the timing of the start winning based on the determination result at the time of the start winning, from the timing of the starting winning, after the starting winning, from the variable display corresponding to the starting winning. Until the timing when the variable display executed earlier ends (including the pattern fixing stop period after the variable display ends), the timer standby effect, which is a pre-reading notice effect, is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. is displayed continuously, and at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start winning (variable display that is the target of the timer effect) starts after the start winning, the timer effect that is the notice effect during the change is executed, and the lower right of the screen Instead of the standby image 07TM300a, the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the area.

On the other hand, when the timer display pattern of the timer effect is the timer display pattern B, the timer standby effect is not executed (the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed), and based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. After the start winning, at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start winning (variable display as the target of the timer effect) is started, the timer effect, which is the notice effect during the change, is executed, and the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen. It is

Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a special background flag (see steps S07TM4060 and S07TM4160), which will be described later, is set (step S07TM4000). If the special background flag is set (YES in step S07TM4000), the process ends.

Here, the fact that the special background flag is set means that the special background effect has already been executed or the special background effect will be executed for any variable display different from the variable display corresponding to the start winning. Therefore, in such a case, execution of further special background effects is prohibited.

If the special background flag is not set (NO in step S07TM4000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special background effect is to be executed. (step S07TM4010). That is, in the present embodiment, when the special background effect is not executed and it is not decided to execute the special background effect for any of the variable display corresponding to the start winning and the different variable display, the special It becomes possible to execute the background production.

FIG. 12-17(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the special background effect execution/non-execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 12-17(A), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the special background effect differs according to the display result.

If the display result is "missing" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), 95% of the time it is determined not to execute the special background effect, and 5% It is decided to execute the special background effect at the ratio of On the other hand, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), it is determined not to execute the special background presentation at a rate of 85%, It is decided to execute the special background rendering at a rate of 15%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the special background effect (step S07TM4020). If it has been determined not to execute the special background effect (NO in step S07TM4020), the process ends.

If it is decided to execute the special background effect (YES in step 07TM4020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a later-described effect restriction flag (see FIGS. 12-19) is set (step S07TM4030). If the production limit flag is not set (NO at step S07TM4030), the process proceeds from step S07TM4040, and if the production limit flag is set (YES at step S07TM4030), the process starts at step S07TM4140. proceed.

If the production restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM4030), the production control CPU 120 selects the background image display pattern for the special background production from the background image display pattern determination table for the special background production (Fig. 12-17 ( B)), the background image display pattern A (see FIGS. 12-18) is determined (step S07TM4040). Here, the background image display pattern A is special both when the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is executed and when the variable display corresponding to the start winning is executed. This is a background change pattern for displaying the background image 07TM400 (switching the background image from the normal background image to the special background image).

Next, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the special background effect, it sets the fourth look-ahead counter (step S07TM4050) and sets the special background flag (step S07TM4060).

During the period when the special background flag is set, even if a new start-up prize is generated, the above-mentioned step S07TM4000 is judged to be YES, so that the new start-up prize (new first reserved memory) is dealt with. No special background effect is executed. The special background flag is cleared when the variable display (so-called target variation) targeted for the special background effect is completed.

On the other hand, if the production restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM4030), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image display pattern for the special background production to the background image display pattern determination table for the special background production (Fig. 12- 17(B)), the background image display pattern B (see FIG. 12-18) is determined (step S07TM4140). Here, the background image display pattern B does not display the special background image 07TM400 when the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the start winning is being executed (the background image is switched to the normal background image). ), the special background image 07TM400 is displayed only when the variable display corresponding to the start winning is executed (the background image is switched from the normal background image to the special background image). This is a background change pattern that does not correspond and corresponds to the notice effect during fluctuation.

Next, if the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the special background effect, it sets the fourth look-ahead counter (step S07TM4150) and sets the timer flag (step S07TM4160).

(Background image display pattern for special background effects)
12-18 (A1) to (A4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image display pattern A is selected as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. 12-18 (B1) to (B4) show an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image display pattern B is selected as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing.

In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the special background effect in the effect determination process at the time of start winning accompanying the start winning, at this time the number of first reserved memories is n (n=1, 2, 3, 4). Based on something, "n" is set as the value of the fourth lookahead counter. If the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined as the background image display pattern A, the variable display (variable display of the target) where the value of the fourth look-ahead counter is "0" from the timing of the start winning. Until the end timing (including the pattern confirmation stop period after the variable display), the special background effect is continuously executed, and the background image of the decorative pattern is a special background that shows a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains, and volcanic smoke. Image 07TM400 continues to be displayed. In this case, from the timing of the start winning, the timing of the end of the variable display (variable display immediately before the variable display of the target) where the value of the fourth look-ahead counter is "1" (the symbol confirmation stop period after the variable display) ) corresponds to the pre-reading announcement effect, and the timing when the variable display (target variable display) where the value of the fourth pre-reading counter is "0" is started (the variable display that is subject to the notice is started), the special background effect after that corresponds to the notice effect during fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined to be the background image display pattern B, the timing at which the variable display at which the value of the fourth look-ahead counter becomes "0" At the timing when the variable display is started), the special background effect is executed as the notice effect during the change, and the special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. That is, when the background image display pattern B is determined as the special background effect pattern, unlike the case where the background image display pattern A is determined, the special background effect as the pre-reading preview effect is not executed. , only the special background effect as the notice effect during fluctuation is executed.

(Background image display pattern A)
In the example shown in FIGS. 12-18 (A1) to (A4), it is determined to execute a change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) (step S07TM1020) , the change pattern 303 is determined (step S07TM1050), execution of the special background effect is determined (step S07TM4010), and background image display pattern A is determined as the background image display pattern for the special background effect (step S07TM4040). ).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , decorative symbols are variably displayed, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbol variability is displayed.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the reserved display area 07TM011 displays two normal mode reserved displays 07TM001. . At this time, in the state where the number of first reserved memories is 2, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, a new start winning occurs and the second It is assumed that the number of 1 reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 changes effect (suspended change effect) as a pre-reading preview effect based on the reception of the command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased. is executed, and a special mode suspension display 07TM001B is newly displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011.

In addition, in this example, in the start winning effect determination processing (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning that occurred at this time, the fourth prefetch counter is set and the first reserved storage number is 3 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A1), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern A as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. A background performance is executed, and at the timing of starting prize winning, a control for switching the background image of the decoration pattern from the normal background image to the special background image 07TM400 is executed to display the special background image 07TM400.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 2. 07TM001B and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 has determined that the background image display pattern for the special background effect is the background image display pattern A, and the value of the fourth look-ahead counter is 2. Based on the fact that it is set, the special background effect is continuously executed as the pre-reading notice effect, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 1. hold display 07TM001B is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern for the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and the value of the fourth look-ahead counter is 1. Based on the fact that it is set, the special background effect is continuously executed as the pre-reading notice effect, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol targeted for notice, the effect control CPU 120 changes the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and a special mode active display 07TM003B is displayed in the active display area 07TM013. is displayed, and the special mode pending display 07TM001B displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern for the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and the value of the fourth look-ahead counter is 0. Based on the fact that it is set, the special background effect is continuously executed as the notice effect during fluctuation, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern.

(Background image display pattern B)
In the example shown in FIGS. 12-18 (B1) to (B4), it is decided to execute a change effect in the start winning effect determination process (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning. (Step S07TM1020), the change pattern 303 is determined (Step S07TM1050), execution of the special background effect is determined (Step S07TM4010), and background image display pattern B is determined as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. (Step S07TM4140).

First, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B1), when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , decorative symbols are variably displayed, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, small symbol variability is displayed.

Further, the active display area 07TM013 displays the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the reserved display area 07TM011 displays two normal mode reserved displays 07TM001. . At this time, in the state where the number of first reserved memories is 2, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed, a new start winning occurs and the second It is assumed that the number of 1 reserved memories is 3.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 changes effect (suspended change effect) as a pre-reading preview effect based on the reception of the command indicating that the number of first pending memories has increased. is executed, and a special mode suspension display 07TM001B is newly displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011.

In addition, in this example, in the start winning effect determination processing (see FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7) associated with the start winning that occurred at this time, the fourth prefetch counter is set and the first reserved storage number is 3 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B1), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background image display pattern B as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. The normal background image is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern without executing the background effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 2. 07TM001B and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 has determined background image display pattern B as the background image display pattern for the special background effect, and 2 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. Based on the presence of the background image, the normal background image is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern without executing the special background effect as the pre-reading notice effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 1. hold display 07TM001B is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern B as the background image display pattern for the special background effect, and 1 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. Based on the presence of the background image, the normal background image is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern without executing the special background effect as the pre-reading notice effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-18 (B4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol targeted for notice, the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and a special mode active display 07TM003B is displayed in the active display area 07TM013. is displayed, and the special mode pending display 07TM001B displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter.

As shown in FIG. 12-18 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern B as the background image display pattern for the special background effect, and 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. A special background effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation, and a special background image 07TM400 is displayed as a background image of the decoration pattern.

In this way, when the background image display pattern of the special background effect is the background image display pattern A, the timing of the starting winning is determined based on the determination result at the time of the starting winning, and after the starting winning, the starting winning is handled. Until the timing when the variable display executed prior to the variable display ends (including the pattern fixing stop period), the special background effect as the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. After the starting prize, at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the starting prize (variable display that is the target of the special background effect) is started, the special background effect as the notice effect during the change is executed, and the background image of the decorative pattern A special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, if the background image display pattern of the special background effect is the background image display pattern B, the variable display corresponding to the start winning after the start win based on the determination result at the time of the start win (target of the special background effect At the timing when a certain variable display) is started, a special background effect is executed as an in-varying notice effect, and a special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. That is, when the background image display pattern B is determined, unlike the case where the background image display pattern A is determined, the special background effect is not executed.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content ( Reach, pseudo-run, etc.), based on the reception of a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbols is executed, and the special symbols It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the contents of the production (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 12-19 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of variation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start shown in FIGS. 12-19 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 12-19.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (the variation pattern of the variation display to be executed from now on) is "normal reach" or "super reach" (step S07TM5000). . If the variation pattern is neither "normal reach" nor "super reach" (NO in step S07TM5000), the process ends.

If the variation pattern is either "normal reach" or "super reach" (YES in step S07TM5000), effect control CPU 120 sets the effect limit flag (step S07TM5010) and ends the process.

As shown in FIGS. 12-6 and 12-7, during the period when the production restriction flag is set, even if a new start winning is generated, it is determined as YES in step S07TM2030 described above, and the operation unit vibrates. When the vibration pattern of the effect becomes the vibration pattern B, the operation part vibration effect is not executed at the time of the new start winning, and the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode). Even in the variable display executed before the corresponding variable display (variable display before the target change), the operation section vibration effect is not executed and the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode). In addition, when it is determined to be YES in step S07TM3040 described above and the timer display pattern of the timer effect becomes the timer display pattern B, the timer standby effect is not executed at the time of the new start winning, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed. Even in the variable display executed before the variable display corresponding to the new start winning (variable display before the target change), the timer standby effect is not executed and the standby image 07TM300a remains hidden. In addition, the above-mentioned step S07TM4030 is determined to be YES, and the background image display pattern of the special background effect becomes the background image display pattern B, so that the special background effect is not executed at the time of the new start winning, and the background image is the normal background. It remains as an image, and even if the variable display (variable display before the target change) is executed before the variable display corresponding to the new start winning, the special background effect is not executed and the background image remains the normal background image. is. The performance limit flag is cleared when the variation display (variation display of the variation pattern with normal reach or super reach) for which the performance limit flag is set is completed.

(Example of production when the production restriction flag is not set)
Next, the production restriction flag is not set, and the change production is executed for the suspended display corresponding to the variable display that was the judgment target at the time of the start winning, and the operation part vibration production, timer An example of the effect when it is decided to execute the effect and the special background effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-20 and 12-21.

FIG. 12-20 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the change effect, the operation part vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect, and FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to a timer effect and a special background effect;

In this example, in the effect determination process at the time of variation start, based on the fact that the variation pattern of the variable display being executed was "non-reach out", it was determined as NO in step S07TM5000, and the effect control CPU 120 It is assumed that it is decided not to set the production restriction flag.

Further, in the present example, in the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the change effect in step S07TM1020, determines the change pattern to be the change pattern 310 in step S07TM1050, and sets the change pattern to step S07TM1050. In S07TM2010, it is decided to execute the operation section vibration effect, in step S07TM2040 it is decided to set the vibration pattern to vibration pattern A, in step S07TM3020 it is decided to execute the timer effect, and in step S07TM3050 the timer display pattern is changed. It is assumed that the timer display pattern A is decided, the special background effect is decided to be executed in step S07TM4010, and the background image pattern is decided to be the background image pattern A in step S07TM4040.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-20), the effect control CPU 120 executes a variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the small Start the variable display of the pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved storage number is 2. In response to this, two suspension displays 07TM001 in the normal mode are displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011 of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not set the effect limit flag.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21(2), in the state where the first reserved memory number is 2, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is executed. At this time, it is assumed that a new start winning has occurred and the first reserved memory number has become 3 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 12-20). In the performance determination processing at the time of start winning accompanying the start winning generated at this time, a change inhibition flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories is 3. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (suspended change effect) as a pre-reading notice effect based on the fact that the change pattern of the change effect is determined as the change pattern 310, and displays a red mode pending display in the pending display area 07TM011. 07TM001A is newly displayed.

In addition, in the start winning performance determination process associated with the start winning that occurred at this time, the operation unit vibration flag is set, and based on the first reserved memory number being 3, 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. set. The effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration effect as the vibration pattern A, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is 3, executes the operation part vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect, The mode of the stick controller 31A is a special mode (vibration mode).

In addition, in the start winning effect determination processing associated with the start winning generated at this time, a timer flag is set, and based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. . The effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern for the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and based on the fact that the value of the third look-ahead counter is 3, executes the timer standby effect, which is the look-ahead preview effect, A standby image 07TM300a (displaying characters “preparing”) is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Also, in the start-up prize-time effect determination process associated with the start-up prize generated at this time, a special background flag is set, and based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. do. The effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern for the special background effect to be the background image display pattern A, and based on the fact that the value of the fourth look-ahead counter is 3, executes the special background effect as the look-ahead preview effect. A special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 12-20), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decoration symbols (in this example, "567") is confirmed and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("567" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, during the symbol fixing stop period, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation part vibration effect, and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to a non-special mode (non-vibrating mode). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer standby effect based on the fact that the timer display pattern for the timer effect has been determined as the timer display pattern A, and displays a The standby image 07TM300a (displaying characters "preparing") is continuously displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the special background effect based on the fact that the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined as the background image display pattern A, and the special background effect is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. The image 07TM400 is continuously displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (4), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started ( timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-20).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode and the red mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 as the first reserved storage number becomes 2. 07TM001A and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one toward the active display area 07TM013. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of each of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines the vibration pattern A as the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration effect, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, the operation part A vibration effect is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern for the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer standby which is the look-ahead notice effect The effect is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters “in preparation”) is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern of the special background effect to be the background image display pattern A, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the fourth prefetch counter, The special background effect is continuously executed, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 12-20), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decoration symbols ("234" in this example) is fixed and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("234" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, during the symbol fixing stop period, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation part vibration effect, and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to a non-special mode (non-vibrating mode). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer standby effect based on the fact that the timer display pattern for the timer effect has been determined as the timer display pattern A, and displays a The standby image 07TM300a (displaying characters "preparing") is continuously displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the special background effect based on the fact that the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined as the background image display pattern A, and the special background effect is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. The image 07TM400 is continuously displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started ( timing of T6 shown in FIG. 12-20).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode in accordance with the number of the first reserved memories becoming 1, and the red mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011. is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side, and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the values of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration effect as the vibration pattern A, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the second prefetch counter, the operation part A vibration effect is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set as a special mode (vibration mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern for the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the third prefetching counter, the timer standby which is the prefetching notice effect The effect is continuously executed, and the standby image 07TM300a (displaying the characters “in preparation”) is continuously displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern of the special background effect to be the background image display pattern A, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the fourth prefetch counter, The special background effect is continuously executed, and the special background image 07TM400 is continuously displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 12-20), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "345") is determined and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("345" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, during the symbol fixing stop period, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the operation part vibration effect, and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to a non-special mode (non-vibrating mode). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer standby effect based on the fact that the timer display pattern for the timer effect has been determined as the timer display pattern A, and displays a The standby image 07TM300a (displaying characters "preparing") is continuously displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the special background effect based on the fact that the background image display pattern of the special background effect is determined as the background image display pattern A, and the special background effect is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. The image 07TM400 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (8), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the target of the notice (variable display that is the target), the effect control CPU 120 , based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, start the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the small pattern display area 5l of the image display device 5. , 5c and 5r, the variable display of the small symbols is started (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 12-20).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the active display area 07TM013 is displayed in a red mode. The active display 07TM003A is displayed, and the red pending display 07TM001A displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the values of the first prefetch counter, the second prefetch counter, the third prefetch counter, and the fourth prefetch counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect as the vibration pattern A, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, the operation is performed as the notice effect during fluctuation. A partial vibration effect is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to a special mode (vibration mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern for the timer effect to be the timer display pattern A, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer which is the notice effect during fluctuation is set. An effect is executed, and a timer image 07TM300 (displaying characters “00:59”) is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern A, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter, the variable notice effect , the special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative design.

(Example of production when the production restriction flag is set)
Next, the production restriction flag is set, and the change production is executed for the pending display corresponding to the variable display that was the target of the judgment at the time of starting winning, and the operation part vibration production and timer production are performed at the time of starting winning. , and examples of effects when it is decided not to execute the special background effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-22 to 12-24.

FIG. 12-22 is a time chart showing execution timings of effects related to changing effects, and FIGS. 12-23 and 12-24 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to changing effects.

In this example, the effect limit flag is set by determining YES in step S07TM5000 based on the fact that the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is "no normal reach" in the effect determination process at the start of variation. shall be determined to

Further, in the present example, in the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the change effect in step S07TM1020, determines the change pattern to be the change pattern 303 in step S07TM1050, and sets the change pattern to step S07TM1050. It is assumed that in S07TM2010 it is decided not to execute the operation section vibration effect, in step S07TM3020 it is decided not to execute the timer effect, and in step S07TM4010 it is determined not to execute the special background effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-22), the effect control CPU 120 executes a variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the small Start the variable display of the pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved storage number is 2. In response to this, two suspension displays 07TM001 in the normal mode are displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011 of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect limit flag.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pattern of the image display device 5 at the timing (timing T2 shown in FIG. 12-22) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern. A ready-to-win state is set by stop-displaying the decoration pattern of "4" in the area 5L and the pattern display area 5R, and characters of "ready-to-win!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (3), in the state where the first reserved memory number is 2, it is assumed that a new start winning has occurred and the first reserved memory number has become 3 (FIG. 12-22 timing of T3 shown in ). In the performance determination processing at the time of start winning accompanying the start winning generated at this time, a change inhibition flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories is 3. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (suspended change effect) as a pre-reading preview effect based on the fact that the change pattern of the change effect is determined as the change pattern 303, and displays a special mode pending display in the pending display area 07TM011. 07TM001B is newly displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-22), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decorative symbols ("434" in this example) is determined and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("434" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (5), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started ( timing of T5 shown in FIG. 12-22).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 2. 07TM001B and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 12-22), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decoration symbols ("234" in this example) is fixed and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("234" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (7), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started ( timing of T7 shown in FIG. 12-22).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 1. is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side, and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 12-22), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "345") is determined and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("345" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (9), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol to be announced (the target variable display), the effect control CPU 120 , based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, start the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the small pattern display area 5l of the image display device 5. , 5c and 5r, the variable display of the small symbols is started (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 12-22).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the special mode is displayed in the active display area 07TM013. The active display 07TM003B is displayed, and the special mode pending display 07TM001B displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter.

Next, when the production limit flag is set, based on the determination at the time of starting winning, the production when it is decided to execute all of the change production operation section vibration production, timer production, and special background production Examples are described with reference to FIGS. 12-25 to 12-27.

FIG. 12-25 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the change effect, the operation section vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect, and FIGS. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to an operation section vibration effect, a timer effect, and a special background effect;

In this example, the effect limit flag is set by determining YES in step S07TM5000 based on the fact that the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is "no normal reach" in the effect determination process at the start of variation. shall be determined to

Further, in this example, in the start winning effect determination process, it is determined to execute the change effect in step S07TM1020, the change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 303 in step S07TM1150, and the operation unit vibration effect is determined in step S07TM2010. is determined to be executed, the vibration pattern is determined to be vibration pattern B in step S07TM2140, the timer effect is determined to be executed in step S07TM3020, and the timer display pattern is set to timer display pattern B in step S07TM3150. In step S07TM4010, it is decided to execute a special background effect, and in step S07TM4140, it is decided to set background image pattern B as the background image pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-25), the effect control CPU 120 executes a variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the small Start the variable display of the pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 of the image display device 5 to display the normal mode active display 07TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first reserved storage number is 2. In response to this, two suspension displays 07TM001 in the normal mode are displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011 of the image display device 5 . At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect limit flag.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pattern of the image display device 5 at the timing (timing T2 shown in FIG. 12-25) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern. A ready-to-win state is set by stop-displaying the decoration pattern of "4" in the area 5L and the pattern display area 5R, and characters of "ready-to-win!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (3), in the state where the first reserved memory number is 2, it is assumed that a new start winning has occurred and the first reserved memory number has become 3 (FIG. 12-25 timing of T3 shown in ). In the performance determination processing at the time of start winning accompanying the start winning generated at this time, a change inhibition flag is set, and 3 is set as the value of the first look-ahead counter based on the fact that the number of first reserved memories is 3. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect (suspended change effect) as a pre-reading preview effect based on the fact that the change pattern of the change effect is determined as the change pattern 303, and suspends the special mode in the suspend display area 07TM011. Display 07TM001B is newly displayed.

In the start winning effect determination processing associated with the start winning generated at this time, the operation unit vibration flag is set, and based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter. . The effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation part vibration effect as the vibration pattern B, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is 3, executes the operation part vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect. First, the mode of the stick controller 31A is a non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

In addition, in the start winning effect determination processing associated with the start winning generated at this time, a timer flag is set, and based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter. . The effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern B, and based on the fact that the value of the third look-ahead counter is 3, does not execute the timer standby effect, which is the look-ahead preview effect. , the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

Also, in the start-up prize-time effect determination process associated with the start-up prize generated at this time, a special background flag is set, and based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 3, 3 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter. do. The effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern B as the background image display pattern for the special background effect, and based on the fact that the value of the fourth look-ahead counter is 3, the special background effect as the look-ahead preview effect is executed. The normal background image is displayed without displaying the special background image 07TM400 as the background image of the decoration design.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-25), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decorative symbols ("434" in this example) is determined and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("434" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (5), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started ( timing of T5 shown in FIG. 12-25).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 2. 07TM001B and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 are shifted one by one to the active display area 07TM013 side. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 2, 2 is set as the value of each of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration effect as the vibration pattern B, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the second prefetch counter, the operation as the prefetch notice effect is performed. The mode of the stick controller 31A is set to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode) without executing the partial vibration effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern B, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer standby which is the look-ahead notice effect No effect is executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern B, and based on the fact that 2 is set as the value of the fourth prefetch counter, , the special background image 07TM400 is not displayed as the background image of the decorative design, and the normal background image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 12-25), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decoration symbols ("234" in this example) is fixed and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("234" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (7), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started ( timing of T7 shown in FIG. 12-25).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 07TM013 to display the active display 07TM003 of the normal mode and the special mode displayed in the reserved display area 07TM011 in accordance with the number of the first pending memories becoming 1. is shifted by one to the active display area 07TM013 side, and the normal mode suspension display 07TM001 displayed in the suspension display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 1, 1 is set as the values of the first look-ahead counter, the second look-ahead counter, the third look-ahead counter, and the fourth look-ahead counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration effect to the vibration pattern B, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, the operation as the look-ahead notice effect is performed. The mode of the stick controller 31A is set to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode) without executing the partial vibration effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern of the timer effect as the timer display pattern B, and based on the fact that 1 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer standby which is the look-ahead notice effect No effect is executed, and the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern B, and based on the fact that the value of the fourth prefetch counter is set to 1, the effect control CPU 120 selects , the special background image 07TM400 is not displayed as the background image of the decorative design, and the normal background image is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 12-25), the effect control CPU 120 displays the image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "345") is determined and stopped, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed. The combination ("345" in this example) is fixed and stopped. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (9), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol that is the target of the notice (variable display that is the target), the effect control CPU 120 , based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, start the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the small pattern display area 5l of the image display device 5. , 5c and 5r, the variable display of small symbols is started (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 12-25).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the change effect (active change effect) as the notice effect during fluctuation as the first reserved storage number becomes 0, and the special mode is displayed in the active display area 07TM013. The active display 07TM003B is displayed, and the special mode pending display 07TM001B displayed in the pending display area 07TM011 is erased. Also, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 0, 0 is set as the values of the first prefetch counter, the second prefetch counter, the third prefetch counter, and the fourth prefetch counter.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the vibration pattern of the operation unit vibration effect as the vibration pattern B, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the second look-ahead counter, the operation is performed as the notice effect during fluctuation. A partial vibration effect is executed, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to a special mode (vibration mode).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the timer display pattern of the timer effect to be the timer display pattern B, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the third look-ahead counter, the timer which is the notice effect during fluctuation An effect is executed, and a timer image 07TM300 (displaying characters “00:59”) is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has determined the background image display pattern of the special background effect as the background image display pattern B, and based on the fact that 0 is set as the value of the fourth look-ahead counter, the variable notice effect , the special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decorative design.

In the present embodiment, when a new start winning occurs and the hold display is displayed during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect, although the hold display can be displayed in a special mode, the blue mode or the The display is not made in the red mode, and the operation section vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is not executed. Supposing that the operation part vibration effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect during execution of the reach effect or the super reach effect, the operation part vibration effect suggests the display result of the variable display that is currently being executed. If there is, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand the reliability, etc. of the advance notice effect for the variable display that is currently being executed. In the present embodiment, such misrecognition of the player is prevented by not executing the operation section vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect.

In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the look-ahead notice effect from becoming excessively high, and the effect (reach It is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance, super reach performance). That is, it is possible to appropriately create interest in the look-ahead foretelling effect and the during-fluctuation foretelling effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is not prohibited to display the pending display in a mode other than the normal mode, and the pending display is changed to a special mode (a mode that suggests changing to a red mode with a high expectation of a big hit). ) allows the player to maintain interest in the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the effect (reach effect, super reach effect) that suggests whether or not a big hit will occur for the variable display that is being executed. It is also possible to draw attention to

In this embodiment, the image display device 5 executes an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display and the active display. In addition, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols, and also executes the ready-to-win effect, the super ready-to-win effect, etc. corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols. Therefore, the player normally pays attention to the information displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the stick controller 31A, which is an effect device different from the image display device 5, can be used to execute an operation unit vibration effect as a pre-reading preview effect.

Here, if the image display device 5 is executing a ready-to-win effect or a super ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variable display being executed, the variable display whose execution is suspended (the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied) When the operation section vibration effect using the stick controller 31A corresponding to the variable display that is not established is executed, the player's line of sight and consciousness will be shifted from the image display device 5 where the ready-to-win effect and super ready-to-win effect are being performed. It will move to the stick controller 31A. As a result, the degree of attention to the ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variable display being executed decreases.

Therefore, in this embodiment, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect and the super reach effect, as a pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended (the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) By limiting the execution of the operation section vibration presentation, the occurrence of such a problem is avoided and the decline in interest is suppressed.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) and an expectation suggesting effect during execution of the ready-to-win effect. As shown in FIG. 11-2, etc., the timer effect is a variation corresponding to a battle effect, which is a type of advance notice effect during fluctuation suggesting the display result of the variable display being executed (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied). This is an example of medium notice effect, and an example of change notice effect corresponding to expectation indication effect, which is a kind of change notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display being executed (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied). But also. The timer effect is started at the timing n seconds before the battle effect is executed (develops into super reach). In the timer effect, a timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At the timing when the timer image 07TM300 is displayed, the timer image 07TM300 indicates the initial value n (in this example, the numerical value "00:59" indicating 59 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to display the timer image 07TM300 corresponding to the execution of the battle effect before the execution of the battle effect, which is a kind of the notice effect during fluctuation, and before the execution of the expectation suggesting effect, which is a kind of notice effect during the change. , the timer image 07TM300 can be displayed corresponding to the execution of the battle effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when execution of the timer effect is determined based on the determination result of the start winning time determination based on the occurrence of winning in the start winning opening, in the area where the timer image 07TM300 is displayed, A timer standby effect for displaying a standby image 07TM300a that informs (suggests) that the timer effect will be executed in advance can be executed as a look-ahead notice effect. The standby image 07TM300a includes the words "preparing", after which the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the area to notify (suggest) that the timer effect will be executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect limit flag set at the start of the variable display whose variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach" is set, the timer effect is executed. When determined, the timer display pattern B is determined as the timer display pattern for the timer effect. As described above, in the timer display pattern B, the timer standby effect, which is the preview effect, is not executed from the timing when the starting prize is generated to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the notification. The standby image 07TM300a is not displayed in the lower right area of the screen. If the timer waiting effect, which is a pre-reading notice effect, is executed while the ready-to-win effect or super ready-to-win effect is being executed, the timer waiting effect suggests the display result of the variable display that is currently being executed. There is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the reliability, etc. of the advance notice effect for the variable display currently being executed. In this embodiment, such misrecognition of the player is prevented by not executing the timer standby effect, which is the pre-reading notice effect, while the ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect are being executed.

In addition, according to such a configuration, by limiting the execution of the timer standby effect, which is the pre-reading notice effect, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect from becoming excessively high. It is possible to suppress and draw the player's attention to the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. That is, it is possible to appropriately create interest in the look-ahead foretelling effect and the during-fluctuation foretelling effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is not prohibited to display the pending display in a mode other than the normal mode, and the pending display is changed to a special mode (a mode that suggests changing to a red mode with a high expectation of a big hit). ) allows the player to maintain interest in the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the effect (reach effect, super reach effect) that suggests whether or not a big hit will occur for the variable display that is being executed. It is also possible to draw attention to

In this embodiment, as described above, it is possible to execute a special background effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The special background effect is a preview effect in which the special background image 07TM400 is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. Here, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the production restriction flag which is set at the start of the variable display whose fluctuation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach" is set, the special background production is executed. , the background image display pattern B is determined as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. As described above, in the background image display pattern B, the special background effect, which is the pre-reading preview effect, is not executed from the timing when the starting prize is generated to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the notification, and the background of the decorative pattern is displayed. The special background image 07TM400 is not displayed as an image, and the normal background image is continuously displayed. If a special background effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect while the ready-to-win effect or super reach effect is being executed, the special background effect suggests the display result of the variable display that is currently being executed. There is a possibility that the player may misunderstand the reliability, etc. of the advance notice effect for the variable display currently being executed. In this embodiment, such misrecognition of the player is prevented by not executing the special background effect as the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect.

Further, according to such a configuration, by restricting the execution of the special background effect as the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect from becoming excessively high. It is possible to suppress and draw the player's attention to the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. That is, it is possible to appropriately create interest in the look-ahead foretelling effect and the during-fluctuation foretelling effect. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is not prohibited to display the pending display in a mode other than the normal mode, and the pending display is changed to a special mode (a mode that suggests changing to a red mode with a high expectation of a big hit). ) allows the player to maintain interest in the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the effect (reach effect, super reach effect) that suggests whether or not a big hit will occur for the variable display that is being executed. It is also possible to draw attention to

In the change pattern determination table B shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12, when it is determined that the final display mode of the active display will be the red mode, the pending display of the notice target at the time of starting winning is displayed in a special mode. change pattern (change pattern 103, change pattern 106, change pattern 203, change pattern 206, change pattern 303, change pattern 307, change pattern 403, and change pattern 407).

Therefore, when the variable display of "normal reach" or "super reach" is executed, the start winning is generated, and the hold display corresponding to the start win (hold display that is subject to notice) is a special mode is displayed, the form of the active display to be notified may change from the special form to the red form at a timing after the active shift including the active shift of the pending display.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display accompanied by the ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect is "missing", the player can see any of the pending displays in a special mode. Thus, after the pending display is shifted to the active display area (after becoming the active display), it can be expected that the display mode of the active display will change from the special mode to the red mode. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that the big hit was not achieved despite the execution of the super reach performance.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the change pattern determination table B, when the variable display accompanied by the ready-to-win effect or the super-to-win effect is executed at the time of the starting winning, the pending display (announcement target) corresponding to the starting winning ) is displayed in a special mode, the mode of the active display targeted for notice changes from the special mode to the red mode at a timing after the active shift including the time of the active shift of the pending display. I gave an example of what you might do.

However, not limited to such a form, when variable display with reach production and super reach production is executed at the time of starting winning, the holding display corresponding to the starting winning (holding display targeted for notice) is special When displayed in the mode, the pending display of the announcement target may change from the special mode to the red mode at the timing of the pending shift. For example, when a variable display with a ready-to-win effect or a super ready-to-win effect is being executed at the time of starting winning, when the pending display corresponding to the starting winning (holding display targeted for notice) is displayed in a special mode, At the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the notice target may change from the special mode to the red mode.

That is, during the period of the variable display accompanied by the ready-to-win effect and the super ready-to-win effect that are being executed at the time of the start winning, the pending display corresponding to the starting winning is not displayed in a red mode, but the ready-to-win effect and the super reach effect are not displayed. After the end of the variable display accompanied by the effect, the pending display corresponding to the start winning may change to a red mode. By adopting such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display accompanied by the ready-to-win effect or the super-to-win effect becomes "missing", the player can see any of the pending displays in a special mode. Since it can be expected that the display mode is changed from the special mode to the red mode by the presence of the player, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of not getting a big hit despite the execution of the ready-to-win performance or the super-to-win performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to continued restriction of the change of the pending display even after the end of the variable display, which has been a factor in restricting the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Note that, unlike the present embodiment, each time the pending display is shifted, it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the pending display, and if the display mode of the pending display is changed, the display mode after the change is determined. It is good also as a production|presentation determination method which performs the lottery process for doing. Then, when such a production determination method is adopted, if a variable display accompanied by a reach production or a super reach production is executed at the time of the start winning, a hold display corresponding to the start win (a hold display targeted for notice ) is displayed in a special mode, the display mode of the pending display may not be changed from the special mode at least at the stage of the pending display. This eliminates the need to execute lottery processing for changing the display mode of the pending display from the special mode to another mode for each pending shift, and can reduce the control load for determining the performance.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect limit flag is set at the start of the variable display whose variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach", it is decided to execute the operation unit vibration effect. When the control is performed, the vibration pattern B is determined as the vibration pattern of the operation section vibration presentation. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12-14 (B1) to (B4), the operation section vibration effect is not executed from the timing when the starting prize is generated until the variable display targeted for notice is started. The operation section vibration presentation is executed at the timing when the variable display targeted for notice is started.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect limit flag is set at the start of the variable display whose variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach", it is decided to execute the timer effect. Then, the timer display pattern B is determined as the timer display pattern for the timer effect. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12-16 (B1) to (B4), the timer standby effect is not executed from the timing when the starting prize is generated until the variable display targeted for the notice is started, and the notice A timer effect is executed at the timing when the target variable display is started.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the effect limit flag is set at the start of the variable display whose variation pattern is "normal reach" or "super reach", a special background effect is executed. When determined, the background image display pattern B is determined as the background image display pattern for the special background effect. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12-18 (B1) to (B4), the special background effect is not executed from the timing when the starting prize is generated until the variable display targeted for notice is started. A special background effect is executed at the timing when the variable display targeted for notice is started.

That is, as a result of the start winning during the period in which the reach effect or the super reach effect is being executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the start win (displaying the pending display in blue mode or red mode, operating unit vibration Even if the execution of production, execution of timer standby production, execution of special background production) is restricted, the variable notice production (active display) based on the subsequent fluctuation display corresponding to the start winning can be displayed in a blue mode or a red mode, execution of the operation section vibration effect, execution of the timer effect, and execution of the special background effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive decrease in the execution frequency of the operation unit vibration effect and the special background effect due to the limitation of the pre-reading notice effect, and even when the execution of the timer standby effect is limited. A timer rendition may be executable. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment when the display result is "missing" despite the execution of the ready-to-win effect or the super-to-win effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable display accompanied by a ready-to-win effect or a super ready-to-win effect is executed at the time of starting winning, the operation unit vibration effect as a foreseeing notice effect for the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is performed. For both the special background effect and the timer standby effect, which is a pre-reading notice effect for the variable display corresponding to the starting prize, the variable display (target variable display) corresponding to the starting prize is executed from the starting prize. I showed an example that does not run until Not limited to such a form, when a variable display accompanied by a ready-to-win effect or a super reach effect is executed at the time of the start-up win, the operation unit vibration effect as a foreseeing notice effect for the variable display corresponding to the start-up win , a special background effect, and a timer standby effect, which is a pre-reading notice effect for the variable display corresponding to the starting prize, corresponds to the starting prize after the end of the variable display with the reach effect or super reach effect. It may be executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display immediately after the variable display with the reach effect or the super reach effect) before the variable display (variable display of the target).

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, each time the pending display is shifted (every time the variable display is executed after the pending memory is digested), the variable display corresponding to the pending display after the shift is targeted, and the pre-reading notice effect (Operating unit vibration effect, timer standby effect, special background effect) may be executed by a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the effect determination method. And when such a production determination method is adopted, if a variable display accompanied by a reach production or a super reach production is executed at the time of the start winning, the variable display corresponding to the start winning By not executing lottery processing itself for determining whether or not to execute each look-ahead notice performance until display) is executed, the control load for determination of performance can be reduced.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, an example of executing an operation section vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A as a pre-reading notice effect and a fluctuation notice effect using an effect device different from the image display device 5 was shown. It is not limited to such a form, and the pre-reading notice effect and the changing notice effect using other effect devices (for example, a push button and a light emitting device) may be executed.

For example, a special light emitting effect using the game effect lamp 9 may be executed as the foreseeing forewarning effect and the changing forewarning effect. For example, the special light emission effect may be an effect of causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in the same display color as the display color of the pending display or the active display. The effect may be such that the lamp 9 emits white light, and the game effect lamp 9 emits red light when the suspension display or active display is displayed in red mode. Moreover, special effect sound effects using the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects may be performed as the preview effect and the fluctuation notice effect. For example, the special effect sound effect is output when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is super reach, or when developing to super reach effect (battle effect) (during the execution of the expectation suggesting effect), etc. may be

(2) In the above-described embodiment, a battle effect that is a variable announcement effect that suggests the display result of the variable display that is being executed (a variable display that satisfies the start condition) and a variable announcement effect that corresponds to the expectation level suggesting effect. As an example, an example in which a timer effect is executed with a subtraction operation (countdown operation) of the numerical value shown in the timer image is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and corresponds to a battle effect and an expectation suggesting effect. As the forewarning effect during fluctuation, an effect of performing another action may be executed.

For example, as a change notice effect corresponding to a battle effect or an expectation suggesting effect, a present effect involving opening a decorated box for a present (present box) may be executed. In the present effect, after the image of the present box is displayed, the present box is opened and the image of the present (hereinafter referred to as "present image") is displayed. For example, as a gift image, an image of a character according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, an image of the characters "change" corresponding to the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, and a super reach effect (battle effect) " There is an image of characters such as "development".

Here, before the present effect is executed as the variable notice effect, when the pending display corresponding to the variable display to be the target of the present effect is displayed, the image of the gift box before opening is displayed as the notice object. By displaying in the vicinity of the pending display corresponding to the variable display (for example, immediately above the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target), the player can be notified which variable display (holding display) is the notice target. It may be made to suggest (notify) whether there is.

In this way, a notice suggestion effect (an image of the present box before opening is displayed directly above the hold display corresponding to the change display of the target ) can be executed before the start of the variable display subject to the predetermined type of variable notice effect (present effect), the predetermined type of variable notice effect ( Present performance) is determined to be executed and the performance restriction flag is not set (variable display with reach performance or super reach performance is not executed at the time of starting winning). good too. Then, the advance notice suggestion effect is continuously executed over the subsequent multiple fluctuations (the present box before opening is shift-displayed together with the corresponding pending display), and the change that is subject to the notice effect (gift effect) during the predetermined type of change. In response to the start of the display (variation display of the target), a pre-notification effect (gift effect) of a predetermined type is executed, the present box is opened, and a big hit is expected for the change display (variation display of the target). A present image corresponding to the degree may be displayed.

On the other hand, although it was decided to execute a predetermined type of fluctuation notice effect (present effect) in the judgment at the time of the start winning, the effect restriction flag is set (variable display with reach effect and super reach effect at the time of start winning is being executed), the notice suggestion effect is not executed, and thereafter the variable display (target variable display) subject to the predetermined type of variable notice effect (present effect) is started. In response to this, a predetermined kind of fluctuation notice effect (present effect) is executed, the gift box is opened, and a gift image corresponding to the degree of expectation of a big hit of the change display (target change display) is displayed. do.

In addition, not limited to such an example, when it is decided to execute a predetermined type of fluctuation notice effect (present effect) in the determination at the time of starting winning, the effect limit flag is set (starting winning It may be possible to execute the notice effect during fluctuation regardless of whether the variable display accompanied by the reach effect or the super reach effect is being executed at times. By adopting such a configuration, regardless of whether the variable display with reach production and super reach production is executed at the time of starting winning (whether or not the production limit flag is set), the advance notice suggestion production and It is possible to share the effect control with the predetermined type of fluctuation notice effect (gift effect).

(3) In the above embodiment, the background image of the decorative pattern is changed from the normal background image to the special background image 07TM400 as an effect of changing the background image. You may perform the production|presentation which acts on the background image currently displayed. For example, a specific display effect may be executed in which a specific display is superimposed on a part of the displayed background image. This specific display includes characters (for example, characters of "CHANCE") and the like that informs that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Further, for example, a freeze effect may be executed in which the entire screen of the image display device 5 is in a freeze mode. In the freeze effect, the reproduction of the effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed is stopped at the timing when the freeze effect is executed, and the state in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation of the notice target) period until the display starts) is continued.

(4) In the above embodiment, the final display mode of the active display is first determined, and the pending display mode is determined based on the change pattern determination table A/B containing the common change pattern. , You may determine the mode of a pending|holding display not only in such a form but by another lottery method.

For example, the mode of the pending display at the time of starting winning (normal mode, special mode, blue mode, red mode) is determined, and a lottery is drawn to determine in which mode the mode of the pending display is to be displayed each time a pending shift is performed. may decide.

If the production restriction flag is not set, the mode of the pending display (normal mode, special mode, blue mode, red mode) at the time of starting winning is determined, and the mode of the pending display is changed each time the pending shift is performed. A lottery will be held to determine whether to display in the mode of For example, when the state of the pending display to be notified is the normal state, if the display result is "missing", the normal state does not change from the normal state at a rate of 70%, and the normal state remains at a rate of 20%. , the normal mode to the blue mode at a rate of 8%, and the normal mode to the red mode at a rate of 2%. In addition, when the display result is "big hit", the normal mode does not change from the normal mode at a rate of 40%, the normal mode changes to the special mode at a rate of 30%, and the normal mode at a rate of 20%. It changes from the mode to the blue mode, and changes from the normal mode to the red mode at a rate of 10%.

On the other hand, when the production restriction flag is set, the mode of the pending display (normal mode, special mode) at the time of starting winning is determined, and the mode of the pending display is set in any mode each time the pending shift is performed. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to display it. For example, when the state of the pending display to be notified is the normal state, if the display result is "missing", the normal state does not change from the normal state at a rate of 70%, and the normal state remains at a rate of 30%. If the normal mode changes to the special mode at a rate of , and the display result is a "jackpot", the normal mode does not change from the normal mode at a rate of 40%, and the normal mode from the special mode at a rate of 60%. change to

(5) In the above embodiment, when the effect restriction flag is set, all types of pre-reading notices such as the operating section vibration effect, the timer standby effect, and the special background effect as the pre-reading notice effect Although an example of not allowing the performance to be executed has been shown, this form is not limited to such a form, and when the performance restriction flag is set, the operation part vibration performance, the timer standby performance, and the pre-reading preview performance as the foreseeing forewarning performance Although one or two types of the special background effects are not executed, execution of the remaining types of the pre-reading forewarning effects may be permitted. For example, when the performance limit flag is set, the operation part vibration performance as the pre-reading notice performance is not executed, while the timer standby performance and the special background performance as the pre-reading notice performance may be executed.

(6) In the above embodiment, when the variable display with the ready-to-win effect or the super-to-win effect is being executed (while the effect limit flag is set), if the starting winning occurs, only at the time of the starting winning However, until the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is started, the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is targeted. , and an example in which the execution of the operation unit vibration effect, the timer standby effect, and the special background effect as the foreseeing notice effect, as the foreseeing notice effect, is prohibited. may be made executable (execution restriction is lifted) before the variable display corresponding to the starting prize is started.

For example, when a variable display with a reach effect or a super reach effect is executed (a period in which the effect limit flag is set), if the start winning occurs, the variable display with the reach effect or the super reach effect After the end (for example, the timing of the next pending shift), a specific mode change effect (change effect in which the pending display changes to a red mode) for the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and as a pre-reading notice effect All of the operation section vibration effect, the timer standby effect, and the special background effect as the pre-reading notice effect may be made executable (execution restrictions are lifted). Also, when the variable display with reach production and super reach production is executed (while the production limit flag is set), when the start winning occurs, the variable display with that reach production and super reach production After the end (for example, the timing of the next pending shift), a specific mode change effect (change effect in which the pending display changes to a red mode) for the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and a timer standby effect and look-ahead Even if the special background effect as the forewarning effect becomes executable (execution restriction is released), and the operation unit vibration effect as the pre-reading foreshadowing effect is not continuously executed (execution restriction is maintained). good.

(7) In the above embodiment, when it is decided to execute an effect at the time of starting winning, the effect of the same type is determined with respect to each type of effect of the change effect, the operation part vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect. A flag (change prohibition flag, operation unit vibration flag, timer flag, and special background flag) is provided to limit the execution of other variable displays, and is already set at the time of subsequent start winning. Although the execution of the type of effect corresponding to the specified flag is restricted, the execution of other types of effect is not restricted.

However, not limited to such a form, when it is decided to execute any type of effect, not only the effect of the type concerned but also other types of effects are executed for other variable displays. may also be restricted. Specifically, a common flag for restricting the execution of the effects may be used for each type of effect, namely, the change effect, the operation unit vibration effect, the timer effect, and the special background effect. In the case of such a configuration, when it is decided to execute any type of effect at the time of starting winning, a common flag is set, and at the time of subsequent starting winning, the common flag is set. Based on this, it is not determined to execute all types of effects (change effect, operation unit vibration effect, timer effect, and special background effect).

(8) In the above embodiment, when the variable display accompanied by the ready-to-win effect or the super-to-win effect is not executed at the time of starting winning (when the effect limit flag is not set), the operation unit vibration effect, timer effect, and When it is decided to execute any type of special background effect, immediately at the timing of the start winning, the pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the type of effect (operation part vibration effect as pre-reading notice effect, timer standby An example of executing the effect and the special background effect as the preview effect) has been described. Not limited to such a form, if the variable display with reach production and super reach production is not executed at the time of starting winning (if the production limit flag is not set), reach production and super reach production at the time of starting winning In any case when the associated variable display is executed (when the effect limit flag is set), any type of effect of the operation part vibration effect, timer effect, and special background effect will be performed at the time of starting winning. When it is decided to execute, it is decided at the time of the start winning at the timing after the timing of the start winning (for example, the first pending shift timing after the variable display being executed at the time of the starting winning is finished) Pre-reading notice effects corresponding to types of effects (operating unit vibration effects as pre-reading notice effects, timer standby effects, and special background effects as pre-reading notice effects) may be executable.

In the case of such a production configuration, the big hit expectation degree according to the timing at which the pre-reading notice production (the operation section vibration production as the pre-reading notice production, the timer standby production, and the special background production as the pre-reading notice production) is executed may be different, and for example, the later the timing at which the look-ahead advance notice effect is started, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit may be. For example, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the pre-reading notice effect is started immediately before the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect than when the pre-reading notice effect is started at the timing of the start winning. You may do so.

By adopting such a production configuration, after the end of the variable display accompanying the reach production and super reach production (after the production restriction flag is released), the pre-reading notice production (operation part vibration production as pre-reading notice production, timer standby production) , and a special background effect as a pre-reading preview effect) is to be started, is it started by releasing the effect limit flag, or is it determined to be executed at that timing in advance at the time of the start winning prize? The player cannot grasp whether or not the game has been played, and in the latter case, the expectation of a big win is increased, so that the interest of the look-ahead advance notice performance can be greatly improved.

(9) In the above embodiment, when a starting prize occurs during the execution of a variable display with reach, a pre-reading notice effect (change effect, pre-reading notice effect as a variable display corresponding to the start win) Although an example was shown in which operation part vibration effects, timer standby effects, and special background effects as foreseeing forewarning effects are limited, the highly anticipated foreseeing forewarning effects are executed not only in this form, but also at the time of start-up winning. For example, when the pending display is displayed in red, or when it is determined that a big hit has occurred at the start winning before the start winning, a song that suggests (announces) the occurrence of a big win. is being reproduced, when the light emission effect with a special light emission pattern is executed based on the fact that it was determined to be a big hit at the time of the start win before the start win, etc., corresponding to the start win Pre-reading notice effects (variation effects, operating section vibration effects as pre-reading notice effects, timer standby effects, and special background effects as pre-reading notice effects) for variable display may be restricted.

Also, not only reach, but also when a start-up win occurs during the execution of a variable notice effect with high expectations for a big hit (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a light-emitting effect with a special light-emitting pattern), it corresponds to the start-up win. A pre-reading notice effect (change effect, operation part vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect, timer standby effect, and special background effect as a pre-reading notice effect) for the variable display may be limited.

(10) In the above FIGS. 12-9 to 12-12, the pending display does not change from the normal mode to the red mode without going through the special mode, nor does it change from the special mode to the blue mode. Although not limited to such a mode, the pending display may change from the normal mode to the red mode without going through the special mode, or may change from the special mode to the blue mode. Here, the suspension display is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (first special mode) or the red mode rather than the rate at which the suspension display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode (first special mode) or the red mode (second special mode). It is assumed that the rate of change to (second special mode) is higher. That is, the special mode may be a display mode that suggests that the pending display changes to a special mode (first special mode (blue) or second special mode (red)).

As for the degree of expectation of a big win in the special mode, the degree of expectation of a big win may be lower than that of the normal mode, the degree of expectation of a big win may be the same as that of the normal mode, or the degree of expectation of a big win may be higher than that of the normal mode. can be made higher. For example, when the final display mode of the active display is the special mode (when the variable display ends in the special mode), when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (variable display in the normal mode) end), the degree of expectation for a big hit may be the same or lower than that.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8, the final display mode of the active display is a special mode when the display result is "loss" and when the display result is "big hit". Although an example in which the ratio is common (all are 10%), the display result is not limited to such a form, and the case where the display result is "loss" is better than the case where the display result is "big hit". , the ratio of the final display mode of the active display to be a special mode may be higher than the case where the display result is a "loss", and the display result is a "big hit" The final display mode of the display may be made to have a higher proportion of the special mode.

(11) In the above embodiment, when it is determined that the change effect is to be executed (when it is determined to display the pending display or the active display in a display mode different from the normal mode), the change prohibition flag is set to Until the target variable display is completed, a determination of YES is made in step S07TM1010 in FIG. Although an example of not being displayed in a mode has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and even when it is determined that a change effect is to be executed (holding display or active display can be displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode). Even if it is determined), the pending display or active display corresponding to the subsequent new start winning may be displayed in the special mode (however, it may not be displayed in the blue mode or the red mode).

(12) In the above-described embodiment, even if any type of pre-reading notice effect (change effect, operation unit vibration effect, timer standby effect, and special background effect as a pre-reading notice effect) is being executed. , When a start-up prize occurs, the variable display corresponding to the start-up prize is targeted (target of the pre-reading notice effect), and a type different from the type of pre-reading notice effect being executed (a type whose flag is not set) Although an example is shown in which the pre-reading notice effect of the pre-reading notice effect) can be executed, it is not limited to such a form, and any type (change effect, operation unit vibration effect, timer standby effect, and pre-reading notice effect) Special background effect) is being executed, and when a start-up win occurs, the variable display corresponding to the start-up win is targeted (target of the look-ahead notice effect). A type of pre-reading notice effect (a type of pre-reading notice effect in which the flag is not set) may also be restricted. For example, regardless of the type of pre-reading notice effect being executed, the pre-reading notice effect itself may not be executed at all, and only some types of pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the type of pre-reading notice effect being executed You may choose not to run it. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect being executed is a special background effect executed by the image display device 5, the change effect and the timer standby effect executed by the same image display device 5 can be executed, but they are different. The operation unit vibration effect using the effect device (stick controller 31A) may not be executed.

(13) In the above embodiment, when it is determined to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, the timer standby effect is always executed and the standby image 07TM300a is displayed on condition that the effect limit flag is not set. However, it is not limited to such a form, and even if it is decided to execute the timer effect, the timer standby effect may not be executed (the standby image 07TM300a is not displayed). can be Here, when the timer standby effect is executed (standby image 07TM300a is displayed), the timer effect is executed (timer image 07TM300 is displayed) is assumed to be high.

(14) In the above embodiment, when it is determined to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, the timer standby effect is executed on the condition that the effect limit flag is not set, and the area at the bottom right of the screen ( When the standby image 07TM300a is displayed in the area common to the area where the timer image 07TM300 is displayed, and after the standby image 07TM300a is continuously displayed over a plurality of times of variable display, when the variable display of the target is started, Instead of the standby image 07TM300a, the timer image 07TM300 in the initial state (displayed as "00:59") is displayed in the region, and the timer value subtraction operation is started. Not limited to such a form, if it is decided to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, the initial state ("00:59" is displayed) is displayed, and after the timer image 07TM300 in the initial state (displayed as "00:59") is continuously displayed over a plurality of times of variable display, the variable display of the target is started. The timer image 07TM300 in the initial state (displayed as "00:59") continuously displayed may be updated (decrementing operation of the timer may be started) when the timer is displayed.

On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, when the effect limit flag is set, the timer image 07TM300 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen as in the above-described embodiment. (without the standby image 07TM300a being displayed), the timer image 07TM300 in the initial state (displayed as "00:59") appears in the lower right area of the screen when the variable display of the target is started. and then updated (decrementing of the timer is started).

(15) [Another example of operation unit vibration effects]
In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined at the time of starting winning that it is determined to execute the operation section vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, the timing of the starting winning and the time of the hold shift (the starting winning An example in which the operation part vibration effect is executed at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started) and the timing when the variable display corresponding to the start winning (target variable display) is started However, as in the example shown in FIG. 12-28, the operation section vibration effect may be executed at a plurality of timings during the execution period of the variable display. Further, as modes of the operation part vibration effect, a plurality of modes in which the light emitting colors of the operation part LED, which is a light emitting device provided in the stick controller 31A, are different may be provided. Further, as modes of the operation section vibration effect, a plurality of modes having different vibration times (vibration periods) of the stick controller 31A may be provided.

FIG. 12-28 shows the execution timing of the operation section vibration effect when the variation display is executed in the big hit variation pattern accompanied by the super ready-to-win effect (battle effect).

Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the reception of the variable pattern designation command and the display result designation command (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-28) , the first vibration effect can be executed as the operation part vibration effect. Whether or not to execute the first vibration effect and the execution mode may be determined based on the determination at the time of start winning (process for determining effect at start winning). ) may be used to determine whether or not execution is to be performed and the mode of execution.

For example, it is assumed that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to the color of light emitted from the operation unit LED, which is a light emitting device provided on the stick controller 31A. For example, when the luminescent color is white, the display result of the variable display is a big hit at a rate of 60% or more, and when the luminescent color is red, the display result of the variable display is a big hit at a rate of 80% or more. Thus, when the luminescent color is rainbow, the display result of the variable display is 100% a big win.

For example, when the emission color of the operation unit LED is white, the timing at which each variable display before the variable display shown in FIG. Then, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 200 ms (cycle of ON: 200 ms, 0FF: 200 ms) is executed three times, and the variable display shown in FIG. As for the timing, it is assumed that the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once.

For example, when the emission color of the operation unit LED is red, the timing at which each variable display before the variable display shown in FIG. , the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and at the timing when the variable display shown in FIG. is executed once.

For example, even when the emission color of the operation unit LED is rainbow, the variable display is started for each variable display before the variable display (variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect) shown in FIG. 12-28. At the timing, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and at the timing when the variable display shown in FIG. Assume that an operation is performed once.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the second vibration effect as the operation part vibration effect at the timing of establishment of the reach state in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 12-28). be. Whether or not to execute the second vibration effect and the mode of execution are determined based on the determination at the start of the fluctuation (effect determination process at the time of the start of the fluctuation). It shall be possible.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A in correspondence with the execution period of the effect associated with establishment of the ready-to-win state. For example, the stick controller 31A is vibrated during the reproduction period of the ready-to-win effect image reproduced at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established. It should be noted that the period during which the stick controller 31A is vibrated may be set to only a predetermined fixed period (for example, 3000 ms) during the reproduction period of the ready-to-win effect image.

The emission color of the operation unit LED in the second vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player is notified that the big win is confirmed by executing the second vibration effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is the timing of super reach development in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (for example, the timing at which the battle effect is started, the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 12-28) Immediately before , either the third vibration effect or the strong development effect can be executed as the operation unit vibration effect.

For example, the third vibration effect is the timing when the special symbol displayed as "development" stops in the middle display area when the ready-to-win state is established, that is, to develop into super ready-to-win (transition to battle effect) ) is executed at the timing (for example, the timing of T3b shown in FIG. 12-28). In the third vibration effect, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A in correspondence with the execution period of the image (for example, the period during which the special symbol is stopped, etc.) that informs that the super ready-to-win game will develop. For example, the color of light emitted from the operation unit LED in the third vibration effect is white, and when the third vibration effect is executed, the winning rate is 50% or more.

For example, in the strong development effect, when the reach state is established, the timing at which the movable accessory moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, or a predetermined development image (for example, a flame image that fills the entire screen) is played. 12-28) is executed at the timing at which the effect that the player expects to develop into super ready-to-win is executed (for example, the timing of T3a shown in FIG. 12-28). In the strong development effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution period of the effect to make the player expect to develop into super reach (for example, the period during which the movable accessory is present in the advance position, or the predetermined development image is reproduced). The stick controller 31A is vibrated corresponding to the period of For example, the emission color of the operation unit LED in the strong development effect is white, and when the strong development effect is executed, the ratio of 40% or more is a big win.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is immediately before the timing (for example, the timing of the winning/losing branch in the battle effect, the timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 12-28) at which the effect result in the super reach effect is notified (for example, -28), it is possible to execute the fourth vibration effect as the operation part vibration effect. In this example, the fourth vibration effect can be executed only when the display result is a big hit.

For example, in the fourth vibration effect, in a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle, the stick controller 31A is activated at the timing when the ally character launches the final attack on the enemy character (just before the battle is decided). Vibrate. The effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for a predetermined vibration period (for example, 1500 ms or more). The emission color of the operation unit LED in the fourth vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player is notified that the jackpot is confirmed by executing the fourth vibration effect, that is, that the ally character wins the battle. be done.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a victory effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, and at the timing when the player recognizes that a big win will occur (for example, the timing of T4b shown in FIG. 12-28), As the operating section vibration performance, a blessing vibration performance for congratulating the occurrence of a big hit is executed. In this example, the blessing vibration effect is executed only when the display result is a big hit.

For example, in the congratulatory vibration effect, the stick controller 31A vibrates at the timing when the ally character wins over the enemy character and the big win patterns are aligned. The effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for a predetermined vibration period (for example, 3000 ms or more). In the congratulatory vibration effect, the lighting color of the operation unit LED is rainbow, and the player can confirm that a big win has occurred by executing the congratulatory vibration effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, after notifying the occurrence of the big win by the result of the battle effect (winning effect) (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 12-28), suggests the type of the big win to occur. It is possible to perform a production. In the jackpot type suggesting performance, it is suggested whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) or a probability variable jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot (the number of times the jackpot is opened). Here, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing the probability variation notification effect as the operation section vibration effect during the execution period of the jackpot type suggesting effect (the period of T5 to T7 shown in FIG. 12-28).

For example, in the jackpot type suggesting effect, the character is stopped as a jackpot pattern (but not yet fixed) in combination of even numbered patterns (eg "444") with odd numbered patterns (eg "777"). As a result, if the combination of even symbols changes to the combination of odd symbols, stick controller 31A immediately before or simultaneously with the change (at the timing of T7a shown in FIG. 12-28). vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for a predetermined vibration period (for example, 3000 ms or more).

Here, when the number of rounds of the variable probability big hit to occur is not at least the minimum number of rounds (for example, 2R) (for example, when it is either 5R or 10R), the emission color of the operation unit LED becomes white, and the variable probability big win to occur is the maximum number of rounds (for example, 10R), the emission color of the operation unit LED is rainbow. In this way, even after the player is notified that a big win will occur, the operation part vibration effect can be executed, and the operation part vibration effect suggests the type of the big win to be controlled from now on (probable variable big win or variable big win). or not), and the aspect of the operation part vibration effect (light emitting color of the light emitting part) also suggests the type of jackpot to be controlled (notifies the number of rounds). . Therefore, even after being notified of the occurrence of a big hit, the player continues to have an interest in whether or not the operation section vibration effect (probability variable notification effect) is executed and how it is executed.

Then, when the execution period of the jackpot type suggestive effect (the period of T5 to T7 shown in FIG. 12-28) ends, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the CPU 103, and the final The combination of jackpot symbols is determined and stopped (timing T8 shown in FIG. 12-28).

The above embodiments include configurations of inventions according to means A1 to means A7, inventions according to means B1 to means B7, and inventions according to means C1 to means C7 described below.

For example, in JP 2013-188256 A (FIG. 42), when it is determined to be a variation pattern with super reach in the winning judgment process, a specific hold display is displayed in the hold storage display unit at that time. The normal pending display is displayed without any delay, and after the currently running variable display based on the variable pattern with super reach ends, special continuous until the variable display based on the pending display in which the notice target data is stored is started Disclosed is a gaming machine in which an effect is executed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-188256 (FIG. 42), when a variable display accompanied by super reach is being executed, by not executing a pre-reading notice effect for other variable displays, 's consciousness can be concentrated on the super reach, but there is a risk that the interest will be reduced because the pre-reading notice effect for other variable displays is not executed. The inventions related to means A1 to means A7, the inventions related to means B1 to means B7, and the inventions related to means C1 to means C7 shown below are made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and the execution frequency of effects is reduced. The purpose is to suppress the decline in interest caused by doing.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Retention storage means (first special figure retention storage unit, second special Figure holding storage unit) and
Determination means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state (CPU103 for executing the special symbol normal process of step S110),
Determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production,
The production control means is
A specific display (holding display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
Based on the determination by the determining means, the specific display is changed to a normal mode (white round display), a notice mode (red round display) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state, and the notice mode. It is possible to display in either a special mode (white triangle display) that suggests a change,
It is possible to execute a notification effect (reach effect) that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) can be executed by effect means (stick controller 31A) different from the display means based on the determination by the determination means,
When the specific display (suspended display, active display) is displayed in the special mode (white triangular display) and then changes to the advance notice mode (red circular display), the specific display is more likely to change to the above-mentioned The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when not changing to the notice mode (red round display),
When the specific effect (operation part vibration effect) is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the specific effect (operation part vibration effect) is not executed,
The production control means is
When the specific display (holding display) corresponding to the variable display of the holding memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (ready-to-win effect) is displayed, the specific display (holding display) is displayed in the previous notice mode (red circular display). While restricting the display with, it is possible to display the specific display (hold display) in the special mode (white triangle display),
Limit the execution of the specific effect based on the determination of the determination means for the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, a new start winning occurs and the pending display is displayed) When doing so, the execution of the operation section vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, so that the mode of the stick controller 31A is restricted to the special mode (vibration mode).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
In the variable display after the variable display in which the notification effect (ready-reach effect, super ready-to-win effect) is executed, it corresponds to the variable display of the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (ready-reach effect, super ready-to-win effect). A gaming machine, wherein a specific display (suspended display, active display) of the special mode (white triangular display) can be changed to the advance notice mode (red circular display).
According to such a configuration, the player can expect that the specific display of the special mode will change to the advance notice mode when the notification effect is executed but is not controlled to an advantageous state. You can reduce your feelings.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (suspended display) corresponding to the variable display of the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (ready effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the notification effect (ready effect, super reach effect) is executed. A gaming machine capable of executing the specific effect (operating section vibration effect) corresponding to the specific display (suspended display, active display) in the variable display subsequent to the variable display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive decrease in the execution frequency of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (reserved display) of a special mode (white triangle display) corresponding to the variable display of the reserved memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the specific display ( A gaming machine capable of changing a specific display (active display) of a special mode to an advance notice mode (red circular display) when variable display corresponding to a pending display is executed.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to expect that the variable display of the special mode will change to the advance notice mode after that.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (suspended display) corresponding to the variable display of the reserved memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the variable display corresponding to the specific display (suspended display) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that, when executed, the specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) corresponding to the specific display (suspended display) can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive decrease in the execution frequency of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effects, expectations suggesting effects) can be executed during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect),
Based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)), a predetermined display (lower right of the screen) corresponding to any type of notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggesting effect) is performed before the execution of the notice effect. can display a timer image 07TM300 and a standby image 07TM300a) displayed in the area of
After the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed, the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is more effective when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation level suggesting effect) is executed. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggesting effect) is executed without being displayed,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
Limiting the display of the predetermined display (standby image 07TM300a) based on the determination of the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) targeting the pending memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect). A game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the limitation of the display of the predetermined display.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
A special effect (special background effect) for displaying a special display (special background image 07TM400) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)),
When the special effect (special background effect) is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special effect (special background effect) is not executed,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
Restricting the execution of the special effect (special background effect) based on the determination of the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) targeting the pending memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (ready-to-win effect). A game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the special effect.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Retention storage means (first special figure retention storage unit, second special Figure holding storage unit) and
Determination means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state (CPU103 for executing the special symbol normal process of step S110),
Determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production,
The production control means is
A specific display (holding display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
Based on the determination by the determining means, the specific display is changed to a normal mode (white round display), a notice mode (red round display) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state, and the notice mode. It is possible to display in either a special mode (white triangle display) that suggests a change,
It is possible to execute a notification effect (reach effect) that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
A plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effects, expectations suggesting effects) can be executed during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect),
Based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)), any type of advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggesting effect) is executed before execution of the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggesting effect). can display a predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a displayed in the lower right area of the screen) corresponding to
When the specific display (suspended display, active display) is displayed in the special mode (white triangular display) and then changes to the advance notice mode (red circular display), the specific display is more likely to change to the above-mentioned The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when not changing to the notice mode (red round display),
After the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed, the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is more effective when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation level suggesting effect) is executed. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggesting effect) is executed without being displayed,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When the specific display (holding display) corresponding to the variable display of the holding memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (ready-to-win effect) is displayed, the specific display (holding display) is displayed in the previous notice mode (red circular display). While restricting the display with, it is possible to display the specific display (hold display) in the special mode (white triangle display),
Limiting the display of the predetermined display (standby image 07TM300a) based on the determination of the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) targeting the pending memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect. game machine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the limitation of the display of the predetermined display.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
In the variable display after the variable display in which the notification effect (ready-reach effect, super ready-to-win effect) is executed, it corresponds to the variable display of the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (ready-reach effect, super ready-to-win effect). A gaming machine, wherein a specific display (suspended display, active display) of the special mode (white triangular display) can be changed to the advance notice mode (red circular display).
According to such a configuration, the player can expect that the specific display of the special mode will change to the advance notice mode when the notification effect is executed but is not controlled to the advantageous state. You can reduce your feelings.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (suspended display) corresponding to the variable display of the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is executed. A gaming machine capable of displaying the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) corresponding to the specific display (suspended display, active display) in the variable display subsequent to the variable display.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive decrease in the display frequency of the predetermined display.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (reserved display) of a special mode (white triangle display) corresponding to the variable display of the reserved memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the specific display ( A gaming machine capable of changing a specific display (active display) of a special mode to an advance notice mode (red circular display) when variable display corresponding to a pending display is executed.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to expect that the variable display of the special mode will change to the advance notice mode after that.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (suspended display) corresponding to the variable display of the reserved memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the variable display corresponding to the specific display (suspended display) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of displaying the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) corresponding to the specific display (holding display) when executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive decrease in the display frequency of the predetermined display.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
A specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) can be executed by effect means (stick controller 31A) different from the display means based on the determination by the determination means,
When the specific effect (operation part vibration effect) is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the specific effect (operation part vibration effect) is not executed,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
Limit the execution of the specific effect based on the determination of the determination means for the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, a new start winning prize occurs and the pending display is displayed) When doing so, the execution of the operation section vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, so that the mode of the stick controller 31A is restricted to the special mode (vibration mode).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
A special effect (special background effect) for displaying a special display (special background image 07TM400) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)),
When the special effect (special background effect) is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special effect (special background effect) is not executed,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
Restricting the execution of the special effect (special background effect) based on the determination of the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) targeting the pending memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (ready-to-win effect). A game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the special effect.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Retention storage means (first special figure retention storage unit, second special Figure holding storage unit) and
Determination means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state (CPU103 for executing the special symbol normal process of step S110),
Determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) for determining whether to be controlled to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production,
The production control means is
A specific display (holding display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
Based on the determination by the determining means, the specific display is changed to a normal mode (white round display), a notice mode (red round display) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state, and the notice mode. It is possible to display in either a special mode (white triangle display) that suggests a change,
It is possible to execute a notification effect (reach effect) that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
A special effect (special background effect) for displaying a special display (special background image 07TM400) can be executed based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)),
When the specific display (suspended display, active display) is displayed in the special mode (white triangular display) and then changes to the advance notice mode (red circular display), the specific display is more likely to change to the above-mentioned The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when not changing to the notice mode (red round display),
When the special effect (special background effect) is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the special effect (special background effect) is not executed,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the specific display (holding display) corresponding to the variable display of the holding memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (ready-to-win effect) is displayed, the specific display (holding display) is displayed in the previous notice mode (red circular display). While restricting the display with, it is possible to display the specific display (hold display) in the special mode (white triangle display),
Limiting the execution of the special effect (special background effect) based on the determination of the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) targeting the pending memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect. game machine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the restriction on the execution of the special effect.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
In the variable display after the variable display in which the notification effect (ready-reach effect, super ready-to-win effect) is executed, it corresponds to the variable display of the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (ready-reach effect, super ready-to-win effect). A gaming machine, wherein a specific display (suspended display, active display) of the special mode (white triangular display) can be changed to the advance notice mode (red circular display).
According to such a configuration, the player can expect that the specific display of the special mode will change to the advance notice mode when the notification effect is executed but is not controlled to an advantageous state. You can reduce your feelings.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (suspended display) corresponding to the variable display of the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (ready effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the notification effect (ready effect, super reach effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the special effect (special background effect) corresponding to the specific display (suspended display, active display) can be executed in the variable display after the variable display that has been performed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive decrease in the execution frequency of the special effect.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (reserved display) of a special mode (white triangle display) corresponding to the variable display of the reserved memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the specific display ( A gaming machine capable of changing a specific display (active display) of a special mode to an advance notice mode (red circular display) when variable display corresponding to a pending display is executed.
According to such a configuration, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, it is possible to expect that the variable display of the special mode will change to the advance notice mode after that.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When a specific display (suspended display) corresponding to the variable display of the reserved memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect, super reach effect) is displayed, the variable display corresponding to the specific display (suspended display) is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that, when executed, the special effect (special background effect) corresponding to the specific display (suspended display) can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive decrease in the execution frequency of the special effect.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
A specific effect (operation unit vibration effect) can be executed by effect means (stick controller 31A) different from the display means based on the determination by the determination means,
When the specific effect (operation part vibration effect) is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the specific effect (operation part vibration effect) is not executed,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
Limit the execution of the specific effect based on the determination of the determination means for the pending memory that occurred during the execution period of the notification effect (during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, a new start winning prize occurs and the pending display is displayed) When doing so, the execution of the operation section vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, so that the mode of the stick controller 31A is restricted to the special mode (vibration mode).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the restriction on the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
A plurality of types of advance notice effects (battle effects, expectations suggesting effects) can be executed during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect),
Based on the determination by the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)), a predetermined display (lower right of the screen) corresponding to any type of notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggesting effect) is performed before the execution of the notice effect. A timer image 07TM300 and a standby image 07TM300a) displayed in the area of can be displayed,
After the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is displayed, the predetermined display (timer image 07TM300, standby image 07TM300a) is more effective when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation level suggesting effect) is executed. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is higher than when the advance notice effect (battle effect, expectation suggesting effect) is executed without being displayed,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
Limiting the display of the predetermined display (standby image 07TM300a) based on the determination of the determination means (start winning determination process (step S101)) targeting the pending memory generated during the execution period of the notification effect (reach effect). A game machine characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the specific display in a special mode during the execution period of the notification effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the limitation of the display of the predetermined display.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 10TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 10TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-28. In the present embodiment, as described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 07TM] above, in a game machine in which the setting value can be changed, the operating portion (stick controller 31A) is vibrated to produce an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit. , and an effect of notifying a big win by vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A). Each effect described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 10TM] can be executed together with each effect described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 07TM] (especially, pre-reading preview effect). Further, each effect described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 10TM] can be executed in place of each effect described in [Description of Characteristic Portion 07TM].

(Display result judgment)
In this embodiment, as the display result determination table referred to in the low probability state, the display result determination table in FIG. 12-1 described above is referred to, and as the display result determination table referred to in the high probability state, The display result determination table in FIG. 12-2 shall be referred to.

(Judgement of jackpot type)
FIG. 13-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table [for first special symbol] stored in ROM 101, and FIG. 13-1 (B) is a jackpot type stored in ROM 101 It is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table [for the second special symbol]. Of these, FIG. 13-1 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) This is a table for when Also, in FIG. 13-1(B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning hole (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). This is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern, the type of jackpot is set to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. It is a table referred to for determining either "4R probability variable jackpot [next time]" or "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, and a "normal jackpot" (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low probability / high base state, and after the jackpot game In , high accuracy control and time saving control are executed and "variable probability big hit" is set to shift to high accuracy / high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "2R jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and "4R jackpot". The jackpot game state by "jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and "10R jackpot". The jackpot game state is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the “normal jackpot [100 times]” is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of "variable probability big win [next time]" are continuously executed until another big win occurs after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, if the reoccurring big hit is one of the types of "4R probability variable jackpot [next time]" and "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]", again after the jackpot game state ends, high accuracy control and time saving control is executed, a so-called continuous game state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state is established.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpot types are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. good too.

As shown in FIG. 13-1 (A), in the jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol], when the setting value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 ~ 104 are assigned to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", 105 to 284 are assigned to "4R variable jackpot [next time]", and 285 to 299 are assigned to "10R variable jackpot [next time]" ” is assigned. Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (B), in the big hit type determination table [for the second special symbol], when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 104 are assigned to "2R normal jackpot [100 times]", 105 to 149 are assigned to "4R variable jackpot [next time]", and 150 to 299 are assigned to "10R variable jackpot [next time]". next time]”. Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, regardless of which set value is set, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table. ing. Similarly, when a big win occurs in the special game with the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table regardless of which setting value is set.

(Variation pattern determination)
The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Based on the variation pattern determination table, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to be one of the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, there is a variation pattern determination table for losing, which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result will be "loss", and the variation display result is a "big hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, the [loss] variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the variation display result will be "loss", and the variation display result is pre-determined to be "big hit". It is assumed that a [big hit] variation pattern determination table used at times is prepared in advance.

[For loss] In the fluctuation pattern judgment table, for each fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss" fluctuation pattern, "normal reach loss" fluctuation pattern, "super reach loss" fluctuation pattern, random for fluctuation pattern judgment A predetermined random number within the range that the numerical value MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value.

The variation pattern of ``non-reach loss'' is a variation pattern in which a combination of ornamental patterns indicating that the result of variation display is ``loss'' because reach is not established after the start of variation display is stopped and displayed. Since the effect that achieves reach is not executed, the variable display period when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is "no reach" is the same as the effect that achieves reach when the variable display result is "loss". It is shorter than the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation pattern (“normal reach lost”, “super reach lost”).

[For jackpot] In the variation pattern determination table, for each variation pattern of the "normal reach jackpot" and the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern, a predetermined random number is assigned as the judgment value.

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving normal reach ("normal reach lost" and "normal reach big hit"), after the reach state is established, the final display result is displayed without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. Fixed stop.

In the present embodiment, in the variation patterns involving super reach ("super reach failure" and "super reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed as a super reach effect. A battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a big hit is won by the game.

Then, when the final display result is "loss", an effect (defeat effect) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. When the final display result is a "big hit", an effect (victory effect) in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed.

In the present embodiment, among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "big hit", the variation pattern of "super reach big hit" is a victory effect that notifies the occurrence of a big hit by the result of the battle effect, and the big win pattern is stopped ( After the congratulatory effect of congratulating the fact that the swing has been stopped (that the victory effect has been executed) is executed, the jackpot type suggesting effect of suggesting the type of the big win is executed. Among the variation patterns where the final display result is "big hit", in the variation pattern of "normal reach big hit", the decoration pattern is aligned without going through the battle production, and the blessing to celebrate that the big hit pattern has stopped (stopped swinging) After the performance is executed, a jackpot type suggesting performance for suggesting the jackpot type is executed. In the jackpot type suggesting performance, it is suggested whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) or a probability variable jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot (the number of times the jackpot is opened). During the execution period of the jackpot type suggesting performance, it is possible to execute a probability variation notification performance as a performance involving vibration of the operation unit.

As shown in FIG. 13-2 (A), in the [for failure] variation pattern determination table, if the setting value is "1", 1 to 898 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out", 899 to 967 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach out", and 968 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out". there is Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 898 are assigned to the "non-reach out" variation pattern, 899 to 967 are assigned to the "normal reach out" variation pattern, and 968 to 997 are assigned to the " It is assigned to the variation pattern of "Super Reach Lost [Battle Draw]". In this way, when the display result is "no", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 13-2 (B), in the [for big hit] variation pattern determination table, if the setting value is "1", 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is assigned to the "normal reach big hit" variation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach big hit" variation pattern. Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach big hit" variation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach big hit" variation pattern. In this way, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

(single vibration effect)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a single vibration presentation based on the determination result at the start of fluctuation. The single vibration effect is an example of an advance notice effect in which the stick controller 31A vibrates for a predetermined period of time (the stick controller 31A becomes a special mode) at a predetermined timing during the execution period of the variable display. As described below, as modes of the single vibration effect, a plurality of modes may be provided in which the operation unit LED, which is a light emitting device provided in the stick controller 31A, has different emission colors. Further, as described below, as modes of the single vibration effect, a plurality of modes in which the vibration time of the stick controller 31A is different may be provided.

In this embodiment, based on the presence or absence of execution of the single vibration effect and the effect mode of the single vibration effect, the effect using another effect device (for example, the notice by the image display device 5) is executed after the single vibration effect. The presence or absence of performance and the mode of presentation are not determined. That is, whether or not to execute the single vibration effect and the mode of performance, and whether or not to execute the effect and the mode of performance using another effect device after the single vibration effect are determined independently and individually. there is Therefore, in the single vibration effect, the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested only by the vibration operation of the stick controller 31A, the light emission color of the operation unit LED provided on the stick controller 31A, and the vibration time of the stick controller 31A.

In this embodiment, the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect can be executed as the single vibration effect. These first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect differ from each other in execution timing, effect mode, and big hit expectation.

(First vibration effect)
When the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command and the display result designation command, the first vibration performance can be executed as the single vibration performance. This first vibration effect is a type of advance notice effect that suggests a display result, in which execution/non-execution and effect mode are determined based on the determination at the time of fluctuation start (effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start).

In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of presentation modes in which the operation unit LED, which is a light-emitting device provided on the stick controller 31A, has different emission colors as the presentation mode of the first vibration presentation. When it is determined in the fluctuation start effect determination process that the first vibration effect is to be executed, the effect modes of the first vibration effect are the "first mode", the "second mode", and the "third mode". ” is determined to be one of the presentation modes.

In the first vibrating effect of the first mode, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is performed once at the timing when the light emission color of the operation unit LED becomes white and the variable display is started.

In the first vibrating effect of the second aspect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is performed once at the timing when the light emission color of the operation unit LED becomes red and the variable display is started.

In the first vibration effect of the third mode, the light emission color of the operation unit LED becomes rainbow color, and the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is performed once at the timing when the variable display is started.

Thus, the first vibration effect of the first mode and the first vibration effect of the second mode differ in the light emission color of the operation unit LED (white in the first mode and red in the second mode), and the vibration time also differs. (1500 ms in the first mode, 3000 ms in the second mode). On the other hand, the first vibration effect of the second mode and the first vibration effect of the third mode differ in the emission color of the operation unit LED (red in the second mode, rainbow color in the third mode), but the vibration time is common. (3000 ms in the second mode and 3000 ms in the third mode).

In FIG. 13-3, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. FIG. 13-3(1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the mode of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick controller 31A before the variable display is started, and FIG. 13-3(2). 13-3 (A2), (B2 ) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the first vibration effect is executed at the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (1), based on the CPU 103 ending the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. , a combination of decorative patterns ("246" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and a combination of small patterns ("246" in this example) is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. ”) is stopped. In other words, the combination of the decorative symbols that result in the display result of "missing" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the active display area 10TM013 displays the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display being executed, and the suspended display area 10TM011 displays the suspended display 10TM001 in the normal mode.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-3(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode). From this state, the state shifts to one of the states shown in FIG. 13-3 (2), (A2), (B2), and (C2) in response to execution of the next variable display.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. FIG.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the normal mode active display 10TM003 displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and moves the normal mode suspended display 10TM001 displayed in the suspended display area 10TM011 to the active display area 10TM013. shift. As a result, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and the suspended display 10TM001 is not displayed in the suspended display area 10TM011.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation based on the fact that it is determined not to execute the first vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation. Instead, the mode of the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibration mode) at the timing when the variable display is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the first vibration effect of the first mode at the start of the fluctuation, based on which the first vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation At the timing when the first vibration effect of the mode is executed and the variable display is executed, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is caused to emit white light. That is, the first vibration effect of the first mode is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first vibration effect of the second mode at the start of the fluctuation, based on which the second vibration effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation. At the timing when the first vibration effect of the mode is executed and the variable display is executed, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is made to emit red light. That is, the first vibration effect of the second mode is executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 13-3 (C2), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first vibration effect of the third mode at the start of the fluctuation, based on which the third The first vibration effect of the mode is executed, and at the timing when the variable display is executed, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is illuminated in rainbow colors. That is, the first vibration effect of the third mode is executed.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to the color of light emitted from the operation unit LED, which is a light emitting device provided on the stick controller 31A. Although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a big hit is as follows: when the light emission color of the operation unit LED is white<when the light emission color of the operation unit LED is red<light emission color of the operation unit LED is rainbow colored. That is, the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display when the first vibration effect is executed is a big win increases in the order of the first mode<second mode<third mode.

(Second vibration effect)
The effect control CPU 120 can execute the second vibration effect as a single vibration effect at the timing of establishment of the reach state in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Whether or not to execute this second vibration effect is determined based on the determination at the start of the fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation), and in this example, it can be executed only when the display result is a big hit. shall be

In the second vibration effect, the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once at the timing when the reach state is established. Note that the stick controller 31A may be vibrated according to the reproduction period of the ready-to-win effect video that is reproduced at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the second vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player is notified that the big win is confirmed by executing the second vibration effect.

FIG. 13-4 shows the mode of the stick controller 31A at the bottom right of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. FIG. 13-4(1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A before the reach state is established. FIG. 13-4(2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the second vibration effect is not executed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established. FIG. 13-4 (A2) shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the second vibration effect is executed at the timing when the ready-to-win state is established. It is an explanatory diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (1), based on the CPU 103 executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 as well. At this time, the active display area 10TM013 displays the normal mode active display 10TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-4(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode). From this state, it shifts to one of the states shown in FIG. 13-4 (2) and (A2) corresponding to establishment of the reach state.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (2), the effect control CPU 120 puts "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. is displayed in a stationary state, and characters of "reach!!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (2), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the second vibration effect based on the fact that it has been determined not to execute the second vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation. , the mode of the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 13-4 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second vibration effect based on the determination to execute the second vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation, and the stick The operation of vibrating the controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits light in rainbow colors.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the second vibration effect is executed only when the display result of the variable display that is being executed is a "jackpot". Even when the display result of the displayed variable display is "mismatch", the second vibration effect may be executable. For example, as the effect mode of the second vibration effect, a first mode in which the light emission color of the operation unit LED is red when the reach state is established, and a light emission color of the operation unit LED is rainbow color when the reach state is established. There is a second mode, and when the second vibration effect is executed when the display result is "no", the first mode (light emission color: red) is selected at a rate of 100%, while the display result is is a "jackpot", when the second vibration effect is executed, the first mode (light emitting color: red) is selected at a rate of 40%, and the second mode (emitting color: rainbow color) is selected at a rate of 60%. ) may be selected. That is, when the second vibration effect of the first mode is executed, it is not decided that the display result will be a big hit, and the display result is a big win only when the second vibration effect of the second mode is executed. It may be determined that

(Third vibration effect)
The effect control CPU 120 can execute the third vibration effect as a single vibration effect at the timing of super reach development in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (for example, the timing at which the battle effect is started). This third vibration effect is a type of advance notice effect that suggests a display result, with execution or non-execution being determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start).

In this embodiment, the third vibration effect is the timing ( It is executed at the timing when the battle production is started). In the third vibration effect, it is assumed that the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once at the timing when super reach occurs. Note that the stick controller 31A may be vibrated according to the reproduction period of the super reach effect image that is reproduced when the game develops into super reach.

It should be noted that the stick controller 31A is vibrated at a timing before the development to super reach (for example, timing at which the special symbol displayed as "development" stops in the middle display area when the reach state is established). good too. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the third vibration effect is white, and the player is notified that the expectation of a big win is high by executing the third vibration effect.

FIG. 13-5 shows the mode of the stick controller 31A in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. FIG. 13-5(1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A before developing into super reach. Also, FIG. 13-5(2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the third vibration effect is not executed at the timing of developing into super reach. FIG. 13-5(A2) shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the third vibration effect is executed at the timing of developing to super reach. It is an explanatory diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13-5 (1), the effect control CPU 120, when the ready-to-reach state in the variation pattern is established (decorative "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 When the ready-to-win state is established by the symbol being stopped and displayed), the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 displays " The special symbol 10TM100 displayed as "development" is stopped (provisionally stopped). At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying. At this time, the active display area 10TM013 displays the normal mode active display 10TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-5(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode). From this state, the state shifts to one of the states shown in FIGS. 13-5(2) and (A2) in response to development into super reach (execution of battle effect).

First, in the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect at the timing to develop the super reach in the variation pattern. Here, along with the execution of the battle presentation, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (2), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the third vibration effect based on the fact that it has been determined not to execute the third vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation. , the mode of the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third vibration effect based on the determination to execute the third vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation, and the stick An operation of vibrating the controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is caused to emit white light.

A plurality of presentation modes may be provided as the presentation mode of the third vibration presentation. For example, as the production mode of the third vibration production, the first mode in which the light emission color of the operation unit LED is white when it develops into super reach (or when it is notified that it develops into super reach), There is a second mode in which the light emission color of the operation unit LED becomes red when it develops (or when it is notified that it will develop into super reach), and a third vibration effect is performed when the display result is "missing". When executed, the first mode (light emission color: white) is selected at a rate of 80% and the second mode (light emission color: red) is selected at a rate of 20%, while the display result is "big hit". In this case, when the third vibration effect is executed, the first mode (emitting color: white) is selected at a rate of 20%, and the second mode (emitting color: red) is selected at a rate of 80%. can be That is, the ratio of the display result to be a big hit may be higher when the third vibration effect of the second mode is executed than when the third vibration effect of the first mode is executed. .

(4th vibration production)
The effect control CPU 120 performs the first operation prompt immediately before the timing of notifying the effect result in the super ready-to-win effect (notifying whether or not the display result will be a "big hit") (for example, before the winning/losing branch in the battle effect). At the timing when the display is displayed), the fourth vibration effect can be executed as a single vibration effect. In this example, the fourth vibration effect can be executed only when the display result is a big hit.

In the fourth vibration effect, in a battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character battle, the ally character launches a final attack on the enemy character and operates the stick controller 31A (from the player toward the gaming machine). At the timing when the first operation prompting display for prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed (just before the battle is decided), the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once.

Note that the period during which the stick controller 31A is vibrated in the fourth vibration effect is not limited to the period described above. may be continuously vibrated. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the fourth vibration effect is rainbow color, and the player is notified that the big win is confirmed by executing the fourth vibration effect.

FIG. 13-6 shows the mode of the stick controller 31A in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. FIG. 13-6(1) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the mode of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick controller 31A before the first operation prompting display is displayed. FIG. 13-6(2) is an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the fourth vibration effect is not executed at the timing when the first operation prompting display is displayed. FIG. 13-6(A2) is an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the stick when the fourth vibration effect is executed at the timing when the first operation promotion display is displayed. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a mode of a controller 31A;

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (1), the effect control CPU 120 controls the winning/losing branch timing of the battle effect in which the friend character and the enemy character battle corresponding to the variation pattern (the friend character makes the final attack on the enemy character). At the start timing), an ally character 10TM200A and an enemy character 10TM200B are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a battle effect image 10TM250 is displayed to indicate that the battle will be won or lost. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. At this time, the active display area 10TM013 displays the normal mode active display 10TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-6(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode). From this state, in response to the display of the first operation prompting display (characters "Exit!!"), the state shifts to one of the states shown in FIGS. 13-6(2) and (A2).

First, in the example shown in FIG. 13-6(2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first operation prompting display in a state where the ally character launches the final attack on the enemy character in the battle effect. In this example, a friend character 10TM200A and an enemy character 10TM200B are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a battle effect image 10TM250 indicating that the outcome of the battle is decided is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Along with the first operation promotion display 10TM300, a time bar 10TM300T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is valid, and the characters "Exit!"

The first operation prompting display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T, and the characters “Close!!” are images with a higher display priority (higher display layer) than the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image. For this reason, it appears to the player that the background image and the super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) image are displayed in front.

At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 13-6 (2), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the fourth vibration effect based on the fact that it has been determined not to execute the fourth vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation. , the mode of the stick controller 31A remains in the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 13-6 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth vibration effect based on the determination to execute the fourth vibration effect at the start of the fluctuation, and the stick The operation of vibrating the controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits light in rainbow colors.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the fourth vibration effect is executed only when the display result of the variable display that is being executed is a "jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and can be executed. Even when the display result of the displayed variable display is "missing", the fourth vibration effect may be executed. For example, as an effect mode of the fourth vibration effect, a first mode in which the emission color of the operation unit LED is red when the first operation prompting display is displayed, and an operation unit when the first operation prompting display is displayed There is a second mode in which the LED emits a rainbow color, and when the display result is "mismatch" and the fourth vibration effect is executed, the first mode (emitting color: red) is 100%. is selected, when the fourth vibration effect is executed when the display result is a "jackpot", the first mode (light emitting color: red) is selected at a rate of 40%, and the first mode is selected at a rate of 60%. Two modes (emission color: rainbow color) may be selected. That is, when the fourth vibration effect of the first mode is executed, it is not determined that the display result will be a big hit, and the display result is a big win only when the fourth vibration effect of the second mode is executed. It may be determined that

(Vibration notice effect)
In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the vibration advance notice effect based on the determination result at the start of the fluctuation. The vibration notice effect is a predetermined timing of the variable display (in this example, the timing after 5000 ms has passed since the start of the variable display), and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed from the static state up to that point. It is an example of a notice effect displayed in a different operation mode. Since the active display is displayed in the motion mode, it appears to the player that the active display vibrates vertically and horizontally. As a result, the player is suggested (notified) that the stick controller 31A will vibrate.

In this embodiment, the vibration forewarning effects are shown in FIGS. white triangle display), blue mode active display (blue circular display in this example), and red mode active display (red circular display in this example). It is executable. Therefore, the player is interested not only in the shape and display color of the active display (first mode), but also in the action (second mode).

In the present embodiment, by executing the vibration advance notice effect, one of the above-described various single vibration effects (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, and fourth vibration effect) The player is informed that the type of single vibration performance is executed. The single vibration effect, which is the target of the notice by the vibration notice effect, will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 13-19.

In the example shown below, when a plurality of types of single vibration effects are executed in one variation display, the vibration advance notice effect is executed in correspondence with any one type of single vibration effect. However, it is not limited to such a form, and may be executed corresponding to each of a plurality of types of single vibration effects. That is, the vibration advance notice effect may be executed a plurality of times in one variation display.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the vibration notice effect is executed, an example is shown in which any type of single vibration effect corresponding to this is always executed. Even when the vibration advance notice performance is executed, the single vibration performance may not be executed. Also, a plurality of presentation modes may be provided as the presentation modes of the vibration advance notice presentation. For example, a first operation mode in which a holding display or an active display (that is, a specific display corresponding to a variable display) vibrates vertically or horizontally with a small width, and a second operating mode in which a holding display or active display vibrates vertically or horizontally with a large width. and may be provided. Then, the rate at which the single vibration effect is executed may be different according to the effect mode of the vibration advance notice effect. For example, when the vibration advance notice effect of the first operation mode is executed, the corresponding single vibration effect is executed at a rate of 50%, but when the vibration notice effect of the second operation mode is executed, , the single vibration effect corresponding to this may be executed at a rate of 100%.

FIG. 13-7 shows the mode of the stick controller 31A in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram. FIGS. 13-7 (1) to (3) show the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the vibration foretelling effect is executed when the foretelling target is the second vibration effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (1), based on the fact that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. , the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and the variable display of small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 as well. At this time, the active display area 10TM013 displays the normal mode active display 10TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-7(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration forewarning effect at a predetermined timing of the variable display (in this example, the timing 5000 ms after the start of the variable display). , the active display area 10TM013 displays the active display 10TM003S of the operation mode. In other words, the active display is changed from a stationary mode (a mode in which the white circular display is stationary) to an active mode (a mode in which the white circular display is vibrating).

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-7(2), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (3), the effect control CPU 120 puts "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. is displayed in a stationary state, and characters of "reach!!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-7(3), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the vibration advance notice effect and executes the second vibration effect. That is, the active display 10TM003S in the operating mode (the white circular display vibrating) displayed in the active display area 10TM013 is returned to the static mode (the white circular display standing still). , vibrates the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit light in rainbow colors.

(Presentation effect during fluctuation with vibration of the operation part)
In this embodiment, based on the determination result at the time of start of fluctuation, it is possible to execute a notice effect during fluctuation accompanied by vibration of the operating unit, which is different from the single vibration effect. In this embodiment, as a notice effect during fluctuation accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, a strong development effect that suggests that the display result will be a big win, that the big win pattern has stopped (swinging stop) (It will be controlled to the big win game state from now on). It is possible to execute a blessing performance to bless the event) and a probability variation notification performance to notify that the type of the generated jackpot is a probability variation jackpot.

These strong development effect, blessing effect, and probability variable notification effect are all different from the above-described single vibration effect (first vibration effect to fourth vibration effect). including) is a production accompanied by a production by a different production device. Specifically, an effect of displaying an effect image on the image display device 5, an effect of emitting light from a light emitting unit (for example, a frame LED around the game area) different from the operation unit LED, and an effect provided around the image display device 5 This is an example of an advance notice effect in which the stick controller 31A vibrates for a predetermined period of time along with the effect of moving the movable body that has been moved, the effect of reproducing and outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like.

In this way, the strong development effect, the congratulatory effect, and the probability variable notification effect that accompany the vibration of the operation unit are produced by an effect device different from the stick controller 31A (including the operation unit LED of the stick controller 31A), and the stick controller 31A ( This effect is associated with the effect of vibrating the operation unit LED of the stick controller 31A. The strong development effect, the blessing effect, and the probability variation notification effect in the present embodiment are different in execution timing, effect mode, and big hit expectation.

(strong development production)
The effect control CPU 120 is the timing (for example, 40 seconds before the battle effect is started) before the timing of the super reach development in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. It is possible to execute a strong development production as a notice production during fluctuation accompanied by This strong development effect is a type of advance notice effect that suggests a display result, with execution or non-execution being determined based on the determination at the start of the fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation).

FIGS. 13-8(1) to 13-8(6) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the strong development effect is executed. In FIG. 13-8, the mode of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13-8 (1), the effect control CPU 120 decorates the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 with "7" at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. A ready-to-win state is set by stopping and displaying the pattern, and characters of "ready-to-win!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying. At this time, the active display area 10TM013 displays the normal mode active display 10TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is the timing (for example, the battle effect starts a predetermined period before the timing of super reach development in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. 40 seconds before the start), a strong development effect is executed. In the strong development effect, first, by displaying a darkening image 10TM400 as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the visibility of the background image, the decoration pattern, and the ready-to-reach effect image is reduced to make it difficult to see. A blackout effect is executed.

Here, due to the blackout effect, the background image, the decoration pattern, and the ready-to-win effect image become invisible, but the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode and the small patterns remain visible. That is, while the visibility of the decoration symbol "7" which is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decoration symbol which is variably displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the visibility of the active display area is reduced. The visibility of the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode displayed in 10TM013 and the small patterns variably displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are not lowered.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8(2), the effect control CPU 120 keeps the mode of the stick controller 31A in the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8(3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the darkening image 10TM400 at the timing when a predetermined period of time (10 seconds in this example) has passed since the strong development effect was started. At the same time, an effect presentation is executed in which the flame effect image 10TM410 and the characters "Decisive Battle" are superimposed on the darkened image 10TM400. The flame effect image 10TM410 is an image with a higher display priority than the darkened image 10TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the characters "decisive battle" are displayed further than the flame effect image 10TM410. This is an image with a high priority (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it looks as if the letters "Decisive Battle", the flame effect image 10TM410, and the darkening image 10TM400 are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8(3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the stick controller to correspond to the execution period of a predetermined effect (for example, the period during which the characters "decisive battle" are displayed). 31A is vibrated for 1500 ms (cycle of ON: 1500 ms, 0FF: 500 ms) is executed 10 times to cause the operation unit LED to emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8(4), the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 10TM450 from the tilted position at the timing when a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the strong development effect was started. A movable body motion presentation is executed to move the body to the standing position.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8(4), the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller to correspond to a predetermined effect execution period (for example, a period during which the movable body 10TM450 is in the upright position). 31A is vibrated for 10,000 ms once, and the operation unit LED is made to emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8(5), the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 10TM450 in the upright position at the timing when a predetermined period of time (40 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the start of the strong development effect. to the tilted position, thereby ending the movable body motion presentation.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8(5), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (6), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the strong development effect at the timing when the change pattern should be developed to super reach. Along with the end of the strong development presentation, the blackout presentation and the effect presentation are terminated, and the battle presentation is executed. Here, along with the execution of the battle presentation, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-8(6), the effect control CPU 120 keeps the mode of the stick controller 31A in the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Thus, in the strong development production, a series of productions including a blackout production, an effect production, and a movable body production production are executed, and during the execution period of the effect production and the movable body production, a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms ) The stick controller 31A vibrates. The emission color of the operation unit LED in the strong development effect is white, and the player can confirm that the expectation for the big win is high by executing the strong development effect.

In the strong development effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A is executed and the operating unit LED is caused to emit light corresponding to the period during which the sound effect unique to the strong development effect is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. can be

(blessing performance)
The effect control CPU 120 can execute a blessing effect as a change notice effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit at the timing when the victory effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed and the player grasps the occurrence of the big win. is. In this example, the blessing effect is executed only when the display result is a big hit.

FIGS. 13-9(1) to 13-9(3) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the blessing effect is executed. In FIG. 13-9, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13-9(1), the effect control CPU 120 displays an image of the ally character 10TM200A launching a final attack on the enemy character 10TM200B at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the result of the battle. In the state where the battle effect image 10TM250 suggesting that a decision is made is displayed, at the timing at which the first operation prompting display should be displayed, the first operation prompting display 10TM300 and the operation of the stick controller 31A are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A time bar 10TM300T for notifying the remaining period during which the is effective and the characters "Close!!" are displayed.

Here, the first operation prompting display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T, and the characters "Close!!" have a higher display priority than the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image (the display layer is higher). ) image, it appears to the player that it is displayed in front of the background image and the super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) image. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. Also, in the active display area 10TM013, an active display 10TM003 in a normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-9(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9(2), the effect control CPU 120 executes a victory effect at the timing when the stick controller 31A is operated by the player, and displays the teammate character 10TM200A on the image display device 5. wins over the enemy character 10TM200B, the character "Victory" is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5, and the display result is "Big Hit" in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The combination of decorative symbols ("222" in this example) is stopped from swinging. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes a blessing effect, and performs a predetermined effect execution period (for example, a period in which the combination of decorative symbols is stopped swinging). , the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 6000 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED emits light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to indicate that the display result is "big win" at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative symbols (“222” in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-9(3), the effect control CPU 120 ends the blessing effect and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

In this way, in the blessing effect, the stick controller 31A vibrates for a predetermined period (for example, 6000 ms) at the timing when the teammate character wins over the enemy character and the decorative symbols (jackpot symbols) are arranged. The color of light emitted from the operation unit LED in the blessing effect is rainbow, and the player can confirm that a big win has occurred by executing the blessing effect.

In the blessing performance, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A is executed and the LED of the operation unit is illuminated in correspondence with the period during which the sound effects and the like unique to the blessing performance are reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. good too.

(Probability notification production)
The effect control CPU 120 can execute a jackpot type suggesting effect suggesting the type of the generated big win after notifying the occurrence of the big win by the result of the battle effect (winning effect). In the jackpot type suggesting performance, it is suggested whether the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) or a probability variable jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot (the number of times the jackpot is opened). Here, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the probability variation notification effect as the variable notice effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit during the execution period of the jackpot type suggesting effect.

In the jackpot type suggesting effect, a combination of even patterns (for example, ``222'') that is stopped as a jackpot pattern (but not until it is confirmed and stopped) is a combination of odd patterns (for example, ``555'', ``777'', etc.). A series of effects are executed to change the This series of effects includes, for example, (1) an effect in which a cracked image is displayed on the screen, and (2) a second operation promotion display 10TM600 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. and (3) an effect in which either an image in which the screen is broken or an image in which the screen is not broken is displayed in response to the player pressing the push button 31B.

As a result, when the combination of even-numbered symbols changes to the combination of odd-numbered symbols, an image in which the screen is finally broken in (3) is displayed, thereby notifying that the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot. , , The stick controller 31A vibrates at the same time as the combination of decorative symbols changes. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A for a predetermined vibration period (for example, 3000 ms or longer).

On the other hand, when the combination of even-numbered patterns does not change to the combination of odd-numbered patterns, the fact that the jackpot type is the normal jackpot is reported by finally displaying an image in which the screen is not broken in (3). At this time, the stick controller 31A does not vibrate and remains in the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode). That is, the probability variation notification effect is not executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of modes in which the light emission color of the light emitting device (operation unit LED) provided in the stick controller 31A is different is provided as the effect mode of the variable probability notification effect. In this example, in response to the fact that the production mode of the probability variation notification effect is determined to be the "fourth mode", the light emission color of the operation unit LED becomes white, and the production mode of the probability variation notification effect is determined to be the "fifth mode". In response to this, the color of light emitted from the operation unit LED becomes rainbow. In the variable probability notification effect of the fourth mode, the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once. Also, in the variable probability notification effect of the fifth mode, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 4500 ms is executed once.

In this embodiment, when the number of rounds of the probability variable jackpot to occur is not at least the minimum number of rounds (2R in this example) (in the case of either 4R or 10R in this example), the probability variable notification of the fourth aspect The effect can be executed, and only when the number of rounds of the variable probability big hit to be generated is the largest number of rounds (10R in this example), the variable probability notification effect of the fifth mode can be executed.

In this way, even after the player is notified of the big hit, it is possible to execute the definite variable notification effect as a variable notice effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit, and whether or not to execute the definite variable notification effect is controlled from now on. It suggests the type of hit that will be performed (notifies whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot), and the aspect of the probability variable notification effect (light emission color and execution period of the light emitting unit) also indicates the type of jackpot that will be controlled from now on. It is suggested (notifies the number of rounds). Therefore, even after being notified of the occurrence of a big hit, the player continues to have an interest in whether or not the variable probability notification effect is executed and in the effect mode.

FIGS. 13-10 (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the big hit type suggesting effect is executed. FIG. 13-10(4) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the jackpot type suggesting effect is executed and the probability variation notification effect is not executed. 13-10 (A4) and (B4) show the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the mode of the stick controller 31A when the jackpot type suggesting effect is executed and the probability variation notification effect is executed. is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between. In FIGS. 13-10, the aspect of the stick controller 31A is shown in the lower right part of the production diagram in correspondence with the production diagram.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays decorations in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the timing when the decoration symbols in the variation pattern should be stopped and displayed. A symbol combination ("222" in this example) is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed. At this time, the active display area 10TM013 displays the normal mode active display 10TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot type suggestive effect at the timing when the big hit type suggestive effect should be executed in the variation pattern, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Secondly, while the combination of decoration patterns (“222” in this example) that results in the display result being “big hit” is stopped and displayed, a transparent member (such as a glass plate) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked. A cracked image (screen cracked image 10TM500) in which the screen is inserted is superimposed and displayed. The decorative pattern is an image having a higher display priority than the crack image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it looks as if the decoration pattern and the crack image are displayed in order from the front to the back. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10(1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10(3), at the timing when the second operation prompting display should be displayed, a second display for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. 2. The display 10TM600 prompting the operation and the time bar 10TM600T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective are displayed. Since the second operation prompting display 10TM600 and the time bar 10TM600T are images with a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the screen crack image and the decoration pattern, the player does not understand the screen crack image and the decoration pattern. It looks like it's displayed in front of you. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

Next, when it is determined not to execute the variable probability notification effect at the start of variation, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are continuously stopped to display a combination of even-numbered symbols (“222” in this example) whose jackpot type is “2R normal jackpot”. A cracked image (screen cracked image 10TM500) in which a transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen is cracked is displayed superimposed, and the characters "normal big win" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Let At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10(4), the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

In addition, when it is decided to execute the probability variation notification effect of the fourth mode at the time of fluctuation start, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the operation is performed, a combination of even-numbered symbols ("222" in this example), which has been stop-displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", is changed to the jackpot type. is changed to a combination of odd-numbered symbols ("555" in this example) that is a "4R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, the screen crack image 10TM500 is changed to an image (screen crack image 10TM500A) in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is broken, and the characters "probability variable big hit" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. display. Since the combination of odd symbols (in this example, "555") and the characters "probable variable jackpot" are images with a higher display priority than the screen split image (the display layer is higher), the player appears to be displayed in front of the cracked screen image. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed. That is, the suggested jackpot type is changed from the normal jackpot to the probability variable jackpot.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms once in accordance with the execution of the variable probability notification effect of the fourth mode, and the operation unit LED emit white light.

In addition, when it is decided to execute the probability variation notification effect of the fifth aspect at the time of start of variation, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the operation is performed, a combination of even-numbered symbols ("222" in this example), which has been stop-displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", is changed to the jackpot type. is changed to a combination of odd-numbered symbols ("777" in this example) that is a "10R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, the screen crack image 10TM500 is changed to an image (screen crack image 10TM500A) in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked, and at the center of the image display device 5, a "probable variable MAX jackpot" is displayed. display the characters. The combination of odd numbered symbols (in this example, "777") and the characters "probability variation MAX jackpot" are images with a higher display priority than the screen split image (the display layer is higher), so the player It seems to be displayed in front of the cracked screen image. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed. That is, the suggested jackpot type is changed from the normal jackpot to the variable probability jackpot, and the occurrence of the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds is notified.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 4500 ms once in accordance with the execution of the variable probability notification effect of the fifth mode, and the operation unit LED emit rainbow colors.

It should be noted that, in the probability variation notification production, sound effects unique to the probability variation notification production from the speakers 8L and 8R (4th aspect probability variation notification production: sound effect A, 5th aspect probability variation notification production: sound effect B) are reproduced and output. The stick controller 31A may be caused to vibrate and the operation unit LED may be caused to emit light corresponding to the period in which the stick controller 31A is present.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and special symbol fluctuation time and effect content ( Reach, pseudo-run, etc.), based on the reception of a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbols is executed, and the special symbols It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the contents of the production (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 13-11 is a flow chart showing effect determination processing executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start shown in FIGS. 13-11 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is designated as a display result. A production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 13-11.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first vibration effect is executed and the effect mode based on the table (see FIGS. 13-13) for determining whether the first vibration effect is executed and the effect mode (step S10TM1000).

As shown in FIG. 13-13, in the presence/absence of execution of the first vibration effect and effect mode determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the first vibration effect and the effect mode are determined according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command. A judgment value is assigned for

Effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first vibration effect at a rate of 90% when the display result is “no”, and at a rate of 7%, the first mode (light emission color: white, period: 1500ms), and decides to execute the first vibration effect of the second mode (emission color: red, execution period: 3000ms) at a rate of 3%.

When the display result is a "jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first vibration effect at a rate of 50%, and at a rate of 15%, the first mode (light emitting color: white, execution period: 1500 ms), decided to execute the first vibration effect of the second mode (emission color: red, execution period: 3000 ms) at a rate of 30%; %, to execute the first vibration effect of the third mode (luminescence color: rainbow, execution period: 3000 ms).

Thus, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the first vibration effect is executed immediately after the fluctuation starts.

Further, with respect to the performance mode of the first vibration performance, the second mode has a higher expectation for a big win than the first mode, and the third mode has a higher expectation for a big win than the second mode. there is In particular, in this example, it is determined that the display result of the variable display will be a "big win" by executing the first vibration effect of the third mode. That is, the first vibration effect of the third mode is an example of a big win confirmation effect that suggests (informs) that the display result of the variable display has won a big win. As described above, regarding the effect mode when the first vibration effect is executed, the order of the first mode (expectation: low) < second mode (expectation: high) < third mode (expectation: fixed) Expectations for the big win are high. Due to the presence of a plurality of presentation modes in this way, when the first vibration presentation is executed, the player also pays attention to the presentation mode (light emission color of the operation unit LED and vibration period of the stick controller 31A). It will be.

In addition, if there are multiple models with different jackpot probabilities as game machines with specific characters, stories, etc. and light specs with the highest jackpot probability exist), the expectation level of the first vibration performance in models with a high jackpot probability and the expectation level of the first vibration performance in models with a low jackpot probability. may be different or may be common. For example, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, in the case of a middle-spec model that is designed to win the jackpot at 1/199, the jackpot of the first mode first vibration effect The expectation level is 60% or more, the jackpot expectation level of the first vibration performance of the second mode is 80% or more, and the jackpot expectation level of the first vibration performance of the third mode is 100%, corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability. When using the display result determination table for the display result determination table, in the full-spec model that is designed to win the jackpot at 1/319, the jackpot expectation of the first vibration effect of the first mode is 50% or more, and the second mode is The degree of expectation for a big hit in the first vibration effect may be 70% or more, and the degree of expectation for a big win in the first vibration effect in the third mode may be 100%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation, that is, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is the variation pattern with the reach effect (“normal reach out”, “super reach out”, “ It is determined whether it is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot") (step S10TM1010). If the variation pattern does not involve a ready-to-win effect (if the variation pattern is "non-reach to lose") (NO in step S10TM1010), the process proceeds to step S10TM1030.

If it is a variation pattern with a reach effect (if the variation pattern is "normal reach loss", "super reach loss", "normal reach big hit" or "super reach big hit") (YES in step S10TM1010), for effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second vibration effect based on the table (see FIGS. 13-14) for determining whether or not to execute the second vibration effect (step S10TM1020).

As shown in FIGS. 13-14, in the execution/non-execution determination table for the second vibration effect, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the second vibration effect is assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command. is

The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the second vibration effect at a rate of 100% when the display result is "missing". The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the second vibration effect at a rate of 95% when the display result is a "jackpot", and executes the second vibration effect at a rate of 5% (light emission color: rainbow, execution period: 3000 ms).

As described above, in this example, it is determined that the display result of the variation display is a "big win" by executing the second vibration effect. That is, the second vibration effect is an example of a big win confirmation effect that suggests (informs) that the display result of the variable display has won a big win.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern determined at the start of variation, that is, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern with super reach (“super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot”). (step S10TM1030). If the variation pattern is not accompanied by super reach (if the variation pattern is not "super reach miss" or "super reach jackpot") (NO in step S10TM1030), the process proceeds to step S10TM1070.

If it is a variation pattern with super reach (if the variation pattern is "super reach lost" or "super reach jackpot") (YES in step S10TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a strong development effect. , based on the table (see FIGS. 13-15) for determining whether or not to execute strong development effects (step S10TM1040).

As shown in FIGS. 13-15, in the execution/non-execution determination table for the strong development effect, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the strong development effect is assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command. there is

The performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the strong development performance at a rate of 80% and to execute the strong development performance at a rate of 20% when the display result is "miss". A performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute a strong development performance at a rate of 40% and to execute a strong development performance at a rate of 60% when the display result is a "big hit".

In this way, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the strong development effect is executed than when the strong development effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the strong development effect is executed.

In addition, if there are multiple models with different jackpot probabilities as game machines with specific characters, stories, etc. and light specs with the highest jackpot probability exist), the expectation of strong development production on models with high jackpot probability and the expectation of strong development production on models with low jackpot probability It may be set so that it can be shared, or it may be common. For example, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of low probability, for a middle-spec model that is designed to win the jackpot at 1/199, the expectation of the jackpot is set to 40%. As described above, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, even with a full-spec model that is designed to win the jackpot at 1/319, the expectation of the jackpot of strong development production is set to 40. % or more.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the third vibration effect based on the table (see FIGS. 13-16) for determining whether or not to execute the third vibration effect (step S10TM1050).

As shown in FIGS. 13-16, in the execution/non-execution determination table for the third vibration effect, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the third vibration effect is assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command. is

When the display result is "no", the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the third vibration effect at a rate of 95%, and determines to execute the third vibration effect at a rate of 5%. do. The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the third vibration effect at a rate of 30% when the display result is a "big hit", and at a rate of 70%, the third vibration effect (light emission color: white, execution period: 1500 ms).

Thus, when the third vibration effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the third vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the third vibration effect is executed.

In addition, if there are multiple models with different jackpot probabilities as game machines with specific characters, stories, etc. and light specs with the highest jackpot probability exist), the expectation of strong development production on models with high jackpot probability and the expectation of strong development production on models with low jackpot probability It may be set so that it can be shared, or it may be common. For example, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of low probability, in a middle-spec model that is designed to win the jackpot at 1/199, the third vibration effect jackpot expectation is set to 50. % or more, and when using a display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, even a full-spec model that wins the big win at 1/319 is expected to win the big win of the third vibration performance. may be 50% or more.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the fourth vibration effect based on the table (see FIGS. 13-17) for determining whether or not to execute the fourth vibration effect (step S10TM1060).

As shown in FIGS. 13-17, in the execution/non-execution determination table for the fourth vibration effect, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the fourth vibration effect is assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command. is

The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the fourth vibration effect at a rate of 100% when the display result is "missing". The effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the fourth vibration effect at a rate of 95% when the display result is a "jackpot", and executes the fourth vibration effect at a rate of 5% (light emission color: rainbow, execution period: 3000 ms).

As described above, in this example, execution of the fourth vibration effect confirms that the display result of the variation display is a "big hit". That is, the fourth vibration effect is an example of a big win confirmation effect that suggests (informs) that the display result of the variable display has won a big win.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in notice effect, which will be described later, based on a table (see FIGS. 13-18) for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in notice effect (step S10TM1070).

The cut-in notice effect in the present embodiment is a kind of notice effect suggesting the display result, and is performed at a predetermined timing (in this example, 5 seconds when the first operation prompt display is displayed) when the battle effect is being executed. 13-24 (9), the cut-in image 10TM700 displaying the characters "extreme heat" is displayed in the entire central area in the vertical direction of the screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 13-24 (9)). From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is being displayed, suddenly a display mode with a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and the image related to the other effect is displayed) Since a cut-in image that appears to be displayed in front of the image will be displayed, the user will be attracted to the change in the screen when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-18, in the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution decision table, a determination value for deciding whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is assigned according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. is

The effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 80% and to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 20% when the display result is "missing". do. The effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 50% when the display result is a "jackpot", and decides to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 50%. do.

Thus, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is not executed. Therefore, when the battle effect is being executed, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the second vibration effect (determines whether to execute in step S10TM1020), the third vibration effect (determines whether to execute in step S10TM1050), or the fourth vibration effect (determines whether to execute in step S10TM1060). (step S10TM1080). If it is decided not to execute any of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect (NO in step S10TM1080), the process proceeds to step S10TM1100.

If it is determined to execute any of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, or the fourth vibration effect (YES in step S10TM1080), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration notice effect is to be executed and The notice target is determined based on the table (see FIGS. 13-19) for determining whether or not to execute the vibration notice effect and the notice target (step S10TM1090).

As shown in FIG. 13-19, in the presence/absence of execution of the vibration notice effect and the notice object determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the vibration notice effect and the vibration notice effect are executed according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. A determination value is assigned for determining the type of single vibration performance (second vibration performance, third vibration performance, or fourth vibration performance) to be notified (to be notified).

The effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration advance notice effect at a rate of 90% when the display result is "no" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect. It decides not to do so, and decides to execute the vibration notice performance with the notice target as the third vibration performance at a rate of 10%.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration advance notice effect at a rate of 80% when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the second vibration effect. It decides not to do so, and decides to execute the vibration notice performance with the notice object as the second vibration performance at a rate of 20%.
The effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration notice effect at a rate of 70% when the display result is a "big hit" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect. It decides not to do so, and decides to execute the vibration notice performance with the notice target as the third vibration performance at a rate of 30%.
The production control CPU 120 executes the vibration advance notice production at a rate of 80% when the display result is "big hit" and the single vibration production determined to be executed is the fourth vibration production. It decides not to do so, and decides to execute the vibration forewarning performance with the fourth vibration performance as the foretelling target at a rate of 20%.
The effect control CPU 120, when the display result is a "jackpot" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the second vibration effect and the third vibration effect, at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to execute the vibration foretelling performance, and it is decided to execute the vibration foretelling performance in which the foretelling target is the second vibration performance at a rate of 20%.
Effect control CPU 120, when the display result is a "jackpot" and the single vibration effect determined to be executed is the second vibration effect and the fourth vibration effect, at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to execute the vibration foretelling performance, and to execute the vibration foretelling performance in which the foretelling target is the second vibration performance at a rate of 20%.
The performance control CPU 120, when the display result is a "jackpot" and the independent vibration performance determined to be executed is the third vibration performance and the fourth vibration performance, at a rate of 60%. It is decided not to execute the vibration foretelling performance, and to execute the vibration foretelling performance in which the notice object is the third vibration performance at a rate of 40%.
The effect control CPU 120, when the display result is a "jackpot" and the single vibration effects determined to be executed are the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect, , 80% of the decision is made not to execute the vibration notice performance, and 20% of the decision is made to execute the vibration notice performance in which the notice object is the second vibration performance.

In this way, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the vibration foretelling effect is executed than when the vibration foretelling effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the vibration advance notice effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute a plurality of types of single vibration effects, the single vibration effect to be executed first is set as the target of the advance notice when the vibration warning effects are executed. is not limited to such a form, and when it is determined to execute a plurality of types of single vibration effects, when executing a vibration notice effect, the second and subsequent single vibration effects are executed. It may be subject to notice. For example, when it is determined that the third vibration effect and the fourth vibration effect are to be executed, the vibration foretelling effect may be executed with the fourth vibration effect as the target of the notice.

Also, in this way, when it is decided to execute a plurality of types of single vibration effects, and when it is possible to execute a vibration forewarning effect for a single vibration effect to be executed later, The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when a vibration notice effect targeted for a notice of a single vibration effect executed later is executed than when a vibration notice effect targeted for notice of a single vibration effect executed later is executed. can be made higher.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of types of single vibration effects are executed, the player also pays attention to which vibration advance notice effect corresponding to which single vibration effect is executed. It is possible to further improve the interest of the single vibration effect and the vibration notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the third vibration effect (determines whether to execute in step S10TM1050), the strong development effect (determines to execute in step S10TM1040), or the cut-in notice effect (determines to execute in step S10TM1070). It is determined whether it is decided to execute either one (step S10TM1100). If it is decided not to execute any of the third vibration effect, strong development effect, and cut-in notice effect (NO in step S10TM1100), the process proceeds to step S10TM1120.

If it is determined to execute any of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, or the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S10TM1100), whether or not to execute a timer effect, which will be described later, and the corresponding notice effect are determined. , based on the table (see FIG. 13-20) for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect and the corresponding advance notice effect (step S10TM1110).

In this embodiment, a timer effect can be executed based on the determination result at the start of fluctuation. The timer effect is a effect corresponding to any of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in advance effect, which are a kind of advance notice effect suggesting the display result, and the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the This is an effect for displaying (announcing) the remaining time (number of seconds) until one of the cut-in notice effects is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is a variation corresponding to the third vibration effect, which is a kind of in-varying notice effect suggesting the display result of the variable display being executed (the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied). It is an example of a middle notice effect, and it is also an example of a change notice effect corresponding to a strong development effect, which is a kind of change notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display being executed (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied). It is also an example of a variable notice effect corresponding to a cut-in notice effect, which is a kind of change notice effect suggesting the display result of the variable display being executed (variable display in which the start condition is satisfied).

In this embodiment, the timer effect is started n seconds before any one of the third vibration effect, strong development effect, and cut-in notice effect is executed. In the timer effect, a timer image 10TM800 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. At the timing when the timer image 10TM800 is displayed, the timer image 10TM800 indicates an initial value n (for example, a numerical value of "00:30" indicating 30 seconds, a numerical value of "01:00" indicating 60 seconds) (Fig. 13-23(1)). Then, the numerical value indicated by the timer image 10TM800 (the numerical value displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5) is decremented by 1 each time one second elapses, and is updated at the timing of "00:00" ( Any of the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in notice effect will be executed at the timing when the remaining time is 0 seconds (see FIG. 13-23 (7)). In this way, the timer effect is a effect in which the remaining time (remaining n seconds to remaining 0 seconds) indicated by the timer image is subtracted (countdown operation until the start of the battle effect).

As shown in FIG. 13-20, in the table for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect and the corresponding advance notice effect, depending on the display result specified by the display result specifying command, whether or not to execute the timer effect and the timer A determination value is assigned for determining the advance notice effect (third vibration effect, strong development effect, or cut-in advance notice effect) corresponding to the effect.

The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the timer effect at a rate of 70% when the display result is "miss" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect. , and decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 30%.
The effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the timer effect at a rate of 70% when the display result is "loss" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is the strong development effect. Then, it decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 30%.
The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the timer effect at a rate of 70% when the display result is "missing" and the notice effect decided to be executed is the cut-in notice effect. , and decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 30%.
The performance control CPU 120 performs timer performance at a rate of 60% when the display result is "missing" and the advance notice performance determined to be executed is the third vibration performance and the strong development performance. , decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 20%, and decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 20%. .
The effect control CPU 120 sets the timer at a rate of 60% when the display result is "missing" and the notice effect decided to be executed is the third vibration effect and the cut-in notice effect. It is decided not to execute the performance, it is decided to execute the timer performance corresponding to the third vibration performance at a rate of 20%, and the timer performance corresponding to the cut-in notice performance is executed at a rate of 20%. decide.
The effect control CPU 120 performs timer effects at a rate of 60% when the display result is "missing" and the advance notice effects determined to be executed are the strong development effect and the cut-in advance notice effect. is determined not to be executed, 20% of the timer production corresponding to the strong development production is executed, and 20% of the timer production corresponding to the cut-in notice production is executed. .
The performance control CPU 120 performs 55 when the display result is "missing" and the notice effects determined to be executed are the third vibration effect, the strong development effect, and the cut-in notice effect. 15% decided not to execute the timer effect, 15% decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and 15% decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect. It decides to execute it, and decides to execute a timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the timer effect at a rate of 40% when the display result is a "jackpot" and the notice effect determined to be executed is the third vibration effect. , and decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 60%.
The effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the timer effect at a rate of 40% when the display result is a "jackpot" and the advance notice effect determined to be executed is the strong development effect. Then, it decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 60%.
The performance control CPU 120 does not execute the timer performance at a rate of 40% when the display result is a "jackpot" and the announcement performance determined to be executed is the cut-in announcement performance. , and decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%.
The effect control CPU 120 performs a timer effect at a rate of 30% when the display result is a "jackpot" and the advance notice effect decided to be executed is the third vibration effect and the strong development effect. , decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect at a rate of 35%, and decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect at a rate of 35%. .
The effect control CPU 120 sets the timer at a rate of 30% when the display result is a "jackpot" and the notice effect decided to be executed is the third vibration effect and the cut-in notice effect. It is decided not to execute the performance, it is decided to execute the timer performance corresponding to the third vibration performance at a rate of 35%, and the timer performance corresponding to the cut-in notice performance is executed at a rate of 35%. decide.
The effect control CPU 120 performs a timer effect at a rate of 30% when the display result is a "big win" and the advance notice effect decided to be executed is the strong development effect and the cut-in notice effect. is determined not to be executed, 35% of the time it is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect, and 35% of the time it is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. .
The performance control CPU 120 performs 10 when the display result is a "big hit" and the announcement performance determined to be executed is the third vibration performance, the strong development performance, and the cut-in announcement performance. 30% decide not to execute the timer effect, 30% decide to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and 30% decide to execute the timer effect corresponding to the strong development effect. It decides to execute it, and decides to execute a timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 30%.

Thus, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the timer effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects, when executing a timer effect, the timer effect corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of advance notice effects is performed. Although an example of executing is shown, not limited to such a form, timer effects may be executed corresponding to each of a plurality of types of advance notice effects. For example, when it is decided to execute the third vibration effect and the cut-in notice effect as the notice effect, the first timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is executed. A second timer effect may be executed. That is, it may be possible to execute a plurality of times of timer effects targeting different advance notice effects in one time variable display. In this way, when a plurality of timer effects are executed in one variable display, the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be simultaneously executed in parallel.

According to this production structure, the second timer production is executed when the player expects that any advance notice production will be executed by executing the first timer production. By doing so, it is possible to expect that another announcement effect will be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved step by step.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result determined at the start of variation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (step S10TM1120). If the display result specified by the display result specifying command is not "big win" (NO in step S10TM1120), the process ends.

When the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big win" (YES in step S10TM1120), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the blessing effect (step S10TM1130) and suggests the type of the big win. It is decided to execute the effect (step S10TM1040).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable probability notification effect and the effect mode based on the table (see FIGS. 13 to 21) for determining whether or not to execute the variable probability notification effect and the effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, in the probability variation notification effect execution presence/absence and effect mode determination table, according to the display result (jackpot type) specified by the display result specification command, the probability variation notification effect execution presence/absence and effect mode Judgment values are assigned for determination.

When the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the variable probability notification effect at a rate of 100%.

When the jackpot type is "4R probability variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines not to execute the probability variation notification production at a rate of 50%, and the probability variation notification production in the fourth mode at a rate of 50% (light emission color: white, execution period: 3000ms).

When the jackpot type is "10R probability variation big hit", the production control CPU 120 determines not to execute the probability variation notification production at a rate of 50%, and the probability variation notification production of the fourth mode at a rate of 25% (light emission color: white, execution period: 3000 ms), and decides to execute the fifth mode probability variable notification effect (light emission color: rainbow, execution period: 4500 ms) at a rate of 25%.

Thus, the probability variation notification effect of the fifth mode is executed only when the jackpot type is "10R probability variation big hit". It grasps that it won the probability variable jackpot of the number of rounds. In addition, since the probability variation notification effect of the fourth mode can be executed when the jackpot type is "4R probability variation big hit" and when the jackpot type is "10R probability variation big hit", the probability variation notification effect of the fourth mode is executed, the player confirms that the jackpot type is either "4R probability variable jackpot" or "10R probability variable jackpot", that is, "variable probability jackpot" (minimum round (2R) denial, normal jackpot denial) Grasp that.

Here, when the jackpot type is "4R probability variation big hit", probability variation notification production is not executed at a rate of 50%, and when the jackpot type is "10R probability variation big hit", probability variation at a rate of 50% Since the notification performance is not executed, there is a possibility that the jackpot type is ``4R probability variable big hit'' or ``10R probability variable big hit'' even if the probability variable notification performance is not executed in the jackpot type suggestive performance. Therefore, the player can expect that the jackpot type is "4R probability variable jackpot" or "10R probability variable jackpot" even when the probability variable notification effect is not executed.

Here, when the jackpot type is "4R probability variable jackpot" or "10R probability variable jackpot", when the probability variable notification effect is not executed, a combination of even-numbered symbols ("222" in this example) is once used as a jackpot symbol. is fixed and stopped, and characters of ``normal jackpot'' are displayed in the central part of the image display device 5, and then the type of jackpot is reported to be ``4R probability variable jackpot'' or ``10R probability variable jackpot'' during the round of the jackpot. A promotion performance or the like may be executed. The promotion effect during the round may be effect accompanied by vibrating motion of the stick controller 31A and light emission of the operation unit LED.

(An example of a single vibration effect and a change notice effect with vibration of the operation part)
Next, in the determination at the start of the fluctuation, the display result is determined as "big hit", the big hit type is determined as "10R probability variable big hit", and the variation pattern is determined as "super reach big hit (battle production [victory production])". However, in the fluctuation start production decision processing, regarding the production example when it is decided to execute the single vibration production, the fluctuation notice production with vibration of the operation unit, the vibration notice production, the cut-in notice production, and the timer production, Description will be made with reference to FIGS. 13-22 to 13-24.

FIG. 13-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the single vibration effect, the fluctuation notice effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit, the vibration notice effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect. -23 and FIGS. 13-24 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to the single vibration effect, the fluctuation notice effect accompanied by the vibration of the operating unit, the vibration notice effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect.

In this example, in the effect determination process at the time of start winning (see FIG. 12-6 of [Description of characteristic part 07TM]), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display to be the red mode in step S07TM1020, In step S07TM1050, it is assumed that the change pattern of the change effect is determined to be the change pattern (for example, change pattern 107) displayed in the active display in the red mode during the active shift.

Further, in this example, in the process of determining the effect at the time of fluctuation start, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first vibration effect of the second mode in step S10TM1000, and executes the strong development effect in step S10TM1040. At step S10TM1050, it is determined to execute the third vibration effect, at step S10TM1060, it is determined to execute the fourth vibration effect, at step S10TM1070, it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect, and step S10TM1090. In step S10TM1110, it is determined to execute a vibration forewarning performance with the third vibration performance as the foretelling target, and in step S10TM1110, it is determined to execute a timer performance corresponding to the third vibration performance, and in step S10TM1130, a blessing performance is executed. , and in step S10TM1140 it is decided to execute the jackpot type suggesting effect, and in step S10TM1150 it is decided to execute the probability variation notification effect of the fifth mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 executes a variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the small Start the variable display of the pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 10TM013 of the image display device 5 to display a red mode active display 10TM003A corresponding to the currently executed variable display.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes a timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and causes the image display device 5 to display a timer image 10TM800 (displays the characters "01:00") in the lower right area of the screen.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first vibration effect of the second mode, executes once the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms, and causes the operation unit LED to emit red light.

In this example, the timing at which the timer image 10TM800 is displayed and the timing at which the first vibration effect is executed are common timings. You may make it display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (2), at the timing 5000 ms after the start of the variable display (timing T2 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 selects the third vibration effect as the announcement target. , and an active display 10TM003AS in a red mode and an operation mode is displayed in the active display area 10TM013. In other words, while the red mode of the active display is maintained, the active display of the red mode is changed from the stationary mode to the operating mode.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:55") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has ended the first vibration effect of the second mode, and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (3), at the timing (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-22) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pattern of the image display device 5. A ready-to-win state is set by stop-displaying the decoration pattern "2" in the area 5L and the pattern display area 5R, and characters "ready-to-win!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:55") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (4), a predetermined period of time before the development of super reach in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (for example, at the timing 40 seconds before the start of the battle production At the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-22), a strong development effect is executed, and a darkened image 10TM400 is displayed as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the background image, the decorative pattern, And a blackout effect is executed in which the visibility of the ready-to-reach effect image is lowered to make it difficult to see.

Here, the background image, the decoration pattern, and the ready-to-win effect image become difficult to see due to the blackout effect, but the active display 10TM003AS in the red mode and operation mode and the small pattern remain visible. That is, while the visibility of the decoration symbol "2" which is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decoration symbol which is variably displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the visibility of the active display area is reduced. The visibility of the active display 10TM003AS in the red mode and operation mode displayed in 10TM013 and the small patterns displayed in a variable manner in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are not degraded.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:40") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed. In this way, the timer image 10TM800 is visible even during the period in which the blackout effect is being executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (5), at the timing (timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-22) after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has passed since the strong development production was started, production control The display CPU 120 continues to display the darkened image 10TM400, and executes an effect production of superimposing the flame effect image 10TM410 and the characters "Decisive Battle" on the darkened image 10TM400. The flame effect image 10TM410 is an image with a higher display priority than the darkened image 10TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the characters "decisive battle" are displayed further than the flame effect image 10TM410. This is an image with a high priority (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it looks as if the letters "Decisive Battle", the flame effect image 10TM410, and the darkening image 10TM400 are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:30") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the stick controller 31A to vibrate for 1500 ms (ON: 1500 ms, 0FF: cycle of 500 ms) is executed 10 times, and the operation unit LED emits white light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (6), at the timing (timing of T4B shown in FIG. 13-22) after a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the strong development production was started, production control The application CPU 120 executes a movable body motion presentation for moving the movable body 10TM450 from the tilted position to the standing position.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:10") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes once an action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 10000 ms corresponding to a predetermined effect execution period (for example, a period in which the movable body 10TM450 is in the standing position), and the operation is performed. LED is made to emit white light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (7), at the timing (timing of T4C shown in FIG. 13-22) after a predetermined period (40 seconds in this example) has passed since the strong development production was started, production control The CPU 120 executes an action of returning the movable body 10TM450 in the standing position to the tilted position, and terminates the movable body action rendering.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:00") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed. At this timing (the timing of T4C shown in FIG. 13-22), the remaining time indicated by the timer image 10TM800 is updated to zero. That is, the timer image 10TM800 is updated to the final mode, and it is notified that it is time to start the highly anticipated effect (in this example, the third vibration effect).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-23 (8), at the timing (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-22) to develop super reach in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120, with the end of the strong development effect , the blackout presentation and the effect presentation are terminated, and the battle presentation is executed. Here, along with the execution of the battle presentation, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B. The effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration forewarning effect with the third vibration effect as the foretelling target, and displays the active display 10TM003A in the red mode in the active display area 10TM013. That is, in response to the execution of the third vibration effect which is the target of the vibration preview effect, the active display in the red mode is changed from the moving mode to the stationary mode while maintaining the red mode of the active display. It is changing (reverting).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (the characters "00:00") displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the third vibration effect, vibrates the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (9), at the timing five seconds before the first operation prompting display is displayed (timing T6 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 changes the image display device. 5, a cut-in announcement effect is executed in the state where the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B are displayed in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the characters "hot heat" are displayed in the entire central area of the screen of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. Then, the cut-in image 10TM700 is displayed. From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is being displayed, suddenly a display mode with a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and the image related to the other effect is displayed) Since a cut-in image that appears to be displayed in front of the image will be displayed, the user will be attracted to the change in the screen when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (10), a battle effect image 10TM250 is displayed, suggesting that the victory or defeat of the battle will be decided in a state in which the ally character 10TM200A launches a final attack on the enemy character 10TM200B in the battle production. , the effect control CPU 120 displays the first operation prompting display 10TM300 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 at the timing (the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 13-22) to display the first operation prompting display 10TM300. A display 10TM300, a time bar 10TM300T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is valid, and the characters "Close!!" are displayed.

Here, the first operation prompting display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T, and the characters "Close!!" have a higher display priority than the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image (the display layer is higher). ) image, it appears to the player that it is displayed in front of the background image and the super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) image.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth vibration effect, vibrates the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms once, and causes the operation unit LED to emit light in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (11), at the timing when the stick controller 31A is operated by the player (timing T8 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning effect. do. In the victory presentation, the image display device 5 is displayed with the ally character 10TM200A that has won against the enemy character 10TM200B, and the characters "Victory" are displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are displayed. Secondly, the combination of decoration symbols ("222" in this example) that gives the display result of "big win" is stopped from swinging. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the blessing effect, and corresponds to the execution period of the predetermined effect (the period in which the combination of the decorative symbols is suspended (the period of T8 to T9 shown in FIG. 13-22)) and vibrates the stick controller 31A for 6000 ms once, causing the operation unit LED to emit rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (12), at the timing (timing of T8A shown in FIG. 13-22) to stop display the decoration pattern in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 changes the pattern display areas 5L and 5C. , and 5R, the combination of decoration symbols ("222" in this example) that will result in a "big win" display result is stopped (but not fixed). At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the blessing effect and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibrating mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (13), at the timing (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 13-22) to execute the jackpot type suggesting effect in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot type suggesting effect. Execution, and the image display device 5 in a state in which a combination of decorative patterns (in this example, a combination of even-numbered patterns "222") that results in a "jackpot" display result is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. A crack image (screen crack image 10TM500) in which a transparent member (glass plate or the like) forming the screen of 1 is cracked is superimposed and displayed. The decorative pattern is an image having a higher display priority than the crack image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it looks as if the decoration pattern and the crack image are displayed in order from the front to the back. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (14), at the timing when the second operation prompting display should be displayed (the timing of T10 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 causes A second operation promotion display 10TM600 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 10TM600T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are displayed in the section. Since the second operation prompting display 10TM600 and the time bar 10TM600T are images with a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the screen crack image and the decoration pattern, the player does not understand the screen crack image and the decoration pattern. It looks like it's displayed in front of you. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (15), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated by the player (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 13-22), the effect control CPU 120 changes the pattern display area 5L. , 5C, and 5R display a combination of decorative patterns (in this example, a combination of odd-numbered patterns '777') whose jackpot type is '10R probability variable jackpot', and the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is broken. The image of the mode (screen split image 10TM500A) is superimposed and displayed, and the characters "probability variable MAX jackpot" are displayed in the central part of the image display device 5 . A combination of decorative symbols (in this example, a combination of odd-numbered symbols "777") and the characters "Variable probability MAX jackpot" are images with a higher display priority than the split screen image (the display layer is higher). Therefore, from the player's point of view, the image appears to be displayed in front of the screen crack image. At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r, the variable display of the small patterns is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable probability notification effect of the fifth mode, executes once the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 4500 ms, and causes the operation unit LED to emit rainbow color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-24 (16), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T12 shown in FIG. 13-22), the design confirmation designation command is received. The CPU 120 terminates the jackpot type suggesting effect and stops the final combination of decoration symbols (in this example, "777"). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("777" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot" is fixed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, in the determination at the start of the fluctuation, the display result is determined as "missing", and the variation pattern is determined as "super reach failure (battle production [defeat production])", and in the production determination process at the start of the fluctuation, single vibration 13-25 to 13-27 will be used to describe examples of effects when it is decided to execute the effect, the notice effect during fluctuation accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect.

FIG. 13-25 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the single vibration effect, the fluctuation notice effect accompanied by the vibration of the operation unit, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect, and FIG. 13-26 and FIG. 13-27 is an explanatory diagram showing examples of effect images related to a single vibration effect, a change notice effect accompanied by vibration of the operation unit, a cut-in notice effect, and a timer effect.

In this example, in the effect determination process at the time of start winning (see FIG. 12-6 of [Description of characteristic part 07TM]), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display to be the red mode in step S07TM1020. In S07TM1050, it is assumed that the change pattern of the change effect is determined to be a change pattern (for example, change pattern 107) that is displayed in red active display during active shift.

Further, in this example, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first vibration effect of the first mode in step S10TM1000, and executes the strong development effect in step S10TM1040. In step S10TM1070, it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, and in step S10TM1110, it is decided to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (1), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-25), the effect control CPU 120 executes a variation pattern designation command. Based on the specified variation pattern, in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the small Start the variable display of the pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 10TM013 of the image display device 5 to display a red mode active display 10TM003A corresponding to the currently executed variable display.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes a timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and causes the image display device 5 to display a timer image 10TM800 (displays characters "01:30") in the lower right area of the screen.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first vibration effect of the first mode, executes once the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms, and causes the operation unit LED to emit white light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (2), at the timing (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 13-25) to establish the reach state in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pattern of the image display device 5 A ready-to-win state is set by stop-displaying the decoration pattern "2" in the area 5L and the pattern display area 5R, and characters "ready-to-win!" At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns. That is, in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, the small patterns are also stopped. The variable display is continued without displaying.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "01:15") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has ended the first vibration effect of the first mode, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (3), timing before a predetermined period of super reach development in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (for example, 40 seconds before the battle production starts, At the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 13-25), the strong development effect is executed, and the darkening image 10TM400 is displayed as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, so that the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach A blackout effect is executed in which the visibility of the effect image is lowered to make it difficult to see.

Here, due to the blackout effect, the background image, the decoration pattern, and the ready-to-win effect image become invisible, but the active display 10TM003A in the red mode and the small pattern remain visible. That is, while the visibility of the decoration symbol "2" which is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R and the decoration symbol which is variably displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, the visibility of the active display area is reduced. The visibility of the active display 10TM003A in the red mode displayed in 10TM013 and the small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are not lowered.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "01:10") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed. In this way, the timer image 10TM800 is visible even during the period in which the blackout effect is being executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (4), at the timing (timing of T3A shown in FIG. 13-25) after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has passed since the strong development production was started, production control The CPU 120 continues to display the darkened image 10TM400, and executes an effect presentation in which the flame effect image 10TM410 and the characters "Decisive Battle" are superimposed on the darkened image 10TM400. The flame effect image 10TM410 is an image with a higher display priority than the darkened image 10TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the characters "decisive battle" are displayed further than the flame effect image 10TM410. This is an image with a high priority (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's point of view, it looks as if the letters "Decisive Battle", the flame effect image 10TM410, and the darkening image 10TM400 are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "01:00") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the stick controller 31A to vibrate for 1500 ms (ON: 1500 ms, 0FF: cycle of 500 ms) is executed 10 times, and the operation unit LED emits white light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (5), at the timing (timing of T3B shown in FIG. 13-25) after a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the strong development production was started, production control The application CPU 120 executes a movable body motion presentation for moving the movable body 10TM450 from the tilted position to the standing position.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:40") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes once an action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 10000 ms corresponding to a predetermined effect execution period (for example, a period in which the movable body 10TM450 is in the standing position), and the operation is performed. LED is made to emit white light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (6), at the timing (timing of T3C shown in FIG. 13-25) after a predetermined period (40 seconds in this example) has passed since the strong development production was started, production control The CPU 120 executes an action of returning the movable body 10TM450 in the standing position to the tilted position, and terminates the movable body action rendering.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:30") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (7), at the timing (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 13-25) to develop super reach in the variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120, with the end of the strong development effect , the blackout presentation and the effect presentation are terminated, and the battle presentation is executed. Here, along with the execution of the battle presentation, the image display device 5 is caused to display the friend character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and displays the timer image 10TM800 (characters "00:20") in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5. ) is updated and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-26 (8), at the timing (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-25) after 20 seconds have passed since the development of super reach, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5. While the friend character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B are displayed in the center of the screen, the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is continuously executed, and the timer image 10TM800 (" 00:00”) is updated and displayed. At this timing (timing T5 shown in FIG. 13-25), the remaining time indicated by the timer image 10TM800 is updated to zero. That is, the timer image 10TM800 is updated to the final state, and the timing for starting the highly anticipated effect (cut-in notice effect in this example) is notified.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-27 (9), at the timing five seconds before the display of the first operation prompting display (timing T6 shown in FIG. 13-25), the effect control CPU 120 changes the image display device 5, the cut-in announcement effect is executed while the ally character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B are displayed in the center of the screen. In the cut-in notice effect, a cut-in image 10TM700 in which the characters "Super Heat" are displayed is displayed in the entire central region of the screen of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction. From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is being displayed, suddenly a display mode with a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and the image related to the other effect is displayed) Since a cut-in image that appears to be displayed in front of the image will be displayed, the user will be attracted to the change in the screen when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and the timer image 10TM800 displayed in the lower right area of the screen of the image display device 5 (displays characters "00:00"). erase.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-27(10), a battle effect image 10TM250 is displayed, suggesting that the victory or defeat of the battle will be decided in a state in which the ally character 10TM200A launches a final attack on the enemy character 10TM200B in the battle production. , the effect control CPU 120 displays the first operation prompting display 10TM300 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 at the timing (the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 13-25) to display the first operation prompting display 10TM300. A display 10TM300, a time bar 10TM300T for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A is valid, and the characters "Close!!" are displayed.

The first operation prompting display 10TM300, the time bar 10TM300T, and the characters “Close!!” are images with a higher display priority (higher display layer) than the background image and the super reach effect (battle effect) image. For this reason, it appears to the player that the background image and the super ready-to-win effect (battle effect) image are displayed in front.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-27 (11), at the timing when the stick controller 31A is operated by the player (timing T8 shown in FIG. 13-25), the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect. do. In the defeat effect, the characters "defeat" are displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 while the friend character 10TM200A and the enemy character 10TM200B are displayed on the image display device 5. , the combination of decorative symbols (“212” in this example) whose display result is “miss” is stopped from swinging. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to variably display the small patterns.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-27 (12), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T9 shown in FIG. The CPU 120 determines and stops the final combination of decoration symbols ("212" in this example). At this time, in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the combination of small patterns ("212" in this example) is confirmed and stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols that result in a display result of "loss" is determined and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

(Single vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the single vibration effect (for example, the first vibration effect) is executed as an effect that suggests the display result of the variable display that is being executed. The vibration effect (for example, the first vibration effect) may be executed as a look-ahead preview effect suggesting the display result of the variable display whose execution is pending. Specifically, whether or not to execute the single vibration effect is determined based on the determination result of the start winning determination based on the occurrence of the start winning opening (for example, the determination result at the start winning is a "jackpot", it is decided to execute the single vibration effect at a higher rate than when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "loss").

For example, when the first vibration effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, after the starting winning, the timing at which the variable display that is executed prior to the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is started At (the timing at which the pending memory is digested and the pending display is shifted), the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 200 ms (ON: 200 ms, 0FF: 200 ms cycle) is executed three times, and the variation that is the subject of the determination It is assumed that the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once at the timing when the display (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading announcement effect) is started.

Then, when it is determined that the first vibration effect is to be executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the determination is performed at a timing before the variation display (so-called target variation) subject to the determination is executed. Hold display corresponding to the target fluctuation display (so-called target fluctuation) in the operation mode (in this example, a round display with vertical and horizontal vibration movement, or a triangular display with vertical and horizontal vibration movement) A vibration forewarning effect to be displayed may be executed. That is, the vibration forewarning effect is the first vibration as a type of foreseeing forewarning effect that foreshadows the degree of expectation of a big hit of the [variable display whose execution is suspended (variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied) Effect] may be performed.

FIG. 13-28 shows a variable display whose execution is suspended (a variable display in which the starting condition is satisfied but the starting condition is not satisfied), a first vibration effect as a kind of anticipation effect for predicting the degree of expectation for a big hit, and an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to a vibration forewarning effect for foretelling execution of the first vibration effect.

In FIG. 13-28, on the screen of the image display device 5, a pending display area 10TM011 for displaying the first pending memory number (0 to 4 pending display 10TM001) and an active display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. An active display area 10TM013 for displaying 10TM003 is provided.

When the first reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a number of reserved displays 10TM001 corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the reserved display area 10TM011. That is, the pending display 10TM001 indicates that the starting condition (for example, winning the first starting winning port) is satisfied, but the starting condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game state is controlled). and the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. . Here, when a plurality of pending displays 10TM001 are displayed in the pending display region 10TM011, each region in which the pending displays 10TM001 are displayed is arranged in an order close to the active display region 10TM013 (in order from the right as seen from the player), A reserved display area 10TM011a, a reserved display area 10TM011b, a reserved display area 10TM011c, and a reserved display area 10TM011d.

In addition, in FIG. 13-28, for explanation of the position where the pending display is displayed, the center of each pending display area (holding display area 10TM011a, holding display area 10TM011b, holding display area 10TM011c, holding display area 10TM011d) center line is shown.

In this example, in the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display to be the normal mode, determines the change pattern of the change effect to be the change pattern 201, and sets the first prediction effect as the pre-reading notice effect. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the first vibration performance of the mode, and to execute the vibration preliminary announcement performance with the first vibration performance as the announcement target.

First, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, variable display of small patterns is executed, and in the active display area 10TM013 of the image display device 5, the normal mode active display 10TM003 corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed. In response to the fact that the number of first reserved memories is 1, a new start prize is generated when the reserved display 10TM001 in the normal mode is displayed in the reserved display area 10TM011a of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the number of first reserved memories is two.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration forewarning effect with the first vibration effect as the foretelling target, and newly displays the suspension display 10TM001S in the normal mode (white round display) and the operation mode in the suspension display area 10TM011b. I am displaying. As a result, the player can see that an effect (first vibration effect) in which the stick controller 31A vibrates is executed as a pre-reading notice effect corresponding to the holding display 10TM001S displayed in the motion mode (vibrating). will be expected.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has finished the first vibration effect as the pre-reading announcement effect, and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to The combination of decorative symbols ("246" in this example) is confirmed and stopped, and the combination of small symbols ("434" in this example) is confirmed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5. stop. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first vibration effect as an announcement target in accordance with the CPU 103 ending the variable display of the first special symbol (corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command). The vibration advance notice effect is ended, and the suspension display 10TM001S displayed in the motion mode (vibrating) in the suspension display area 10TM011b is set to the stationary mode. At this time, the suspended display 10TM001S that was being displayed in the operation mode stops at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation stop command. It may be displayed at a position shifted from the position (left and right center line). In the example shown in FIG. 13-28 (2), at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation stop command, the suspension display that was the target of the vibration preview effect is displayed at the center of the suspension display area 10TM011b (left and right center lines). ), the stationary pending display 10TM001 is displayed at a position shifted leftward from the center (right and left center line) of the pending display area 10TM011b.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has not yet executed the first vibration effect as the pre-reading announcement effect, and the mode of the stick controller 31A is set to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (3), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the normal mode active display 10TM003 displayed in the active display area 10TM013 as the first reserved storage number becomes 1, and also erases the reserved display area 10TM011 (holding display The normal mode suspended display 10TM001 displayed in the area 10TM011a and the suspended display area 10TM011b) is shifted one by one toward the active display area 10TM013. As a result, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and one suspended display 10TM001 is displayed in the suspended display area 10TM011 (suspended display area 10TM011a).

At this time, the suspended display 10TM001, which has been statically displayed at a position deviated from the center position (left and right center line) of the suspended display region 10TM011b, is moved to the center position (left and right center line) of the suspended display region 10TM011a after the shift display. will be displayed. In this example, since the first vibration effect as the foreseeing advance notice effect corresponding to the pending display 10TM001 displayed in the pending display area 10TM011a after the shift display is executed immediately after the shift (or at the same time as the shift display), The hold display 10TM001 after the shift display remains in the stationary mode and does not return to the operating mode.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes a first vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect, performs an operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 200 ms (ON: 200 ms, 0FF: cycle of 200 ms) three times, and emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 to The decoration pattern combination ("135" in this example) is fixed and stopped, and the small pattern combination ("135" in this example) is fixed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5. stop. In other words, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "mismatch" is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has ended the first vibration effect as the pre-reading announcement effect, and sets the mode of the stick controller 31A to the non-special mode (non-vibration mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-28 (5), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative patterns is started, and in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c and 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of small patterns is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the normal mode active display 10TM003 displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and the normal mode suspended display 10TM001 displayed in the suspended display area 10TM011 (suspended display area 10TM011a). to the active display area 10TM013. As a result, the active display 10TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 10TM013, and the suspended display 10TM001 is not displayed in the suspended display area 10TM011.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first vibration effect as the in-varying notice effect, once vibrates the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms, and causes the operation unit LED to emit white light.

Thus, when it is decided to execute the first vibration effect as a pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination at the time of the start win when the start win is generated, the hold display corresponding to the start win is displayed. By displaying in the operation mode (Fig. 13-28 (1)), it is possible to suggest that the first vibration effect as a pre-reading preview effect corresponding to the pending display will be executed. Further, after the execution of the first vibration effect as the foreknowledge effect, it is also possible to execute the first vibration effect as the fluctuating foretell effect at the timing when the variable display that is the target of the foreknowledge effect is executed ( Fig. 13-28(5)). As a result, for the common variable display, a first vibration effect as a foreseeing foretelling effect before the variable display is executed, and a first vibration effect as a foretelling effect during the fluctuation when the variable display is executed. A series of continuous announcement effects are executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the first vibration effect as the pre-reading foretelling effect and the effect mode of the first vibration effect as the during-fluctuation foretelling effect are made different. In the first vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 200 ms (ON: 200 ms, 0FF: 200 ms cycle) is executed three times, and the operating unit LED emits white light. In the first vibration effect as the middle notice effect, the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once, and the operation unit LED is caused to emit white light. Therefore, the player can determine whether the vibration of the stick controller 31A is being executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect or as a fluctuation notice effect during the period in which the first vibration effect as the continuous notice effect is being executed. You can easily find out if there is

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a single vibration effect (in this example, the first vibration effect) as a pre-reading notice effect (and a fluctuation notice effect), and a single vibration as a pre-read notice effect (and a fluctuation notice effect) It is possible to execute a vibration advance notice effect suggesting that the effect (first vibration effect) will be executed. In this way, not only the variable display being executed but also the single vibration performance corresponding to the variable display not being executed can be executed, thereby diversifying the interests of the single vibration performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a single vibration effect (in this example, the first vibration effect) as a continuous advance notice effect including a pre-reading notice effect and a fluctuation notice effect. When executing a single vibration effect (first vibration effect) as a foreseeing notice effect, the single vibration effect (first vibration effect) as a fluctuation notice effect executed after that is performed in the first mode (light emitting color: white , execution period: 1500 ms), second mode (emission color: red, execution period: 3000 ms), or third mode (emission color: rainbow, execution period: 3000 ms). , and a single vibration effect (first vibration effect) as a pre-reading preview effect are common (light emission color: white, execution period: 200 ms three times). According to such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control related to the pre-reading notice effect, and at the stage when the single vibration effect (first vibration effect) is executed, the player can change in any mode. Since it is not possible to grasp whether or not a single vibration effect (first vibration effect) as the advance notice effect is executed, the interest of the continuous advance notice effect can be improved.

In addition, when executing a single vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to vibrate the stick controller 31A in the form of the pre-reading notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation displays before the change display to be the target of the pre-reading notice effect. In addition, it is possible to display the pending display in an operation mode over a plurality of variable displays before the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading announcement effect.

For example, when the starting prize is generated, the number of pending memories becomes 3, and it is decided to execute a single vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect based on the determination of the start winning itself, the third is displayed in the pending display area 10TM011c. is displayed in an operational manner. As a result, the pending display 10TM001S of the operation mode is displayed in the pending display area 10TM011c.

Then, at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation designation command, the suspension display 10TM001S of the operation mode is changed to the stationary mode. At this time, as described above, the pending display 10TM001 after being stopped may be located at a position deviated from the center position (left and right center lines) of the pending display area 10TM011c. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the command at the time of starting the variation including the variation pattern designation command from the CPU 103, the variation display of the decoration pattern is started and the suspension display of the suspension display area 10TM011c is shifted to the suspension display area 10TM011b by the shift display. Then, a single vibration effect as a pre-reading foretelling effect is executed, and the stick controller 31A vibrates in the mode of the fore-reading foretelling effect (light emission color: white, execution period: 200 ms three times). Here, the suspended display 10TM001 shifted to the suspended display area 10TM011b is at the center position (left and right center lines) of the suspended display area 10TM011b at the time of shift, but the single vibration effect as the pre-reading preview effect has not ended. , the stationary mode changes to the operating mode again. As a result, the pending display 10TM001S of the operation mode is displayed in the pending display area 10TM011b.

Then, at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation designation command, the suspension display 10TM001S of the operation mode is changed to the stationary mode. At this time, as described above, the pending display 10TM001 after being stopped may be located at a position shifted from the central position (left and right center lines) of the pending display area 10TM011b. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the command at the time of starting the variation including the variation pattern designation command from the CPU 103, the variation display of the decoration pattern is started and the suspension display of the suspension display area 10TM011b is shifted to the suspension display area 10TM011a by the shift display. Then, the single vibration effect as the pre-reading notice effect is executed again, and the stick controller 31A vibrates in the mode of the pre-reading notice effect (light emission color: white, execution period: 200 ms three times). Here, the suspended display 10TM001 shifted to the suspended display area 10TM011a is located at the center position (left and right center lines) of the suspended display area 10TM011a at the time of shift, but is a single vibration presentation as a continuous notice effect (prediction effect during fluctuation). is not terminated, the stationary mode is changed again to the active mode. As a result, the pending display 10TM001S of the operation mode is displayed in the pending display area 10TM011a.

Then, at the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation designation command, the suspension display 10TM001S of the operation mode is changed to the stationary mode. At this time, as described above, the pending display 10TM001 after being stopped may be located at a position deviated from the central position (right and left center line) of the pending display area 10TM011a. When the production control CPU 120 receives a command at the time of starting the fluctuation including the fluctuation pattern designation command from the CPU 103, the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern (the fluctuation display which is the target of the continuous advance notice production) is started and the reserved display area 10TM011a. is shifted to the active display area 10TM013 by the shift display and is displayed as the active display 10TM003, a single vibration effect is executed as a notice effect during fluctuation (continuous notice effect), and the stick controller 31A moves the notice effect during fluctuation. mode, that is, the first mode (light emission color: white, execution period: 1500 ms), the second mode (light emission color: red, execution period: 3000 ms), or the third mode (light emission color: rainbow, execution period: 3000 ms) Vibrate either way. Here, the active display 10TM003 shifted to the active display area 10TM013 is located at the center position (left and right center lines) of the active display area 10TM013 after the shift, and is a single vibration effect as a notice effect during fluctuation (continuous notice effect). is executed immediately after the shift (or at the same time as the shift display), the active display 10TM003 after the shift display remains in the stationary state and does not return to the operation mode.

In addition, the single vibration effect as the notice effect during fluctuation (continuous notice effect) is not executed immediately after the shift (or at the same time as the shift display), but after a predetermined period of time has passed since the shift display, that is, the continuous notice effect (forecast notice effect). If it is configured to be executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the target variable display of 1 is started, the active display is displayed in the operation mode for the predetermined period (the active display after the shift display is ), and the active display is changed from the operating mode to the static mode in response to the execution of the single vibration effect as the variable notice effect (continuous notice effect) after the predetermined engine elapses. good.

In this way, by providing a pattern of continuous advance notice effect in which the single vibration effect is executed over a plurality of times of variable display, the interest of the single vibration effect can be further improved. In addition, in response to the execution of the continuous notice effect, the corresponding display (holding display and active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect is displayed over multiple times of the variable display. By displaying in a manner suggesting that the is executed, it is possible to diversify the interests of the vibration notice effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect is configured only by changing the mode of the operation unit (including the light emitting unit provided in the operation unit) as the effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Single vibration effect (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect), change in mode of operation unit (including light emitting unit provided in operation unit) and image display device 5, it is possible to execute a notice effect during fluctuation (a strong development effect, a blessing effect, and a probability change notification effect). This notice effect during fluctuation includes a blessing effect for notifying that a big win will occur, and also includes a definite variable notification effect for suggesting (announcing) the type of big win.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, single vibration effects (first vibration effect, second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect) The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the performance) is executed than when the single vibration performance is not executed (including the finalized performance for the big win). Here, like the first vibration effect of the first mode and the second mode, and the third vibration effect, although the expectation of the big hit is high, the display result may be "missing" (the big hit is not confirmed). may be executed.

In addition, the single vibration effect is executed at any timing during the period (periods T1 to T8 shown in FIG. 13-22) before the player is notified that the display result will be a "jackpot". is executed at any timing during the period after the player is notified that the display result will be a "big win" (the period after T8 shown in FIGS. 13-22). Thus, the timing at which the single vibration effect is executed is before the timing at which the blessing effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (3) to (8), one of the single vibration effects is executed before the single vibration effect (the third vibration effect in this example) is executed. A vibrating forewarning effect is being executed to foreshadow to the player. Here, as shown in FIGS. 13-19, the vibration notice effect is any of the single vibration effects (second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect) (third vibration effect in this example). It is subject to notice, and the blessing effect accompanying the vibration of the operation unit after the notification of the occurrence of the big hit is not subject to notice. That is, in the vibration forewarning effect, execution of the [blessing effect to be executed after being notified of the occurrence of the big win] is not foretold.

According to such a configuration, the tactile sense of the player can be stimulated by the single vibration effect. Players' expectations can be enhanced without being dependent on them. In addition, since the single vibration performance can be executed at a timing unrelated to the progress of the performance executed in the performance device different from the operation unit such as the image display device 5, the performance can be given unexpectedness. can be done. Furthermore, since it is possible to execute a vibration notice effect in response to such a single vibration effect, it is expected that the player will execute the single vibration effect before the single vibration effect is actually executed. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the operation unit (stick controller 31A). Here, the vibration notice effect is intended only for the single vibration effect in which the big win is not confirmed, and is not intended for the blessing effect in which the big win is confirmed. The player is not convinced of the occurrence of a big win. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the occurrence of the big win even after the vibration advance notice effect is executed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when there are a plurality of types of effects for vibrating the operation unit (stick controller 31A), the target of the vibration forewarning effect for notifying that the operation unit will vibrate is the big hit. It is a production that is executed before the occurrence of is notified, and by limiting it to a single vibration production that does not require a production device different from the operation unit, it is possible to appropriately generate the interest of each production. .

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Effect), the operation unit LED may emit rainbow colors, and as shown in FIG. In this example, the operation unit LED always emits rainbow color when the blessing effect is executed). Then, for both the single vibration effect and the blessing effect, it is determined that a big win will occur when the operation unit LED emits light in rainbow colors. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even if there are a plurality of types of effects for vibrating the operation unit, the player can get a big win based on the common effect mode (rainbow color emission of the operation unit LED). You can be sure. In this way, regarding the mode of presentation when a big win occurs, information suggested by the presentation can be clarified by standardizing it regardless of the type of presentation for vibrating the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-5, in the single vibration effect (first vibration effect of the first mode, first vibration effect of the second mode, and third vibration effect), the operation unit LED may emit white or red light, while, as shown in FIG. 13-9, the operation unit LED emits only rainbow colors in the blessing effect involving vibration of the operation unit. That is, there are a performance mode that is possible only in the single vibration performance and a performance mode that is common to the single vibration performance and the blessing performance. In this way, by making the mode of presentation in the case of vibrating the operating section different according to each presentation, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the presentation in which the operating section is vibrated.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, in the single vibration effect, the stick controller 31A is vibrated for 1500 ms to 3000 ms. As shown, in the blessing effect, an action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 6000 ms is executed. According to such a configuration, since the execution period of the action for vibrating the operation unit differs between the single vibration performance and the blessing performance, the single vibration performance and the blessing performance can be clearly defined in terms of performance, and the respective performance effects are enhanced. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 to 13-6, the execution timing of the first vibration effect is the timing when the variable display is started, and the execution timing of the second vibration effect is It is the timing of establishment of the ready-to-win state, the execution timing of the third vibration performance is the timing of development of the super ready-to-win performance, and the execution timing of the fourth vibration performance is the timing immediately before the notification of the performance result in the super ready-to-win performance is performed. . Also, as shown in FIGS. 13-13, 13-14, 13-16, and 13-17, the first vibration effect of the first mode, the first vibration effect of the second mode, and the third vibration The effect is a effect suggesting that the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display will result in a big hit is high, while the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect of the third mode are: This is a big win confirmation production for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a big win (occurrence of a big win). According to such a configuration, since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the execution timing of the single vibration performance, the player is interested in the timing at which the single vibration performance is executed. Become.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, when a starting prize is generated, a single vibration effect corresponding to the pending memory (variable display) based on the starting prize is executed. based on the fact that it has been determined, a specific display (active display, reserved display) corresponding to the reserved memory (variable display) is displayed in an operation mode different from the stationary mode. It is suggested that the single vibration effect is executed for the variable display corresponding to the specific display. That is, the specific display vibrates vertically and horizontally to remind the player that the operation unit vibrates, and the operation unit vibrates for the specific display (for example, a single vibration effect as a pre-reading notice effect) , or a single vibration effect as a notice effect during fluctuation) will be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-28, at the timing when the single vibration effect is executed, the specific display (active display, pending display) is returned from the operating mode to the stationary mode. (The vibration notice effect is terminated). According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration advance notice effect will be executed (or that it has been executed).

In particular, in the present embodiment, since there are multiple timings at which the operating unit vibrates, when the vibration notice effect is executed, there is a risk that the individual vibration effect that is the target of the vibration notice effect will be unclear. However, by ending the vibration notice effect when the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed, the player's consciousness is directed to the operation unit, and the single vibration that is the target of the notice is performed. The production effect can be enhanced by clarifying the production.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of ending the vibration forewarning effect (returning the specific display from the operating mode to the stationary mode) is shown before the single vibration effect for which the vibration foretelling effect is performed is executed. However, it is not limited to such a form, and at the timing when the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed, the vibration notice effect is ended (the specific display is returned from the operating mode to the stationary mode). Alternatively, the vibration notice effect may be ended (the specific display is returned from the operating mode to the static mode) during the period when the single vibration effect targeted for the vibration notice effect is being executed. . In addition, after the single vibration effect that is the target of the vibration preview effect ends, the vibration preview effect may be ended (the specific display is returned from the operation mode to the stationary mode).

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-11, the mode of the specific display (active display in this example) may be any of the normal mode, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode. , a single vibration effect (second vibration effect, third vibration effect, fourth vibration effect) corresponding to the specific display (variable display) can be executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 and 13-19, when a vibration notice effect is executed, a single vibration effect (second vibration effect, third vibration effect, third vibration effect) corresponding to the vibration notice effect is executed. 4 vibration effect) is always executed. In this way, when the specific display is displayed in the motion mode, the single vibration effect is executed at a higher rate than when the specific display is displayed in the stationary mode.

According to such a configuration, since the execution ratio of the single vibration presentation differs according to the display mode of the specific display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to the variable display in a suggestive mode (blue mode, red mode) different from the normal mode, the degree of expectation of a big hit related to the variable display can be suggested, and the specific display (holding display, active display) displayed in the suggesting mode (blue mode, red mode) changes from the stationary mode to the operating mode (vibrating vertically and horizontally) By doing so, it is also possible to suggest that a single vibration effect for the variable display will be executed. In this way, with the common specific display as the target, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by the display mode, and it is also possible to suggest that the single vibration effect will be executed. It is possible to diversify the presentation by the display and further improve the interest of the presentation by the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-20, the timer effect corresponds to any one of the third vibration effect, strong development effect, and cut-in preview effect. After the timer effect is executed (after the timer image is displayed), the timer effect is executed when the notice effect (third vibration effect, strong development effect, cut-in notice effect) is executed. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when the advance notice effect is executed without the timer image being displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (7) and (8), when the timer effect corresponding to the third vibration effect is executed, the timer image 10TM800 changes to the final mode (“00:00”). At the timing immediately after the update, the third vibration effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-26(8) and 13-27(9), when the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed, the timer image 10TM800 is displayed in the final mode ("00: 00”), the cut-in announcement effect is executed at the timing immediately after the update. In this way, as the effect pattern of the timer effect, there is a pattern in which the timer image is updated to the final mode when the single vibration effect is executed, and a pattern in which the timer image is updated to the final mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed. There is a pattern that appears.

According to such a configuration, when the timer effect is executed, the player cannot grasp whether the single vibration effect is executed corresponding to the timer effect or the cut-in notice effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the effect at the timing when the timer image is updated to the final mode, and at the timing when the timer image is updated to the final mode, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the operation unit. can. As a result, when the single vibration presentation is executed corresponding to the timer presentation, the presentation effect of the single vibration presentation can be further enhanced.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the single vibration effect is an effect configured only by the mode of the stick controller 31A including the operation unit LED (vibration presence/absence, vibration period, number of times of vibration, light emission color of the operation unit LED), An example has been described in which aspects of other effect devices such as the image display device 5 are not included in the effect components, but this is not limitative, and any type of single vibration effect can be a stick controller including an operation unit LED. In addition to the aspects of 31A (presence or absence of vibration, vibration period, number of times of vibration, light emission color of operation unit LED), aspects of other presentation devices such as the image display device 5 may be included in presentation components.

For example, as in the above-described fourth vibration effect, the operation of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is performed once at the timing when the first operation prompting display for prompting the player to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed. , the mode of the first operation prompting display is changed to a special mode related to vibrating the stick controller 31A (for example, the first operation prompting display vibrates vertically and horizontally). may be used). That is, the fourth vibration effect may be a effect including the vibrating motion of the stick controller 31A and the first operation prompting display of a special mode corresponding to the vibrating motion of the stick controller 31A.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, an example of executing a single vibration performance as a performance that suggests the expectation of a big hit was shown, but not limited to such a form, the single vibration performance suggests the expectation of a big win. In addition to being an effect, it may be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value currently set. For example, when the first vibration effect of the third mode is executed, when the final display result is "no", the set value is at least either "5" or "6" (high set value (there is) may be determined. In this way, the first vibration effect of the third mode, which is the single vibration effect, may be a high setting suggestion effect that suggests (informs) that the set value is a high set value.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a timer effect can be executed as a notice effect during fluctuation based on the determination result at the time of start of fluctuation. A timer effect may be executed as a look-ahead preview effect based on. That is, the timer effect may be executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect suggesting the display result of the variable display whose execution is suspended.

For example, as described above, the first vibration effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that predicts the degree of expectation of a big hit, which is a variable display whose execution is suspended (a variable display in which the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met). When executed, the timer effect may be a effect that is executed before the first vibration effect and foretells the execution of the first vibration effect.

(4) In the above embodiment, in the variation patterns (“Normal Reach Big Hit” and “Super Reach Big Hit”) where the final display result is “big win”, a blessing effect to congratulate the occurrence of a big win is always executed. Although an example has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and there may be a variation pattern in which the final display result is a "big win" and a variation pattern in which no blessing effect is executed. For example, in the "normal reach big hit" variation pattern, the blessing effect may not be executed.

(5) In the above embodiment, in the effect of vibrating the stick controller 31A, a plurality of effect modes with different vibration times may be provided for each color of light emitted from the operation unit LED provided on the stick controller 31A.

For example, in the first mode of the first vibration effect, the emission color of the operation unit LED is white, and the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once (first vibration pattern of the first mode). , and a mode (second vibration pattern of the first mode) in which the emission color of the operation unit LED is white and the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once. In addition, in the second mode of the first vibration effect, the emission color of the operation unit LED is red, and the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 1500 ms is executed once (first vibration pattern of the second mode). , and a mode (second vibration pattern of the second mode) in which the emission color of the operation unit LED is red, and the action of vibrating the stick controller 31A for 3000 ms is executed once.

At this time, the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display when the first vibration effect is executed is a big hit is: first mode (white light emission) first vibration pattern (short vibration time) < first mode (white light) light emission) second vibration pattern (long vibration time) <second mode (red light emission) first vibration pattern (short vibration time) <second mode (red light emission) second vibration pattern (long vibration time) is higher at That is, when the luminous color of the operation part LED is red, regardless of the vibration time, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the luminous color of the operation part LED is white. , the expectation of a big hit is higher when the vibration time is longer than when the vibration time is short.

Note that the degree of expectation for each effect mode is not limited to this relationship. Vibration time)<Second vibration pattern (long vibration time) of the first mode (white light emission) <Second vibration pattern (long vibration time) of the second mode (red light emission) The degree of expectation is set to be higher in this order. good too. That is, when the vibration time is long, regardless of the color of light emitted from the operation unit LED, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when the vibration time is short, and when the vibration time is the same, the operation unit LED emits light. When the color is red, there is a relationship that the expectation of a big win is higher than when the light emission color of the operation unit LED is white.

(6) In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, an example is shown in which a timer effect accompanied by a subtraction operation (countdown operation) of the numerical value shown in the timer image is executed. However, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, an effect of performing other actions may be executed. For example, as an effect corresponding to the advance notice effect, a present effect involving the action of opening a decorated box for a present (present box) may be executed. In the present effect, after the image of the present box is displayed, an operation of opening the present box and displaying the image of the present (hereinafter referred to as "present image") is performed. For example, as a gift image, an image of a character according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, an image of the character "change" corresponding to the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, an image of the operation unit corresponding to the single vibration effect ( For example, there is an animation image of the vibrating stick controller 31A).

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the vibration notice effect is an example in which any one of the single vibration effects (the first vibration effect, the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect) is the target of the advance notice. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the vibration notice effect may be a notice object different from the single vibration effect. For example, the vibration notice effect may be a notice target effect of a strong development effect, which is a type of fluctuation notice effect accompanied by vibration of the operating unit, in addition to the single vibration effect.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the vibration notice effect for displaying the specific display (suspension display, active display) in the operation mode is executed, the operation unit (stick controller 31A) is operated in response to the vibration notice effect. Although the example in which the vibrating effect (for example, at least one of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect) is always executed has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the vibration advance notice effect is executed. Even when the operation part is vibrated, the performance of vibrating the operation part may not be executed (for example, none of the second vibration performance, the third vibration performance, and the fourth vibration performance may be executed). However, the ratio of execution of the effect that vibrates the operation unit when the vibration notice effect is executed (for example, at least one of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect) is not executed, the ratio of execution of the effect (for example, at least one of the second vibration effect, the third vibration effect, and the fourth vibration effect) to vibrate the operation unit is higher than the ratio of the effect to be executed.

(9) In the above embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, when the display of the timer image 10TM800 becomes the final mode (display of "00:00"), the predetermined effect (the first 3-vibration effect, strong development effect, and cut-in notice effect) are always executed. (Display of "00:00"), the predetermined effect (one of the third vibration effect, strong development effect, and cut-in notice effect) may not be executed. However, the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed when the timer effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the predetermined effect is executed when the timer effect is not executed.

(10) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-28, when the vibration notice effect for displaying the pending display in the operation mode is executed, the target effect (operation An example has been described in which the pending display changes from the action mode to the stationary mode in response to the execution of the effect of vibrating the part. In this case, the vibration notice effect is executed at the stage of pending display rather than active display, and the target effect (effect that vibrates the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is not active display but pending display. being carried out in stages. Therefore, both the vibration notice effect in this case and the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operating unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect are executed before the start of the variable display that is the effect target. , both of which are effects corresponding to a look-ahead advance notice effect that "suggests the occurrence of a big hit before the variable display is executed."

(11) It should be noted that when the vibration forewarning effect for displaying the pending display in the operation mode is executed, the target effect for which the vibration forewarning effect (the effect for vibrating the operation unit) is displayed in the operation mode. It is executed after the pending display is shifted to the active display area (after the active display of the action mode is displayed), and the active display is shifted from the action mode in response to the execution of the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit). You may make it change to a stationary mode. In this case, the vibration notice effect is executed at the stage of pending display instead of active display, but the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed at the stage of active display. It is Therefore, since the vibration notice effect in this case is executed before the start of the variable display, which is the target of the effect, it corresponds to the anticipatory notice effect that "suggests the occurrence of a big hit before the variable display is executed." It is a performance. On the other hand, the target effect (effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration advance notice effect in this case is executed after the start of the variable display that is the target of the effect. This is an effect corresponding to the notice effect during fluctuation, which suggests that the display result will be a big hit.

(12) In addition, when the vibration notice effect for displaying the suspension display in the operation mode is executed, the target effect (the effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed at the stage of the suspension display. At the same time, the pending display continues to be displayed in the action mode (vibration forewarning effect continues), and after the pending display displayed in the action mode is shifted to the active display area (after the active display in the action mode is displayed). Also, the target effect (effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration notice effect is executed, and the active display changes from the operation mode in response to the execution of the target effect (effect of vibrating the operation unit). You may make it change to a stationary mode. In this case, the vibration notice effect is executed before the variable display that is the target of the effect and the variable display that is the target of the effect. This is a production equivalent to a continuous announcement production that suggests the occurrence of a big hit when executed. In addition, the target effect (effect of vibrating the operation unit) that is the target of the vibration advance notice effect in this case is also executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the effect and during the variable display that is the target of the effect. Therefore, it is an effect corresponding to a continuous advance notice effect that ``suggests the occurrence of a big hit before the variable display is performed and when the variable display is performed''.

(13) In the above embodiment, the specific display (holding display, active display) corresponding to the variable display is the first suggesting mode (blue mode, red mode) suggesting that a big hit will occur or that the display mode will change. , a special mode (triangle)) and a second suggestion mode (operation mode) suggesting that the operating unit vibrates. Specifically, one specific display is displayed in a normal mode (a white circle stationary mode) that is neither the first suggestion mode nor the second suggestion mode, and in the first suggestion mode but in the second suggestion mode. A display mode that is not a suggestive mode (a blue circle stationary mode, a red round stationary mode, and a triangular stationary mode), and a display mode that is the second suggested mode but not the first suggested mode (white and a display mode that is both a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode (a display mode that serves as both the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode, and is displayed in blue, for example). Some examples are shown in a case of displaying in a circular motion mode, a red circular motion mode, and a triangular motion mode. The specific display (suspended display, active display) is not limited to such a form, and is displayed in either the first suggestion mode or the second suggestion mode, and is displayed as both the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. You may make it not become a mode. Specifically, one specific display is a normal mode (white circle stationary mode) that is neither the first suggesting mode nor the second suggesting mode, and a display mode that is the first suggesting mode but not the second suggesting mode. (blue circle resting mode, red circle resting mode, triangular resting mode), display mode that is the second suggesting mode but not the first suggesting mode (white circle operating mode) may be displayed as

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
variable display means for performing variable display;
and a production control means for controlling production,
The production control means is
A corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect that vibrates the operation unit,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
As the display mode of the correspondence display, there are a notice mode suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state, and a special mode suggesting that the predetermined vibration effect will be executed,
The production control means is
As the predetermined vibration effect, a first predetermined vibration effect can be executed at a first timing, and a second predetermined vibration effect can be executed at a second timing after the first timing,
After executing the first predetermined vibration effect and before executing the second predetermined vibration effect, the corresponding display is set to the special mode, and when the second predetermined vibration effect is executed, the corresponding display is changed to the notice mode. It can be a non-special embodiment including
The predetermined vibration effect can be executed by a plurality of vibration modes,
A game machine characterized in that a ratio of control to the advantageous state differs according to the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect.

Images